JP2022066550A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of imparting a moderate profit to a player.

SOLUTION: Reservation information in a first special pattern side is acquired based on entry of game balls into a first operation hole, and reservation information in a second special pattern side is acquired based on entry of game balls into a second operation hole. Reservation information in the second special pattern side has priority over reservation information in the second special pattern side as a start object of a game round. In this case, when reservation information in the second special pattern side is acquired, it is identified whether reservation information in the second special pattern side corresponds to a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result. When reservation information in the second special pattern side corresponding to the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, the longest period is selected as a variation continuation period of a game round in the game round with reservation information in the second special pattern side in which consumption order is earlier by one as compared with reservation information in the second special pattern side as an opportunity.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. When the winning result is obtained, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-125488

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is preferable that an appropriate profit is given to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a moderate profit to a player.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 comprises an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions.
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. The grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination and
A predetermined profit-giving means for granting a predetermined profit to a player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant-corresponding information is specified in the grant determination.
The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, so that the game round operation is performed in each game round. A game control means that controls the game execution means,
In a situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the special information having a digestion order earlier than the predetermined special information is used as an opportunity. When a game round is executed, a specific period selection means for making the execution period of the game round longer than a predetermined length period, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to give a moderate profit to a player.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for 1st special drawing, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for 2nd special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the firing control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of special electric power in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during the special electric closure in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing in a sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the cycle setting process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the effect pattern in a sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the data table for game times production which is selected when the small hit result is not obtained. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the movie image dedicated to the longest period displayed on the symbol display device, and (b) is the time chart which shows the timing when the display of the remaining time image is started. (A)-(c) It is a time chart for explaining how the variation display of a symbol is performed in the symbol string of the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the data table for game times production. It is a flowchart showing (a) the selection process of the final stop period in the main MPU, (b) the flowchart which shows the selection process of the opening period in the main MPU, and (c) the selection process of the interval period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows (d) the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU. (A)-(e) When the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, per unit time. It is a time chart showing how the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode is gradually generated in. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure concerning the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various areas of the main side RAM used for managing the payout rate. It is a flowchart which shows the ball ejection rate monitoring process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry management processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the cycle setting process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fixing process which is executed in the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the storage area of the main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the cycle setting process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base sequence table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the additional sequence table. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first base sequence table in the fifth embodiment, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the second base sequence table, and (c) a third base sequence table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (d) the 4th base arrangement table. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration executed by the main MPU in 6th Embodiment. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal use period table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a shortening period table. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining the first base sequence table in the seventh embodiment, (b) explanatory diagram for explaining the second base sequence table, and (c) third base sequence table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in a main MPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how each of the non-regulated status, the first regulated status, and the second regulated status is set. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination executed by the main MPU in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination executed by the main MPU in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various areas of the main side RAM used for managing the total number of rounds in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the final stop period in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the opening period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of special electric power in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during the special electric closure in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of opening start in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the closure period in the main MPU. (A), (b) It is a time chart which shows how the execution mode of a round game changes according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the opening period executed by the main MPU in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display device in 12th Embodiment. (A) to (f) is a time chart showing how the display mode of the symbol changes when the game rotation effect is executed while the symbol sequence is maintained. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the effect pattern in a sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the data table for game times production. It is a flowchart which shows the extension setting process in a sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is a time chart which shows how the execution period of the waiting display of a symbol is extended. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information executed by the main MPU in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the destination identification process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration executed by the main MPU in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination executed by the main MPU in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62. It is a flowchart showing (a) the selection process of the final stop period in the main MPU, (b) the flowchart which shows the selection process of the opening period in the main MPU, and (c) the selection process of the interval period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows (d) the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU. (A) to (e) It is a time chart which shows how the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time is regulated according to the occurrence frequency of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by a high frequency winning mode. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed in the main MPU in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception process in MPU of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process in MPU of a payout control device.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as to be in a locked state. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the precision plate 55a described later on the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is equipped with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided at the lower right corner of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

As shown in FIG. 1, the launch operation device 28 is provided so as to project forward from the base surface of the front door frame 14, and includes an operation base 29a and an operation handle 29b. The operation handle 29b is formed in an annular shape, and is rotatably supported by the operation base 29a while being sandwiched by the operation base 29a in the front-rear direction. The rotation axis of the operation handle 29b is in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and there is a portion on the outer peripheral surface thereof where a player's finger can be hung during the rotation operation of the operation handle 29b. The operation handle 29b is urged toward the initial position by a spring (not shown), and is rotated to the right by the player to rotate to the right against the urging force. Then, as the amount of rotation toward the right side increases, the firing intensity of the gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism 27 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39. Etc. are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operating port 34. Is executed to pay out one game ball, and when one game ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 game balls are paid out to the special electric winning device 32. When one of the game balls is entered, 15 game balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into a game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal map display of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the normal electric power, the public electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b. The display area of the first special symbol display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special symbol display unit 37b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Further, the area of the display area including the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is also smaller than the display surface 41a.

In the first special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed with a winning prize in the first operating port 33 as a trigger, so that a variable display of a pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display unit 37b, a winning lottery is performed by using a winning prize in the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

The first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are configured by a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. The patterns displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters. Is displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure hold display unit 37c and a second special figure hold display unit 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. .. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 37c. Further, the number of game balls winning in the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display unit 37d.

Regarding the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 90 described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display or a predetermined display of a pattern is performed on the first special symbol display unit 37a based on a prize in the first operating port 33, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is displayed accordingly. At the same time, when the second special figure display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. .. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode described later, which shifts after winning a prize, etc. Is done.

The display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), the symbols which are a kind of the symbols are 9 kinds of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and shell-shaped symbols. It is composed of a sub-design consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface 41a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display surface 41a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface 41a. ..

When the symbol is variablely displayed on the display surface 41a based on the winning of the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, basically, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It ends with. When the variation display of the symbol ends, if the result of the internal lottery is the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, which will be described later, they are the same on either effective line. If a combination of odd-numbered symbols or a combination of the same even-numbered symbols is formed and the result of the internal lottery is the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or small-winning result described later, the predetermined symbol will be placed on one of the effective lines. A combination (eg, "3.4.1") is formed.

In addition, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variable display is started by any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined result is displayed and ended. Up to is equivalent to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

If a big hit or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning in the first operating port 33, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. Similarly, even if a big hit or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning in the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won.

Returning to the description of FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state.

The round display unit 39 displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode. Here, the opening / closing execution mode includes a round number specifying mode that occurs when a big hit is won and an opening / closing number specifying mode that occurs when a small hit is won. The round number regulation mode is an open / close execution mode executed up to a predetermined number of round games. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined opening continuation period elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a prize in the special electric winning device 32. That is. The number of round games executed in the round number specified mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 displays the number of times of the round game or the corresponding display. Further, the display on the round display unit 39 is started when the open / close execution mode is started, and is ended when the open / close execution mode is ended and a new game round is started. On the other hand, in the open / close number regulation mode, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 is the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 32. It is terminated based on the condition of either one of the above. In the open / close number regulation mode, the round display unit 39 is maintained in the non-display state.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is colorless and transparently formed by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 76, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of what has been done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collective unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 78 that controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and a payout control device 77 is also connected to the input side. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 66a to 66e are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The various prize detection sensors 66a to 66e are provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning portion corresponding to winning such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. The detection sensor is included, and the MPU 62 determines the winning of each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 62, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 80 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 80. Details of these various commands will be described later. The MPU 62 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 80 by parallel communication.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there is a drive unit 32b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. The figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are connected to each other. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a, a second special figure display unit 37b, a first special figure hold display unit 37c, and a second special figure hold display unit 37d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal drawing unit 38 is provided with a normal drawing display unit 38a and a normal drawing holding display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the MPU 62 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed in the MPU 62 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode, the display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed in the MPU 62. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly shown, the display control of the general drawing unit 38 is executed in the MPU 62. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the display control of the round display unit 39 is executed in the MPU 62.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of the game ball by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied.

Specifically, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit 78a for power-on and a power supply unit 78b for power-off. The power supply unit 78a for power-on is connected to a commercial power source in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. Has the function of The power supply unit 78b during power interruption is composed of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply unit 78a during power supply when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply). Is charged by. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off) such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power is discharged from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Memory is retained.

Here, the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 temporarily stores information on the current game state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. Will be done. In this case, by supplying backup power to these RAMs from the power supply unit 78b during power interruption as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply, the current game It is possible to store the state, the progress of the game, and the unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied to the voice emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the voice emission control device 80 and the RAM 94 of the display control device 90 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply is stopped. It will be erased.

The capacity of the power supply unit 78b during power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, one or two days). To. The power supply unit 78b during power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power supply unit 78b during power failure when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

The power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown), which is different from the power supply unit 78b for power failure during power failure. In the power supply / emission control device 78, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, the control system discharges from the power supply unit for power failure for a sufficient time to execute the power failure process. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply of the power supply, at a normal value. As a result, the main control device 60 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a launch control unit 78c in addition to the various power supply units 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the launch operation device 28 are electrically connected to the launch control unit 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the outer surface of the operation handle 29b and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is emitted. Output to 78c. Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the launch control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle 29b. Further, the launch control unit 78c grasps whether or not the launch stop switch of the launch operation device 28 is operated according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. Grasp the rotation operation amount of 29b.

The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition fulfillment signal (for example, a HI level signal) to the MPU 62 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the launch control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle 29b is being touched by the player, and indicates that the launch stop switch is not manually operated by the player. On condition that the signal is received from the push sensor 28b, the condition satisfying signal is continuously transmitted to the MPU 62. If any of the above signals is not received, the condition satisfying signal is not transmitted to the MPU 62 (for example, it becomes a LOW level signal). Further, as a condition for transmitting the condition satisfying signal, in addition to the above condition, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added.

The MPU 62 transmits a pulse-shaped launch instruction signal to the launch control unit 78c when a predetermined launch cycle has elapsed in a situation where the condition fulfillment signal is being received and the launch of the game ball can be permitted. When the launch control unit 78c receives the pulse-shaped launch instruction signal from the MPU 62, the launch control unit 78c drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 27 once. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27, one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every time a predetermined firing cycle elapses. Further, at the time of this firing, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, the game ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b. The details will be described later, but the predetermined firing cycle is measured by the MPU 62. There are a plurality of patterns of the predetermined firing cycle, specifically, the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute, and the first cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute. Two cycles, a third cycle that enables the firing of 80 game balls in one minute, and a fourth cycle that enables the firing of 70 game balls in one minute are set.

The voice emission control device 80 includes a voice emission control board 81 on which the MPU 82 is mounted. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A certain RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 82 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game times, the open / close execution mode, and the like, based on the command received from the main control device 60. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

The MPU 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 90. The MPU 82 transmits to the display control device 90 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 60 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 60. The display control device 90 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 60 without going through the voice emission control device 80, and communicates with the voice emission control device 80 more than the voice emission control device 80 in relation to the main control device 60. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the direction.

The display control device 90 includes a display control board 91 on which the MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A certain RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in. The MPU 92 performs display control of the symbol display device 41 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 80.

Although not shown, the display control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and at the same time, reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63 and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are referred to as a main side MPU 62, a main side ROM 63 and a main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the voice emission control device 80 are sound respectively. The optical side MPU 82, the sound light side ROM 83, and the sound light side RAM 84 are referred to, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the display control device 90 are referred to as a display side MPU 92, a display side ROM 93, and a display side RAM 94, respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

The main MPU 62 uses various counter information during the game to draw a winning lottery, set the display of the first special figure display unit 37a, set the display of the second special figure display unit 37b, and set the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. , The display of the normal figure display unit 38a is set, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of hits and the big hit type are used for determining. The jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure. The display units 37a and 37b and the variation type counter CS that determines the variation duration of the game times in the symbol display device 41 are used. Further, the normal electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the electric service open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure holding area 122 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The special figure holding area 122 includes a first special drawing holding area 125, a second special drawing holding area 126, and an execution area 127 for special drawing.

The first special figure holding area 125 includes a first area 125a, a second area 125b, a third area 125c, and a fourth area 125d, and a winning random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 33. Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 125a to 125d as the reserved information on the first special figure side. In this case, in the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d, when the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 125a → the second area 125b → the third area 125c → the first. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 4 areas 125d. By providing the four areas 125a to 125d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The second special figure holding area 126 includes the first area 126a, the second area 126b, the third area 126c, and the fourth area 126d, and the winning random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the second operating port 34. The numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 126a to 126d as the reserved information on the second special figure side. In this case, in the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d, when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 126a → the second area 126b → the third area 126c → the third area 126c. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 126d. By providing the four areas 126a to 126d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

In the execution area 127 for special figures, when the variable display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the hold information for the target for performing the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment for special figures is stored. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the hold information on the first special figure side stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure hold area 125 is used for the special figure. Is moved to the execution area 127. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the hold information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure hold area 126 is the execution area for the special figure. Moved to 127.

The information corresponding to the normal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 123 when a prize is won in the through gate 35. The normal figure holding area 123 includes a first area 128a, a second area 128b, a third area 128c, and a fourth area 128d, and numerical information of the normal number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 128a to 128d as the reserved information on the normal drawing side. In this case, in the first area 128a to the fourth area 128d, when the through gate 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 128a → the second area 128b → the third area 128c → the fourth area. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 128d. By providing the four areas 128a to 128d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored. It should be noted that the number of cells that can be reserved and stored in the normal drawing holding area 123 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more, and may be a single number. May be.

An execution area 129 for a normal map is provided in the normal map hold area 123. The execution area 129 for the normal map is an area in which the hold information for which the hit / fail determination for the support is to be determined is stored when the variable display is started by the normal map display unit 38a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 128a of the normal map hold area 123 is moved to the execution area 129 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The normal electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal figure holding area 123 of the main RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored general electric random number counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PA in the same manner, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of opening is relatively high or low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power open state in the normal power open lottery using the normal power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but it is high. In the frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power accessory 34a is opened when the normal power open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one open period is set longer. There is. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the general electric power is won and the open state of the public electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing period is set shorter than the one-time opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured period for the next public-electric open lottery to be held after one public-electric open lottery is performed (that is, the general-purpose map), compared to the low-frequency support mode. The duration of one fluctuation in the display unit 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than that of the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be awarded to the mouth 34 increases.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, in the general open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the public electric open state. In addition, the securing period secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is performed (for example, it is executed on the normal power display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display periods are prepared, it is easier to select a shorter securing period or the average securing period is shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. May be good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening period is lengthened, and the securing period secured for the next Fuden opening lottery after one Fuden opening lottery is held is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average period and increasing the winning probability, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

When the normal electric open state is won in the general electric open lottery using the normal electric random number counter C4, the general electric open state is set. The normal electric opening state ends when the public electric accessory 34a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a prize in the second operating port 34. Specifically, regarding these contents, the upper limit number is 10 in common in any of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening and closing of the general electric accessory 34a is once in the low-frequency support mode, whereas in the high-frequency support mode, it is more than one in the low-frequency support mode, which is specific. It is 3 times. Further, the duration of one opening of the general electric accessory 34a is 1 second in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 seconds in the high frequency support mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special figure holding area 125 of the special figure holding area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 126 of the special drawing holding area 122 at the timing of winning. Then, the winning / failing determination is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination is stored in the main ROM 63 as a winning / failing table. In the hit / fail table, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the hit / miss result. The jackpot result is a winning / failing result that can be a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can also be a trigger for shifting to at least one of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a winning / failing result that does not trigger a transition to both the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode, while the special electric winning device 32 becomes a transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing control is controlled. The deviation result is a winning / failing result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode and also does not trigger the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.

As the pass / fail table, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode. That is, the pachinko machine 10 has the hold information on the first special drawing side acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33 and the second special drawing side acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34. The same winning / failing table is referred to in the hold information, and in any case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery.

Specifically, each hit / fail table is described in detail. In the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit result is two (for example, "5" and "305"), and the value of the random number that becomes the small hit result. Is 3 (for example, "55", "355", "555"). Other than that, it is the value of the random number that results in the deviation.

In the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, the number of random numbers that result in big hits is set to be larger than in the case of the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, and specifically, 20 (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420" , "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the value of the random number resulting in the small hit is the same as in the case of the hit / fail table for the low probability mode.

If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and values of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result is obtained. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 in which the big hit is won in the high probability mode. ..

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special drawing holding area 125 of the special drawing holding area 122, and the game ball is stored in the second operating opening 34. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 126 of the special drawing holding area 122 at the timing of winning. Then, the distribution determination is performed using the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2.

Here, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set in the pachinko machine 10, and each of these jackpot results includes (1) the content of the open / close execution mode, (2) the content of the win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and ( 3) At least one of the three contents, that is, the contents of the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, is different.

The open / close execution mode executed when the jackpot is won is the round number regulation mode as described above. In the round number regulation mode, the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 between the start and the end of the open / close execution mode is relatively high and low. And are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening continuation periods from the opening to the closing of the special electric winning device 32. .. Specifically, a long-term mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long period, and a short-term mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.5 seconds, which is a shorter period than the above-mentioned long time, are set. Has been done.

In this pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by a player, the gaming area has a firing cycle of 100 per minute, 90 per minute, 80 per minute, or 70 per minute. The game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched toward the PA. The shortest firing cycle is 0.6 seconds and the longest firing cycle is about 0.86 seconds. Further, in the round game, the upper limit of the number of end conditions is set to 10. Then, in the long-term mode of the above-mentioned opening mode, the opening continuation period is set to be longer than the product of the longest firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short-term embodiment, the opening is continued for a time shorter than the product of the shortest firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, for a time shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball. The period is set. Therefore, if the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long-term manner, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will be awarded the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and the special electric winning device 32 is expected to win a prize for a short period of time. When the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in the embodiment, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will not be won. The open duration of the short-term embodiment may be the same as or substantially the same as the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, which is longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (that is, the first cycle) and is the longest of the game ball. It may be a period shorter than the firing cycle (that is, the fourth cycle) of.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game according to a long-term mode. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short-term mode.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening continuation period for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above values and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The open / close execution mode executed when a small hit is won is the open / close number regulation mode as described above. In the open / close number regulation mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened twice in a short-term mode. In this case, the upper limit of the end condition of the open / close number specified mode is set to 10, and the total open continuation period of the open / close number specified mode is the shortest firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit of the open / closed number specified mode. It is set to a shorter time than the product of. Therefore, in the open / close number specified mode, the round game is not executed, and whether or not the number is the upper limit is determined by the total number of winnings in the open / closed number specified mode. The probability that the opening and closing of will be executed increases.

The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 63 as a distribution table. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the distribution table shows the types of jackpot results: 10R low accuracy jackpot result, 2R high accuracy jackpot result, 5R high accuracy jackpot result, and 10R. High accuracy jackpot results are set.

In the 10R low probability jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which 10 round games occur. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the low probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This low-probability mode results in a big hit next, and at least continues until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games has reached the end reference number of times (specifically, 80 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more after the transition. In this case, the low frequency support mode is set. The low-frequency support mode transitioned after the end of the high-frequency support mode results in a big hit, and continues until the transition to the open / close execution mode. In addition, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode in the open / close execution mode regardless of which of the big hit result and the small hit result is triggered.

In the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode is a low-frequency winning mode in which two round games occur. In this open / close execution mode, the special electric winning device 32 cannot be expected to win a prize, so that the number of game balls to be paid out is substantially zero. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode if the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode is the high frequency support mode, while it becomes the low frequency support mode if the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. These support modes will continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

The 5R high-accuracy jackpot result is a high-frequency winning mode in which the open / close execution mode generates five round games. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high frequency support mode will continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

The 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is a high-frequency winning mode in which the open / close execution mode generates 10 round games. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high frequency support mode will continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

As a distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), it is used for the distribution determination of the reserved information on the first special drawing side acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33. The distribution table for the first special drawing and the distribution table for the second special drawing used for determining the distribution of the reserved information on the second special drawing side acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34. And are provided.

Specifically, each distribution table will be described in the distribution table for the first special figure, as shown in FIG. 8A, as the types of jackpot results to be sorted, 10R low probability jackpot results and The 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result are set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, "0 to 39" corresponds to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, "40 to 59" corresponds to the 2R high accuracy jackpot result, and "60 to 79". Corresponds to the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, and "80-99" corresponds to the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result.

Here, when a small hit result is obtained, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed twice in a short-term mode. On the other hand, in the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, the mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and in each round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a short-term mode. That is, when either the 2R high-accuracy big hit result or the small hit result is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is apparently the same. Further, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although the stop results different from each other are displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display unit 37a. In the symbol display device 41, the stop result is displayed in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a common symbol combination (for example, "3.4.1") on any of the effective lines. In addition, when a 2R high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the low-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode when a small hit result is obtained based on a prize in the first operating port 33 during the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result. The effect is executed in an indistinguishable manner from the above, and after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the effect indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode is not executed in the symbol display device 41 or the like, and the effect is applied to the first operating port 33. When a small hit result is obtained based on a prize, the effect is executed in the same manner as after the open / close execution mode. In addition, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode in both the case where the 2R high accuracy big hit result is obtained and the case where the small hit result is obtained in the low frequency support mode. With the above configuration, for example, in a situation of a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, when an open / close execution mode that becomes a low frequency winning mode or an open / close execution mode that becomes an open / close number specified mode occurs, the player , The game will be played while expecting that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8B, the distribution table for the second special figure has 10R low accuracy jackpot results, 5R high accuracy jackpot results, and 10R high as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. A certain jackpot result is set. In the distribution table for the second special figure, "0 to 39" corresponds to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, "40 to 59" corresponds to the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, and "60 to 99". Corresponds to the 10R high accuracy jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure, the probability of becoming the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode is the same when the big hit is won. On the other hand, the probability of becoming the high-frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. More specifically, the distribution table for the first special figure can be in the low frequency winning mode, whereas the distribution table for the second special drawing cannot be in the low frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the distribution table for the second special figure has a higher probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode in which the round game in the high frequency winning mode occurs 10 times than the distribution table for the first special figure. Therefore, as a type of jackpot result that can be selected when a jackpot is won, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 rather than a prize in the first operating port 33 and an internal lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player when the internal lottery is performed.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. In the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in the above is started, it means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the grant correspondence result. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed. There are two types of expected effects, reach display and notice effect.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of a symbol is performed in a symbol column is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the advance notice effect, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the situation or reach display in which the symbol is variablely displayed in a plurality of symbol rows in a part of the symbol rows is displayed. In this practice, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice effect can occur in both the game times when the big hit result is obtained and when the big hit result is not obtained, but the case where the big hit result is obtained has a higher probability than the case where the big hit result is not obtained. It is set.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the 2R high-accuracy big hit result and the small hit result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If so, the reach display is executed.

On the other hand, the determination of whether or not to perform the advance notice effect is not performed by the main MPU 62, but by the sound and light side MPU 82. In this case, in the sound / light side MPU 82, the lottery process of the advance notice effect is executed so that the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are more likely to generate the advance notice effect than the game times corresponding to the missed result. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS determines the variation continuation period of the game times (the variation continuation period in the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation continuation period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41) in the main MPU 62. It is used in order to do so. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation display on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. Obtained at the time.

<Regarding the prerequisite processing configuration for the main MPU 62>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game on the main MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 62 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. In the following step S102, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 62 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / emission control device 78 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 64. Determine if it is. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 64 is cleared as the initialization of the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is issued to the voice emission control device 80 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10). In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 62 will be described. The main control board 61 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and is further divided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 62. A peripheral circuit is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 62. .. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 62 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The main MPU 62 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of the pulse signal, and activates timer interrupt processing on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. And execute.

In this case, when the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the main MPU 62, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The next timer interrupt process will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 62, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 62 is next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt processing at the timing of 1 is set to absorb the portion exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 65, and if the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure processing is executed.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In the following step S205, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 64.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, the winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are read, and the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are connected. Execute a process to specify the presence or absence of a ball.

In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

In the following step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. The processing content of the launch control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208. conduct.

In the following step S213, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special electric control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S214, the Fuzu Fuden control process is executed. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the numerical information of the Fuden random number counter C4 as the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed. Further, when the hold information on the normal map side is acquired in the situation where the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is not performed and the normal electric accessory 34a is not in the open state of the normal electric power. Uses the reserved information on the Fuzu side to perform a Fuden opening lottery and start the variable display on the Fuzu display unit 38a. The fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined period, and then the stop result corresponding to the result of the public electric open lottery is displayed. Then, when the normal power open state is won in the public power open state lottery, the stop result corresponding to the normal power open state winning is displayed on the normal power display unit 38a, and then the normal power open state is set. The object 34a is opened in a predetermined mode (that is, the second actuating port 34 is opened in a predetermined mode). If the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, the above-mentioned public power open lottery, display control of the normal power display unit 38a, and the normal power open state are performed in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, and the support mode is set. If it is a high-frequency support mode, it is performed in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. In the open / close execution mode, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode regardless of the type of the support mode before the open / close execution mode is started and the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information related to the first special figure display unit 37a in the first special figure reserved display unit 37c. The setting, the setting of the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the second special figure display unit 37b on the second special figure hold display unit 37d, and the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general figure display unit 38a are common. Figure Set the output information to be reflected in the hold display unit 38b. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. , Set the output information for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 38a. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display content of the round display unit 39 is set based on the processing result of the immediately preceding step S213.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S217, when the game ball should be paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. The payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target in order to execute the payout of the game ball is executed. In the following step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processes of steps S207 to S218 are executed, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Launch control process>
Next, the firing control process executed in step S211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not a condition satisfying signal is received from the launch control unit 78c of the power supply / launch control device 78 (step S301). As described above, the launch control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle 29b is being touched by the player, and a signal indicating that the launch stop switch is not manually operated by the player. Is transmitted on condition that is received from the push sensor 28b. When the condition condition signal is not received (step S301: NO), the cycle measurement counter 64a (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S302). The cycle measurement counter 64a is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the firing cycle has elapsed in the situation where the condition satisfying signal is received from the firing control unit 78c.

When the condition condition signal is received (step S301: YES), the value of the cycle measurement counter 64a of the main RAM 64 is added by 1 (step S303). Then, whether or not the value of the cycle measurement counter 64a after the addition is equal to or higher than the value corresponding to the current firing cycle stored in the firing cycle area 64b (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64. (Step S304). As already explained, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of firing cycles, specifically, the first cycle that enables firing of 100 gaming balls per minute, and 90 gaming balls per minute. The second cycle, which enables the firing of 80 gaming balls, and the fourth cycle, which enables the firing of 70 gaming balls per minute, are set. There is. Information corresponding to any of the first to fourth cycles is stored in the firing cycle area 64b.

When the value of the cycle measurement counter 64a is equal to or higher than the value corresponding to the current firing cycle stored in the firing cycle area 64b (step S304: YES), a pulsed firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c (step S304: YES). Step S305). When the launch control unit 78c receives the pulse-shaped launch instruction signal from the MPU 62, the launch control unit 78c drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 27 once. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27, one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in the firing cycle measured by the main MPU 62. To. Further, at the time of this firing, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, the game ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b.

When the process of step S302 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S304, or when the process of step S305 is executed, the cycle setting process is executed (step S306). Although the details of the cycle setting process will be described later, a process for storing information corresponding to any of the first to fourth cycles is executed in the firing cycle area 64b.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is awarded to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, a process for acquiring the holding information on the special drawing side is executed, and the holding on the special drawing side is performed. When the information is stored, a pass / fail judgment is made for the reserved information on the special figure side, and a process for causing the game rotation operation is executed with the hit / fail judgment as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the winning / failing determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the end of the game rounding operation is executed, and the process during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, the pending information acquisition process is executed (step S401). In the acquisition process, when a game ball is won in the first operating port 33, the number of reserved information on the first special drawing side stored in the first special drawing holding area 125 is read out, and the number thereof is read out. When the number of pending information is less than the upper limit value (specifically, "4"), each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set in the first special figure reserved area 125. The reserved information on the first special drawing side is stored in the uppermost area where the reserved information is not stored. Further, in the acquisition process, when a game ball is won in the second operating port 34, the number of reserved information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is read out. When the number of the reserved information is less than the upper limit value (specifically, "4"), each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set to the second special figure holding area 126. Of these, the reserved information on the second special drawing side is stored in the uppermost area where the reserved information is not stored.

In the acquisition process, when the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, the hold command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the hold command, the display-side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information. In this case, since the hold command includes information indicating which of the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side has increased, the number is increased in the symbol display device 41. The display of the number of held items corresponding to the side that has been held is changed.

Further, when the number of reserved information increases as described above, the first special figure reserved display unit 37c and the second special figure reserved display unit are displayed in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). The display control is performed so that the display content of the 37d corresponding to the increase in the number of holds is changed to the display content corresponding to the increase in the number of holds.

In the following step S402, the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 64 is read, and in step S403, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 63 is read. Then, in step S404, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table.

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for the game round and a process for controlling the open / close execution mode. As the process for controlling the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (step S406), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the process for advancing the effect for the game round. The special figure changing process (step S407) and the special figure finalizing process (step S408), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set.

The processes for controlling the open / close execution mode are the special electric start process (step S409), which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 32. The special electric power opening process (step S410), the special electric power closing process (step S411) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 32, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the game at the end of the open / close execution mode. A special electric termination process (step S412), which is a process for controlling the transition of states, is set.

The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 2 addition, 1 subtraction or "0" is cleared corresponding to the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter. The special figure special electric counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

After executing the process of step S404, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in the step S404 is executed (step S405). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S406, and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure change process in step S407. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determination process in step S408, and if the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electric start process in step S409, and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the processing during opening of the special electric power in step S410, if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the processing during closing of the special electric power of step S411, and if the acquired start address is SA6. Jump to the special electric end processing of step S412. When any of the processes of steps S406 to S412 is executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S406 to S412 will be described individually.

<Special figure change start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing in step S406 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the reserved information on the special figure side is stored in either the first special figure holding area 125 or the second special drawing holding area 126 (step S501). If a negative determination is made in step S501, the present special figure fluctuation start process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S501, the process proceeds to step S502 to execute the data setting process.

In the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side is "0". When the number of reserved figures in the second special figure holding area 126 is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure is executed, and when the number of reserved figures in the second special figure holding area 126 is 1 or more, the data setting process is executed. The data setting process for the second special figure is executed.

As described above, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the reserved information on the special figure side is stored in either the first special figure holding area 125 or the second special drawing holding area 126. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved pieces in the second special drawing holding area 126 is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the holding information on the second special drawing side is stored. If so, the reserved information on the second special drawing side is set as the start target of the game round regardless of whether or not the number of reserved information on the first special drawing side is 1 or more. As a result, when the reserved information on the special figure side is stored in both the first special figure holding area 125 and the second special drawing holding area 126, the second special drawing side corresponding to the second operating port 34 The pending information will be prioritized as the start target of the game round.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure holding area 125 is moved to the execution area 127 for the special figure. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 125 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 2nd area 125b → 1st area 125a, 3rd area 125c → 2nd area 125b, 4th area 125d → 3rd area 125c, and then the 4th area. Area 125d is cleared to "0".

After that, the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0". The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. After that, a shift command, which is information for causing the sound / light side MPU 82 to recognize that the data in the first special figure holding area 125 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is terminated. By transmitting the command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 82 displays the number of hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold area 125 in the symbol display device 41. Change in response to the decrease. Further, when the number of hold information in the first special figure hold area 125 decreases as described above, the first special figure hold display unit 37c is performed in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed according to the decrease in the number of pending items.

In the data setting process for the second special figure, first, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is moved to the execution area 127 for the special figure. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 126 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as the second area 126b → the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c, and then the fourth area. Area 126d is cleared to "0".

After that, "1" is set in the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 64. After that, a shift command, which is information for causing the sound / light side MPU 82 to recognize that the data in the second special figure holding area 126 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is terminated. By transmitting the command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 82 displays the number of hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold area 126 in the symbol display device 41. Change in response to the decrease. Further, when the number of hold information in the second special figure hold area 126 decreases as described above, the second special figure hold display unit 37d is performed in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed according to the decrease in the number of pending items.

After executing the data setting process (step S502), the hit / fail determination process is executed (step S503). In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 63 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area 127 for the special figure, the information for the hit / fail determination, that is, the winning random number. It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 127 for the special figure is referred to by referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 63. Determines if is consistent with the low probability jackpot numerical information.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S504: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S505). In the distribution determination process, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure flag of the main RAM 64, the current game round is the reserved information on the first special figure side and the second special figure. It is determined which of the pending information on the side corresponds to. Then, the distribution table corresponding to the determination result is the distribution table for the first special drawing (see FIG. 8A) and the distribution table for the second special drawing (see FIG. 8B). Select from. After selecting the distribution table, the distribution determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, among the reserved information stored in the execution area 127 for the special figure, is the selected distribution. Understand which type of jackpot result is supported in the minute table. Specifically, when the distribution table for the first special figure is selected, any of the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 2R high accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, and the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is selected. Understand if it corresponds to the result. In addition, when the distribution table for the second special figure is selected, it is possible to grasp which of the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, and the 10R high accuracy jackpot result corresponds to. do.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S506). Specifically, the jackpot result in which the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S506, information on the mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S505 is stored in the main RAM 64.

The information on the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

After that, the flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S507). Specifically, the main RAM 64 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S507, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S505 is used. Set "1" to the corresponding flag.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a small hit result (step S508: YES), the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S509). Specifically, in this game round, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for the result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result. After that, "1" is set in the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 64 (step S510).

If the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result, the stop result setting process for the missed result is executed (step S511). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result.

After executing any of the processes of step S507, step S510, and step S511, the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed (step S512). The execution period of the game round is the fluctuation continuation period, which is the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 to the start of the static display of each symbol, and the variable continuation period of each symbol. It is composed of a final stop period, which is a period from the start of the static display to the end of the static display. In the variable continuation period acquisition process, a process for determining the variable continuation period among the execution periods of the game times to be started this time is executed. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period.

When the hit / fail judgment result this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S601: YES), the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result this time serve as an opportunity to execute the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode. It is determined whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. (Step S602). The total number of rounds counter 64c is executed in the low-frequency support mode after the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode is generated in the normal gaming state which is the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. This is a counter for the main MPU 62 to grasp the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode that occurred without any problems. The third reference value is the reference value of the largest number among the reference values set in a plurality of types, and is specifically "60". The total number of rounds counter 64c and the third reference value will be described in detail later.

If the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result of this time are either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S602: YES). , The longest period among the fluctuation continuation periods of a plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times (step S604). That is, if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the third reference value in either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, the process of step S604 is not executed. Further, even if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, if this time is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small hit result, the process of step S604 is executed. Not done. When the process of step S604 is executed, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the longest period and the type command including the current pass / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S615). ), The period adjustment process is executed (step S616).

If this time is neither the 10R low accuracy jackpot result nor the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, or if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S602: NO), the hit period from the main ROM 63 Read the table (step S603). The hit-time period table includes the first hit-time period table selected when either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, and the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result and the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result. It includes a second hit time period table that is selected if it is one of the small hit results.

In the first hit time period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and each of these groups has its own group. On the other hand, information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set. That is, in the first hit period table, there are a plurality of types so that the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, is relatively long or short. It is set, and each of the fluctuation type counter CSs of "0 to 198" is assigned to one of the plurality of types of fluctuation durations. By collating the numerical information of the variation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the first hit time period table, the information of the variation duration corresponding to the numerical information is the variation of the game times this time. Obtained as duration information.

In the first hit-time period table, a fluctuation duration longer than the fluctuation duration set in the second hit-time period table, the normal-use period table and the shortening period table, which will be described later, is set. Therefore, the fluctuation duration of the game times that is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is the fluctuation duration of the game times that is either the 2R high accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result. , And the fluctuation duration may be longer than the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. The average fluctuation duration according to the first per hour period table is the average fluctuation duration according to the second per hour period table, the average fluctuation duration according to the normal period table described later, and the average according to the shortening period table. It will be a longer period than the fluctuation duration of. Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, is one of the 2R high accuracy jackpot result and the small hit result. The fluctuation duration is longer than the average duration of the fluctuation duration and the average duration of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur.

The fluctuation continuation period set in the first hit time period table is the same as the fluctuation continuation period set in the reach time period table described later. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not a big hit result is obtained after the reach display from the fluctuation duration of the game times. However, it is not limited to this, and a part of the fluctuation duration set in the first per hour period table is longer than any of all the fluctuation durations set in the reach hour period table. It may be configured as. In this case, there is a variable duration of the game times in which the occurrence of the jackpot result is confirmed. Further, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times according to the first per hour period table is longer than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times according to the reach time period table described later. Therefore, the game times that are either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result continue to fluctuate more than the game times of the off-reach display that does not result in a jackpot after the reach display. The period tends to be long. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the first hit time period table is the same as or abbreviated as the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the reach time period table described later. It may be the same.

Here, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per hour period table. That is, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than any of the variable durations of the game times selected in other situations. Therefore, when this time is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result and the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period. ..

In the second hit-time period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and each of these groups has its own group. On the other hand, information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set. That is, in the second hit time period table, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high accuracy big hit result or the small hit result, is relatively long or short. Each of the 198's variable type counter CS is assigned to one of those plurality of variable durations. By collating the numerical information of the variation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the second hit time period table, the information of the variation duration corresponding to the numerical information is the variation of the game times this time. Obtained as duration information.

In the second hit time period table, a fluctuation duration longer than the fluctuation duration set in the normal period table and the shortening period table, which will be described later, is set. Therefore, the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, can be a longer fluctuation duration than the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. Further, the average fluctuation continuation period according to the second per-time period table is longer than the average fluctuation continuation period according to the normal-use period table and the average fluctuation continuation period according to the shortening period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur.

When the hit / fail determination result of this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S601: NO), it is determined whether or not a missed reach display occurs in the current game round (step S605). Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area 127 for special figures, the information for reach determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance for the reach generation determination table. Judges whether or not it matches the numerical information set in. When the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round (step S605: YES), the reach time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S606).

In the reach time period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and for each of these groups. Information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set. That is, in the reach time period table, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times that is displayed as an out-of-reach is relatively long and short, and each of the fluctuation type counter CS of "0 to 198" is set. It is assigned to one of those multiple types of variable durations. By collating the numerical information of the variation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the reach time period table, the information of the variation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information is the variation continuation period of this game. It is acquired as information of.

In the reach hourly period table, a variable duration longer than the variable duration set in the second hit hour period table, the normal period table and the shortened period table described later is set. Therefore, the fluctuation duration of the game times that is displayed as a missed reach is longer than the fluctuation duration of the game times that is either the 2R high accuracy big hit result or the small hit result, and the fluctuation duration of the game times that the reach display does not occur. It can be a variable duration. In addition, the average fluctuation duration according to the reach time period table is the average fluctuation duration according to the second time period table, the average fluctuation duration according to the normal use period table described later, and the average change according to the shortening period table. It will be longer than the duration. Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times that is the off-reach display is the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times that is either the 2R high accuracy big hit result or the small hit result, and the game times that the reach display does not occur. The fluctuation duration is longer than the average fluctuation duration. On the other hand, the fluctuation duration set in the reach time period table is the same as the fluctuation duration set in the first hit time period table as already explained, and the game times by the reach time period table. As already explained, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game is shorter than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the first per hour period table.

If the out-of-reach display does not occur in this game round (step S605: NO), the current support is achieved by determining whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 64. It is determined whether or not the mode is the high frequency support mode (step S607). The high frequency support flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode is the situation where "1" is set in the high frequency support flag. The low frequency support mode is the situation where the high frequency support flag is "0".

In the high frequency support mode (step S607: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is 3 or more (step S607: YES). Step S608). In the high-frequency support mode, as described above, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened is relatively high per unit time, so that the hold information on the second special drawing side is acquired. It will be easier. Further, as already explained, the reserved information on the second special drawing side has priority over the reserved information on the first special drawing side as the start target of the game round. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed according to the number of the reserved information on the second special figure side stored. ..

When the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side is less than two (step S608: NO), the normal period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S609). In the normal period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the variable type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and a game is set for each of these groups. Information on the duration of fluctuations is set. That is, in the normal period table, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the hit result is not obtained and the reach display does not occur is relatively long and short, and the fluctuation type of "0 to 198" is set. Each of the counter CS is assigned to one of those plurality of variable durations. By collating the numerical information of the variation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the normal use period table, the information of the variation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information is the variation continuation period of this game round. Obtained as information.

When the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side is two or more (step S608: YES), the shortening period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S610). In the shortening period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and a game is set for each of these groups. Information on the duration of fluctuations is set. That is, in the shortening period table, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the hit result is not obtained and the reach display does not occur is relatively long and short, and the fluctuation type of "0 to 198" is set. Each of the counter CS is assigned to one of those plurality of variable durations. By collating the numerical information of the variation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the shortening period table, the information of the variation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information is the variation continuation period of this game round. Obtained as information.

In the shortened period table, a variable duration shorter than the variable duration set in other period tables including the normal period table is set. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, in the situation where two or more reserved information on the second special figure side is reserved and stored, if the game round is started without a hit result and the reach display does not occur, another situation. The fluctuation duration of the game times can be shorter than that of the fluctuation duration. In addition, the average fluctuation duration by the shortened period table is shorter than the average fluctuation duration by other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, in the situation where two or more reserved information on the second special figure side is reserved and stored, if the game round is started without a hit result and the reach display does not occur, another situation. The average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is shorter than that.

In the low frequency support mode (step S607: NO), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is 3 or more (step S607: NO). Step S611). In the low-frequency support mode, as described above, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened is relatively low per unit time, so that the hold information on the second special drawing side is acquired. It becomes difficult, and it becomes easier to acquire the reserved information on the first special drawing side than the reserved information on the second special drawing side. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed according to the number of the reserved information on the first special figure side stored. ..

When the number of reserved information on the first special drawing side is less than three (step S611: NO), the normal period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S612), and the first special drawing side When the number of reserved information stored on hold is 3 or more (step S611: YES), the shortening period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S613). The contents of the normal period table and the shortened period table are as described above.

As already explained, the shortened period table has a variable duration shorter than the variable duration set in other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, in the situation where three or more reserved information on the first special figure side is reserved and stored, if the game round is started without a hit result and the reach display does not occur, another situation. The fluctuation duration of the game times can be shorter than that of the fluctuation duration. In addition, as described above, the average fluctuation duration of the shortened period table is shorter than the average fluctuation duration of other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, in the situation where three or more reserved information on the first special figure side is reserved and stored, if the game round is started without a hit result and the reach display does not occur, another situation. The average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is shorter than that.

When the hit time period table is read in step S603, when the reach time period table is read in step S606, when the normal time period table is read in step S609, the shortening period table is read in step S610. When it is read, when the normal period table is read in step S612, or when the shortened period table is read in step S613, the period acquisition process is executed (step S614). In the period acquisition process, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out as described above, the variation continuation period of the current game times is acquired.

When the process of step S604 is executed, or when the process of step S614 is executed, the change command including the information of the change duration of the game times acquired this time, and the type including the present / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result. The command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S615). After that, the period adjustment process is executed (step S616). The period adjustment process will be described in detail later.

The fluctuation command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and the fluctuation duration of the game times. The data corresponding to is included. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that the command itself is a variable command is set by the data of the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the hit / fail determination process is performed by the data of the next 4 bits. And the lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the hold information of any of the first special figure holding area 125 and the second special figure holding area 126 is set by the next 1-bit data. Trigger data indicating whether or not it is a trigger is set, and time data corresponding to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is set from the remaining 7-bit data. Therefore, when the sound / light side MPU 82 receives the variation command, it recognizes that it is the variation command from the identification data, and obtains the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. Recognize and recognize the fluctuation duration of this game round from the above time data. Here, since the main MPU 62 selects a variation duration of different game times depending on whether or not reach occurs, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sound light side. In the MPU 82, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the fluctuation duration of the game times. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit / miss judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and whether the mode is high probability mode. It contains data on whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode and data on whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode. Specifically, identification data for indicating that the command is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2 bytes of data, and the hit / fail determination process and the pass / fail determination process are performed by the next 4 bits of data. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the state recognition data of whether or not it is the high probability mode and whether or not it is the high frequency support mode based on the remaining 8-bit data. Is set. Therefore, when the sound / light side MPU 82 receives the type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. , Whether or not it is a high probability mode and whether or not it is a high frequency support mode is recognized from the above state recognition data.

Both the variable command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the hit / miss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, in the sound / light side MPU 82, by collating the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, noise or the like may be generated regarding the reception of the variation command and the type command. It is possible to identify whether or not a communication error has occurred. Then, when both lottery result data match, control for production corresponding to the contents of the variable command and the type command is executed, and when both lottery result data do not match. Can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound / light side MPU 82 may execute the game rotation operation corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game rotation. For example, in the game rotation operation, the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination may be performed. Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol display device 41 may make sure that the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed. In this case, the game rounding operation may be performed over the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the time data included in the fluctuation command, or may be continued until the next fluctuation command and type command are received. May be good. It should be noted that the variable command may be configured not to include one of the data of the result of the hit / miss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process, or may be configured not to include both data.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13), after executing the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process in step S512, the information on the fluctuation continuation period of the game times acquired in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process is input. , Set to the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S513). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

After that, among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the display unit on the execution target side of the current game round starts the variable display of the pattern (step S514). After that, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S515). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure change start processing to the one corresponding to the special figure change processing.

<Processing during special figure change>
Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step S407 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has elapsed (step S701). When the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has not elapsed (step S701: NO), the display update process is executed (step S702). In the display update process, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the execution target side of the current game round is executed among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. In addition, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not a reach display occurs.

When the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has elapsed (step S701: YES), the stop result display process is executed (step S703). In the display process, the display mode of the pattern on the execution target side of the current game round is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the current game round among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. Specifically, at the start of this game round, the stop result information stored in the main RAM 64 is read in step S506, step S509 or step S511 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), and the read stop is performed. The pattern corresponding to the result information is continuously displayed on the execution target side of the current game round among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. The display state of this pattern is continued until the next variable display of the pattern on the corresponding special figure display units 37a and 37b is started.

After that, the selection process of the final stop period is executed (step S704). As described above, the execution period of the game round is the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 to the start of the static display of each symbol. It is composed of a final stop period, which is a period from the start of the static display of each symbol to the end of the static display. In step S704, the final suspension period, which is the latter period, is selected. Two types of periods, 0.5 seconds (first final stop period) and 3 seconds (second final stop period), are set for the pachinko machine 10 as the period subject to the final stop period, and the final stop period can be selected. In the process, the side to be the final stop period of the current game round is selected from these two types of periods.

After that, the information of the final stop period of the game times selected in step S704 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S705). As a result, the measurement of the final stop period in this game round is started.

After that, the final stop command including the information of the final stop period of the game times selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S706). By receiving the final stop command, the sound light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of this game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and also sends a command corresponding to the final stop period to the display side MPU 92 to perform a design. The display device 41 starts the static display of each symbol that is the stop result of the game round this time. The static display will continue for the final stop period of this game.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S707). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the process during special figure determination in step S408 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S801). If a negative determination is made in step S801, the processing during determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S801: YES), the winning / failing determination result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S802:). YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the selection process of the opening period is executed (step S803). The opening period is a period secured until the opening of the first special electric winning device 32 is started in the opening / closing execution mode. An opening effect indicating that the mode is started is executed. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of periods, 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period), as the target period of the opening period, and the selection process of the opening period is set. Then, of these two types of periods, the side to be the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode of this time is selected.

After that, the information of the opening period selected in step S803 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S804). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, an opening command including the information of the opening period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S805). By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of the current light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S806). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special electric start process.

On the other hand, when the winning / failing determination result that triggered the game round this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S802: NO), the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 64 is "0". By determining whether or not the high-frequency support flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the result of the 10R low-probability jackpot in the game times that ended this time. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the high frequency support mode (step S807). The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery is the high-probability mode, and the situation where "1" is set in the high-probability flag is the high-probability mode. Yes, the low probability mode is the situation where the high probability flag is "0". Further, the high frequency support flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the situation where "1" is set in the high frequency support flag is high frequency. It is a support mode, and the situation where the high frequency support flag is "0" is the low frequency support mode.

In the case of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S807: YES), the value of the game count counter provided in the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S808). The game count counter is a counter for specifying the number of executions of the remaining game rounds in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode by the main MPU 62. When the open / close execution mode ends with the 10R low probability jackpot result, the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" and the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1". Is set, and "80", which is the end reference number, is set in the game count counter of the main RAM 64.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after 1 subtraction is "0", has the game times of the end reference number been executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode? It is determined whether or not (step S809). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S809: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S810). This results in a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

After that, the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S811). That is, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is not cleared to "0" when the high-frequency support mode is continued even if the high-probability mode is changed to the low-probability mode, but the high-frequency support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode. "0" is cleared when the transition is made.

When a negative determination is made in step S807, a negative determination is made in step S809, or the process of step S811 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S812). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing in step S409 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special power timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S901). If a negative determination is made in step S901, the special electric train start process is terminated as it is.

When the opening period in the current open / close execution mode has elapsed (step S901: YES), the jackpot result is provided on the condition that the execution trigger of the current open / close execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S902: YES). Execute the time setting process.

In the setting process at the time of the big hit result, the value of the number of round games corresponding to the current big hit result is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S903). Specifically, if the jackpot result this time is a 2R high accuracy jackpot result, "2" is set in the round counter, and if the jackpot result this time is a 5R high accuracy jackpot result, the round counter is set. Set "5", and if the current jackpot result is a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result, set "10" in the round counter. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games by the main MPU 62 in the open / close execution mode.

After that, on condition that the current jackpot result is not a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, that is, the current jackpot result is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (step). S904: NO), the setting process for the round history counter provided in the main RAM 64 is executed (step S905). That is, the setting process is executed when the open / close execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode is executed, and is not executed when the open / close execution mode that becomes the low-frequency winning mode is executed. Specifically, if the jackpot result this time is a 5R high accuracy jackpot result, "5" is set in the round history counter of the main RAM 64, and the jackpot result this time is a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result. If it is the result, "10" is set in the round history counter of the main RAM 64. The value set in the round history counter will be described in detail later, but is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode this time. In this way, by adding the value of the number of rounds executed in the current open / close execution mode to the total number of rounds counter 64c at the end of the open / close execution mode, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c has already been executed. It is possible to make it the total number of times the game is executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S904, or when the process of step S905 is executed, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S906). The winning counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not a winning of the upper limit number of game balls has occurred in one round game or one opening / closing number regulation mode.

After that, the read process of the open continuation period corresponding to the jackpot result is executed (step S907). Specifically, when the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, the information of the opening continuation period corresponding to the short-term mode is read from the main ROM 63. The opening duration is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball. On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the main ROM 63 corresponds to a long-term mode. Read the information of the open continuation period (29 seconds).

On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the small hit result (step S902: NO), the setting process at the time of the small hit result is executed. In the setting process at the time of the small hit result, "2" is set in the open / close counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S908), and "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 (step S909). The open / close counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed by the main MPU 62 in the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode.

After that, the read processing of the open continuation period corresponding to the small hit result is executed (step S910). The opening continuation period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and specifically, it is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball. The opening duration corresponding to the small hit result may be longer than the opening duration of the short-term mode and shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, and is the same as or the shortest firing cycle of the game ball. It may be substantially the same, and may be a period longer than the shortest firing cycle (that is, the first cycle) of the game ball and shorter than the longest firing cycle (that is, the fourth cycle) of the game ball.

When the process of step S907 or step S910 is executed, the read open continuation period information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S911). As a result, the measurement of the open continuation period is started. The open continuation period is constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Further, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is also constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls to be paid out when the special electric winning device 32 is won in the open / close execution mode.

After that, the opening setting process for opening the special electric winning device 32 is executed (step S912). Further, a release command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S913). The release command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 82 to recognize that the special electric winning device 32 is released. Upon receiving the release command, the sound / light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effect in the open / close execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 accordingly.

After that, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S914). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric power opening processing.

<Processing while the special electric train is open>
Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step S410 in the special power control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the open monitoring process is executed (step S1001). In the open monitoring process, the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 for one game ball winning in the special electric winning device 32, and the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0". It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. Further, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied even when the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", that is, when the opening continuation period has elapsed.

When it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied as a result of the monitoring process during opening (step S1002: YES), the closing setting process for closing the special electric winning device 32 is executed (step S1003). In addition, the process of grasping the end condition is executed (step S1004). Specifically, if this time is the open / close execution mode triggered by one of the jackpot results, the value of the round counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1, and the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is "0". It is determined that the end condition of the current open / close execution mode is satisfied. If the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, the value of the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the opening / closing counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the opening / closing of this time is performed. It is determined that the end condition of the execution mode is satisfied. Further, if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, it is determined that the end condition of the opening / closing execution mode of this time is satisfied even when the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is "0".

If the end condition of the open / close execution mode is not satisfied (step S1005: NO), the interval period selection process is executed (step S1006). The interval period is a period during which the special electric winning device 32 is maintained in the closed state between one opening time of the special electric winning device 32 and the next opening time. In the interval period, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit The effect corresponding to the interval period is executed in the 54 and the symbol display device 41. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of periods, 2 seconds (first interval period) and 6 seconds (second interval period), as the target period of the interval period, and the selection process of the interval period is set. Then, of these two types of periods, the side to be set as the current interval period is selected. Although the interval period occurs multiple times in the one open / close execution mode, the interval period is not changed in the middle of the one open / close execution mode, and all the interval periods are constant in the one open / close execution mode. Will be.

After that, the information of the interval period selected in step S1006 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S1007). As a result, the measurement of this interval period is started.

After that, a closing command including the information of the interval period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S1008). By receiving the closing command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the current interval period and starts the measurement of the interval period, and at the same time, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the effect corresponding to the current interval period. Let me. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform an effect corresponding to the current interval period.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S1009). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing.

When the end condition of the open / close execution mode is satisfied (step S1005: YES), the ending period selection process is executed (step S1010). The ending period is a period secured from the end of the opening state of the last special electric winning device 32 to the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the opening / closing execution mode. In the ending period, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 And the ending effect indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is terminated is executed in the symbol display device 41. The details will be described later, but the pachinko machine 10 has two types of ending periods, 6 seconds (first ending period) and 12 seconds (second ending period), and the ending period selection process. Then, of these two types of periods, the side to be the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode this time is selected.

After that, the information of the ending period selected in step S1010 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S1011). As a result, the measurement of the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, an ending command including the information of the ending period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S1012). By receiving the ending command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2 (step S1013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric end processing.

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the special electric closing process in step S411 in the special drawing special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the current interval period has elapsed (step S1101). If a negative determination is made in step S1101, the processing during closing of the special electric train is terminated as it is.

When the current interval period has elapsed (step S1101: YES), the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is provided on the condition that the execution trigger of the current open / close execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S1102: YES). Is set to "10" (step S1103), and the read processing of the open continuation period corresponding to the jackpot result is executed (step S1104). The content of the read processing of the open continuation period corresponding to the jackpot result is the same as that of step S907 in the special electric power start processing (FIG. 17). Further, when the execution trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the small hit result (step S1102: NO), the read processing of the open continuation period corresponding to the small hit result is executed (step S1105). The content of the read processing of the open continuation period corresponding to the small hit result is the same as that of step S910 in the special electric power start processing (FIG. 17).

When the process of step S1104 or step S1105 is executed, the read open continuation period information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S1106). As a result, the measurement of the open continuation period is started. Here, the open continuation period is constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Further, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is also constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls to be paid out when the special electric winning device 32 is won in the open / close execution mode.

After that, the opening setting process for opening the special electric winning device 32 is executed (step S1107). Further, a release command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S1108). The release command is a command for causing the sound / light side MPU 82 to recognize that the special electric winning device 32 is released. Upon receiving the release command, the sound / light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effect in the open / close execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 accordingly.

After that, the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1109). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing.

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric stop processing in step S412 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S1201). If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the special electric train termination process is terminated as it is.

When the ending period in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed (step S1201: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S1202). In the game state transition process, if the hit result that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode this time is a 10R low probability jackpot result, the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" and the high frequency support flag is set to "0". 1 ”is set, and further,“ 80 ”, which is a value corresponding to the end reference number of times, is set in the game number counter. As a result, the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode with the upper limit of 80 game times. If the hit result that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode this time is a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, "1" is set in the high-probability flag of the main RAM 64 and high-frequency support is provided. Set the flag to "1". As a result, the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. If the hit result that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode this time is a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, "1" is set in the high-probability flag of the main RAM 64 and the high-frequency support flag is executed this time. The state before the mode is started. As a result, if the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode is started is the low frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery is the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is changed. If the support mode before the start is the high frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If the hit result that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode this time is a small hit result, both the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 are before the start of the open / close execution mode. It is in the state of.

After that, on condition that "1" is set in the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 (step S1203: YES), the value of the round history counter of the main RAM 64 is read (step S1204), and the read value is read. Is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 (step S1205). As already explained, the round history counter of the main RAM 64 has the number of round game times that occur in the open / close execution mode at the start of the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the big hit result. The value is set. Therefore, the total number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, is stored in the total number of rounds counter 64c.

When the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained, the open / close execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, is executed, but the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is not added to the total number of rounds counter 64c. Further, when a small hit result is obtained, the opening / closing execution mode similar to the low frequency winning mode is executed, but the addition of the total number of rounds counter 64c is not executed also in the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, the payout of the game ball is substantially executed, in other words, the number of executions of the round game in which the player is substantially benefited is measured by the total number of rounds counter 64c.

Since the addition process to the total number of rounds counter 64c (step S1205) is executed on the condition that "1" is set in the high frequency support flag, an open / close execution mode that becomes a low frequency support mode occurs after the end. However, the addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is not executed. Further, as described above, when the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in step S810 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is cleared to "0". (Step S811), the transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode is executed only in step S810 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16). Therefore, the total number of rounds counter 64c includes the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode, which triggers the transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the low probability mode thereafter. The total number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode executed before the game rounds in the low-frequency support mode are started is stored.

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1205 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1206). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric end processing to the one corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation start processing.

<Processing configuration in the sound light side MPU 82>
Next, each process for controlling the execution of the effect and the notification on the sound / light side MPU 82 will be described.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a sound light side MPU 82 with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

First, the main command storage process is executed (step S1301). The main command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound / light side RAM 84 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 84 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored and stored in the ring buffer. It is read out sequentially according to the ordered order.

After that, the main command correspondence process for performing the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed (step S1302). FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the main command correspondence process.

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62 (step S1401: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S1402). Specifically, from the information included in the variable command, information on which is the hit / fail judgment result or the distribution judgment result determined by the main MPU 62 at the start of this game round is specified. A process of writing the specified information to the sound / light side RAM 84 is executed. In the storage process, the lottery result data included in the variable command is collated with the lottery result data included in the type command, and the communication of these variable commands and the type command is normally performed. It may be determined whether or not the communication is broken, and if the communication is abnormal, the notification processing and the data storage processing corresponding to the communication may be performed.

After that, the effect pattern determination process is executed (step S1403). The details of the effect pattern determination process will be described later, but the process for determining whether or not to perform the advance notice effect is executed, and the stop display is displayed when the variation continuation period of the current game times on the symbol display device 41 ends. The stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol to be stopped is executed. Then, a production pattern corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game round set in the variable command, the content of the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result in the current game round, and the presence / absence of the advance notice effect is selected, and the effect pattern is selected. The data table for the game rotation effect corresponding to is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. If an extension command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the content of the data table for game round production is modified according to the content of the extension command. .. In the data table for the game round effect finally stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 in step S1403, the execution period of the effect is the same as the variable continuation period of the game round determined this time by the main MPU 62. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the effect of the current game times corresponding to the above effect pattern is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Will be done.

After that, the game rounding command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 (step S1404). The game round command includes the pattern command corresponding to the data table for the game round effect read into the sound / light side RAM 84 in the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) and the stop symbol determined by the stop symbol determination process. The stop result command corresponding to the information of is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving these commands, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to these commands from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display of the current game times corresponding to the stop symbol determined by the above-mentioned effect pattern and the stop symbol determination process is executed by the symbol display device 41. To.

When the final stop command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1405: YES), the final stop process is executed (step S1406). In the final stop processing, the final stop period of this game is grasped from the content of the final stop command, the measurement of the final stop period is started, and the data table corresponding to the final stop period is sounded from the sound / light side ROM 83. Read to the optical side RAM 84. Since the final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds and 3 seconds as already explained, the data table corresponding to the final stop period is the data table corresponding to 0.5 seconds and the data corresponding to 3 seconds. There is a table. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the effect corresponding to the final stop period of this time is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to this final stop period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 causes the symbol display device 41 to start the static display of each symbol that is the stop result of the current game round. The static display will continue for the final stop period of this game.

When the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1407: YES), the opening process is executed (step S1408). In the opening process, the current opening period is grasped from the content of the opening command, the measurement of the opening period is started, and the data table corresponding to the opening period is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of opening periods, 4 seconds and 10 seconds, are set, so a data table corresponding to 4 seconds and a data table corresponding to 10 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the opening period. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to this opening period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display corresponding to the current opening period is executed by the symbol display device 41. It should be noted that the opening effect may be set not only according to the type of the opening period but also according to the type of the hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the opening effects of the 2R high accuracy big hit result and the small hit result are common.

When the release command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1409: YES), the release process is executed (step S1410). In the opening process, the opening continuation period is grasped from the content of the opening command, and the data table corresponding to the opening continuation period is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of open duration are set, 0.5 seconds and 29 seconds, so the data table corresponding to the open duration is the data table corresponding to 0.5 seconds and the data corresponding to 29 seconds. There is a table. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the opening effect corresponding to the current opening continuation period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. The speaker. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current opening duration to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display corresponding to the current open continuation period is executed by the symbol display device 41. In addition, the opening effect is not only set according to the type of opening continuation period, but also corresponds to the type of hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode and the number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode. The configuration may be set so as to be set. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the 2R high-accuracy big hit result and the small hit result are common to each other during opening.

When the closing command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1411: YES), the closing process is executed (step S1412). In the closing process, the current interval period is grasped from the content of the closing command, and the data table corresponding to the interval period is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of interval periods, 2 seconds and 6 seconds, are set, so a data table corresponding to 2 seconds and a data table corresponding to 6 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the interval period. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the closing effect corresponding to the current interval period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. .. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to this interval period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display corresponding to the current interval period is executed by the symbol display device 41. It should be noted that the closing effect is not only set according to the type of the interval period, but may also be set according to the type of the hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the 2R high-accuracy big hit result and the small hit result are common during the closing effect.

When the ending command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1413: YES), the ending process is executed (step S1414). In the ending process, the current ending period is grasped from the content of the ending command, the measurement of the ending period is started, and the data table corresponding to the ending period is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of ending periods, 6 seconds and 12 seconds, are set, so a data table corresponding to 6 seconds and a data table corresponding to 12 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the ending period. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to this ending period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display corresponding to the current ending period is executed by the symbol display device 41. It should be noted that the ending effect is not only set according to the type of the ending period, but may also be set according to the type of the hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the ending effects of the 2R high accuracy big hit result and the small hit result are common.

In the main command corresponding process, other processes are executed in addition to the above-mentioned various processes (step S1415). In other processes, a process for notifying and a process for performing a demo effect are executed.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21), after executing the main command corresponding process in step S1302, the light emission control process is executed (step S1303) and the sound output control process is executed (step S1304). In the light emission control process, a process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 is executed according to the data table stored in the sound light side RAM 84. In the sound output control process, a process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is executed according to the data table stored in the sound / light side RAM 84.

<Processing configuration to ensure that a moderate profit is given to the player>
Next, a processing configuration for ensuring that an appropriate profit is given to the player will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a cycle setting process executed in step S306 of the launch control process (FIG. 11) in the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S1501). As already explained in the total number of rounds counter 64c, the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode, which triggers the transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the low probability mode thereafter. Therefore, the total number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode executed before the game rounds in the low-frequency support mode are started is stored. The first reference value is a value larger than the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, and is triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result). It is the value of the number of round games executed in the opened / closed execution mode. Specifically, it is set to "10". As a result, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c does not reach the first reference value even if the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high accuracy jackpot result occurs only once in the low frequency support mode. Further, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low accuracy jackpot result) occurs once in the low frequency support mode, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c reaches the first reference value.

The first reference value is not limited to "10", and is a value larger than the value of the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively small. The value may be less than or equal to the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively large. Further, the first reference value may be a value larger than the value of the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively large, and the number of times the round game is executed is relatively large. The value may be less than or equal to the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the first reference value (step S1501: YES), in the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64. The corresponding information is set (step S1502). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503). The second reference value is the value of the total number of round games executed when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result) occurs twice, which is the first multiple times. The total number of round games executed when the opening / closing execution mode is the second multiple times, which is a value larger than the value and is triggered by the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low accuracy jackpot result). It is the value of. Specifically, it is set to "30". As a result, the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is generated in the low-frequency support mode, and the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained in the subsequent high-frequency support mode. Even if the open / close execution mode is triggered, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c does not reach the second reference value. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is further generated in the subsequent high frequency support mode, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c reaches the second reference value. The second reference value is not limited to "30", and may be less than 30 as long as it is a value larger than the first reference value and smaller than the third reference value. It may be a value larger than "30".

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1504). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505). The third reference value is the value of the total number of round games executed when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result) occurs five times, which is the third multiple times. The total number of round games executed when the opening / closing execution mode is the fourth multiple times, which is a value larger than the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (or 10R low accuracy jackpot result) and occurs 6 times. It is the value of. Specifically, it is set to "60". As a result, the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is generated in the low-frequency support mode, and the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained in the subsequent high-frequency support mode. Even if the open / close execution mode triggered four times occurs, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c does not reach the third reference value. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is further generated in the subsequent high frequency support mode, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c reaches the third reference value. The third reference value is not limited to "60", and may be less than 60 or larger than "60" as long as it is larger than the second reference value. ..

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables firing of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1506). The third cycle is 0.75 seconds, which is the second longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the third cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S1505: NO), in the fourth cycle capable of firing 70 game balls per minute in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64. The corresponding information is set (step S1507). The fourth cycle is about 0.86 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the 4th cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the 4th cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth cycle elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Will be. As the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The firing cycle of the game ball gradually increases as the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the greater the number of occurrences. The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle, if the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, in which the round game is played five times, occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from becoming excessive.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the addition is not performed to the total number of rounds counter 64c. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

Addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is performed when the open / close execution mode ends, and does not occur in the middle of the open / close execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the firing cycle of the game ball from being suddenly delayed in the middle of the open / close execution mode.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process executed in step S616 of the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the main MPU 62.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable continuation period of the game times this time (step S1601: YES), the process for extending the variable continuation period of the game times shown in steps S1602 and subsequent steps is not executed. As described above, when a game number that results in a big hit occurs in a situation where the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, step S604 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14). The longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of this game. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, the process for extending the variable duration of the game times shown in step S1602 and subsequent steps is not executed, so that the long period of the variable duration of the game times is long. It is possible to prevent the conversion from being executed cumulatively for the fluctuation duration of one game.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S1601: NO), and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. (Step S1602: YES), the first extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S1603). Specifically, 1 second is added as the first extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). Further, a first extension command indicating that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S1604). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. This will be described in detail later. The first reference value is "10" as described above, and the second reference value is "30" as described above.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S1601: NO), and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value. (Step S1605: YES), the second extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S1606). Specifically, 2 seconds is added as the second extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). Further, a second extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S1607). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. This will be described in detail later. The third reference value is "60" as described above.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S1601: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S1608: YES), the fluctuation The third extension process of the continuation period is executed (step S1609). Specifically, 3 seconds is added as the third extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). Further, a third extension command indicating that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S1610). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. This will be described in detail later.

As described above, the larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, it is the high-frequency support mode. However, the fluctuation duration of the game times will be long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes gradually longer as the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the greater the number of occurrences. The fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of times the game is generated per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended only by the opening / closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the round games are played 5 times. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times a game is played per unit time.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the addition is not performed to the total number of rounds counter 64c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of times of game occurrence per unit time from being generated even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game ball.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern determination process executed in step S1403 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22) in the sound / light side MPU 82.

First, the information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is grasped from the fluctuation command received this time (step S1701). After that, the lottery process for the advance notice effect is executed (step S1702). In the lottery process of the advance notice effect, it is decided by lottery whether or not to generate the advance notice effect in this game round. In the advance notice effect, the symbol display device 41 stops the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the variable display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 to form a combination of reach symbols with the same symbol, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is formed. It is performed in the situation where the fluctuation display of is continued. In the advance notice effect, a character image different from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed for a predetermined period. In the lottery process of the advance notice effect, the lottery is executed so that the game times corresponding to the big hit result are more likely to generate the advance notice effect than the game times corresponding to the missed result.

After that, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1703). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the same symbol is on one effective line L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is determined as the information of the stop result of this time. The effective lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

The 5R high-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result have a higher probability that the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed than the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result. In addition, the probability that the combination of "7" symbols is stopped and displayed in the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is higher than that in the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result. Further, if the game result of this game round is a 2R high accuracy big hit result or a small hit result, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1. Information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination (“3.4.1”) is established on L5 is determined as the information of the stop result this time. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is out of order, the presence / absence of reach display is specified from the content of the variable command. When the reach display occurs, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination is on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the stop result this time. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the above specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach is on all the effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the stop result of this time.

After that, the information on the fluctuation duration of the game times set in the change command received this time, the contents of the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result in this game time, and the effect pattern corresponding to the presence / absence of the advance notice effect. Is selected, and the data table for the game round effect corresponding to the effect pattern is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1704). Although the information on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703) is not reflected in the effect pattern, the information on the stop symbol is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 as described above. Therefore, the moving image display of the game times in the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the above-mentioned effect pattern and corresponds to the information of the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703).

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the data table for the game rotation effect to be selected when the small hit result is not obtained.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is 2 seconds or 3 seconds, it is not a big hit result, and further, the advance notice effect is not won in the lottery process of the advance notice effect. Therefore, when the variation duration of the game times specified in the variation command is 2 seconds, the first data table is selected as the data table for the game times production, and the variation continuation period of the game times is 3 seconds. In some cases, the second data table is selected as the data table for the game rotation effect.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is 5 seconds or more, there are a plurality of data tables corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot result and the presence / absence of the advance notice effect. Therefore, when the fluctuation duration of the game times specified in the fluctuation command is 5 or more, the data table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot result and the presence / absence of the advance notice effect is selected from the corresponding plurality of data tables. To.

The 10-minute fluctuation duration is the longest fluctuation duration of the game times in the pachinko machine 10. As already explained, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value and a game number that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs, the fluctuation continues. In step S604 in the period acquisition process (FIG. 14), the longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game times. And the longest period is not selected except in the situation. Therefore, the longest duration of variation of 10 minutes is selected only in the case of jackpot results. On the other hand, even if it is the longest period, the advance notice effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, the n + 4th data table is selected when the fluctuation continuation period of 10 minutes and the notice effect does not occur, and the n + 5 data table is selected when the notice effect occurs in the fluctuation continuation period of 10 minutes. Will be done.

As described above, the longest period is selected when a game number that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs in a situation where the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value. Therefore, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R The fluctuation duration of the game times, which is one of the high-accuracy jackpot results, becomes extremely long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, it takes a long time until the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

When the 10-minute fluctuation continuation period, which is the longest period, is selected, in the moving image display of the game times on the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started, and then the upper symbol row Z1 The variation display of the symbol in is stopped, and further, the variation display of the symbol in the lower symbol column Z3 is stopped. In this case, the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed by stopping and displaying the same symbol on one or two effective lines L1 to L5 in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. Then, in this situation, the reach display is performed by continuing the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol column Z2. When the advance notice effect occurs, the character corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed when the reach display is started. After that, an image showing that the combination of reach symbols and the variable display of the symbols are performed in the middle symbol row Z2 is reduced and displayed in the corner portion of the symbol display device 41, and instead, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. A long-term dedicated movie image, which is a live-action image along a series of stories, is displayed in substantially the entire 41a.

FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the movie image dedicated to the longest period displayed on the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 shows that the combination of reach symbols and the variable display of the symbols are performed in the middle symbol row Z2 at the upper right corner portion thereof. Image G1 is displayed. Then, the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed in a large display range including the center of the display surface 41a. The movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is not displayed when the reach display occurs or the reach display does not occur. In addition, it is not displayed even in the game times that result in a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small hit result. Therefore, when the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the occurrence of the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is confirmed. That is, when the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, it is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, is generated. This makes it possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period.

When the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the remaining time image G3 for notifying the remaining time of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed in the upper left corner portion of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed. In this case, since the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period ends when the fluctuation continuation period of the game times elapses, it can be said that the remaining time image G3 is notified of the remaining time of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is the longest period, the player can grasp the remaining time of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. , It is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety about the fact that the game is not completed easily.

The timing at which the display of the remaining time image G3 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27 (b). FIG. 27 (b1) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 27 (b2) shows the period during which the pre-reach display in which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is not stopped is performed. 27 (b3) shows the period during which the reach display is executed, FIG. 27 (b4) shows the period during which the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, and FIG. 27 (b5) shows the remaining time image G3. Indicates the period during which is displayed.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 27 (b1), the game round having the longest period is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 27 (b2), the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. After that, the fluctuation display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and the fluctuation display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 27 (b2) at the timing of the t2. The pre-reach display is terminated and the reach display is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b3).

After that, at the timing of t3, the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b4), and further, at the timing of the t3, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b5). It will be started. Then, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b3) and 27 (b4), the reach display is terminated when the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is terminated. Further, at the timing of t4, the time displayed in the remaining time image G3 becomes 0 seconds, and as shown in FIG. 27 (b5), the remaining time image G3 is not displayed. After that, when the final stop period elapses at the timing of t5, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 27 (b1).

As described above, when the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player recognize that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, is generated by starting the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period, and the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the remaining time from being lowered by the display of the remaining time image G3.

Returning to the explanation of the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 25), after reading the data table for the game rotation effect into the sound light side RAM 84 in step S1704, the first extension command, the second extension command, and the second extension command from the main side MPU 62. It is determined whether or not any of the third extension commands has been received (step S1705). When any one of the first extension command, the second extension command, and the third extension command is received (step S1705: YES), the variable duration extension process is executed (step S1706). In the variable continuation period extension process, if the first extension command is received, the variable continuation period of the game times grasped in step S1701 is extended by 1 second, and the second extension command is received. For example, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped in step S1701 is extended by 2 seconds, and if the third extension command is received, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped in step S1701 is extended by 3 seconds. As a result, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped by the sound / light side MPU 82 can be made the same as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped by the main MPU 62.

After that, the correction process of the data table is executed (step S1707). In the data table correction process, a process for correcting the contents of the data table for game rotation effect read into the sound / light side RAM 84 in step S1704 is executed according to the extension of the variation duration of the game times. The modification of the data table for the game round production will be described below.

28 (a) to 28 (c) are time charts for explaining how the fluctuation display of the symbols is performed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. FIG. 28 (a) shows a case where the variation duration of the game times is 5 seconds, the variation display of the symbols in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped, and the reach display does not occur, and FIG. 28 (b) shows the game. FIG. 28 (c) shows a case where the fluctuation duration of the times is 2 seconds and the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time and the reach display does not occur. FIG. 28 (c) shows the fluctuation duration of the game times is 20. It is a second, and shows the case where the variation display of the symbols in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped and the reach display occurs. Further, FIGS. 28 (a1), 28 (b1) and 28 (c1) show the period during which the symbol variation is displayed in the upper symbol row Z1, and FIGS. 28 (a2) and 28 (b2) show. 28 (c2) and FIG. 28 (c2) show the period during which the symbol variation is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, and FIGS. 28 (a3), 28 (b3) and 28 (c3) are shown in the lower symbol row Z3. Indicates the period during which the symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is 5 seconds and the fluctuation display of the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped and the reach display does not occur, as shown in FIGS. 28 (a1) to 28 (a3). At the timing of t1, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 is impossible or difficult in appearance. Will be done. After that, first, at the timing of t2 for the upper symbol row Z1, the high-speed fluctuation display is changed to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1 is easy in appearance. It is switched, and at the timing of t3 thereafter, the variation display of the symbol in the upper symbol sequence Z1 is stopped as shown in FIG. 28 (a1). After that, with respect to the lower symbol row Z3, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the lower symbol row Z3 can be easily identified in appearance, and the timing of t4. As shown in FIG. 28 (a3), the variation display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. After that, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the middle symbol row Z2 can be easily identified in appearance, and the timing of t5. As shown in FIG. 28 (a2), the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is 2 seconds and the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time and the reach display does not occur, as shown in FIGS. 28 (b1) to 28 (b3). At the timing of t11, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 is impossible or difficult in appearance. Will be done. After that, at the timing of t12, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is easy in appearance. After that, as shown in FIGS. 28 (b1) to 28 (b3) at the timing of t13, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

When the variation duration of the game times is 20 seconds, the variation display of the symbols in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped and the reach display occurs, as shown in FIGS. 28 (c1) to 28 (c3). At the timing of t21, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 is impossible or difficult in appearance. Will be done. After that, first, at the timing of t22 for the upper symbol row Z1, the high-speed fluctuation display is changed to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1 is easy in appearance. It is switched, and at the timing of t23 thereafter, the variation display of the symbol in the upper symbol sequence Z1 is stopped as shown in FIG. 28 (c1). After that, with respect to the lower symbol row Z3, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the lower symbol row Z3 can be easily identified in appearance, and the timing of t24. As shown in FIG. 28 (c3), the variation display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. At the timing of t24, the reach display is started by forming a combination of reach symbols by the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. After that, in the situation where the reach display is executed, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in the middle symbol row Z2 is easy in appearance. At the timing of t25, as shown in FIG. 28 (c2), the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing of t21 to the timing of t22, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

As described above, regardless of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z1 to the predetermined high-speed fluctuation display period from the start of the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In Z3, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol becomes impossible or difficult in appearance. In this case, if the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended, this high-speed fluctuation display period is extended.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table for playing a game.

In the data table for game time production, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the target game time is set, and information on the content of the task is set corresponding to each pointer information. ing. The information on the content of the task is information set for performing the effect corresponding to the game times this time, and the display light emitting unit 53 so as to execute the effect according to the information on the content of the task in each frame. Light emission control and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed.

In the data table for game rotation effect shown in FIG. 29, the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "0", and the pointer information of "160" is the low speed in the fluctuation display of the symbol in the upper symbol sequence Z1. The data at the start of the variable display is set, the data at the stop of the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol column Z1 is set in the pointer information of "200", and the lower is set in the pointer information of "300". The data at the time of stopping the fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol column Z3 is set, the data at the start of the advance notice effect is set in the pointer information of "400", and the super reach starts in the pointer information of "700". The time data is set, and the pointer information of "1400" is set to the data at the time when the fluctuation display of the symbol in the middle symbol string Z2 is stopped. Data for updating the content of the effect between each timing is set in the pointer information other than these.

In such a data table for game rotation effect, the pointer information of "0" to the pointer information of "160" are displayed in high-speed fluctuation so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. It becomes the high-speed fluctuation display period in which is performed. Therefore, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, the pointer information for the period corresponding to this extension is added to the range of the pointer information of "0" to the pointer information of "160". The range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display is increased by the period corresponding to this extension. Then, the combination of the pointer information after "161" and the information of the content of the corresponding task is shifted to the rear side by the amount of the added pointer information. Further, data for continuing the effect corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display is written in the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information added in the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. When adding the pointer information, when the first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 1 second is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the main side is added. When the second extension command is received from the MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the third extension command is received from the main MPU 62. If so, the pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the data table for the game round effect stored in advance in the sound / light side ROM 83 is modified in accordance with the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round this time.

Here, as described above, after the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is executed in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22) of the sound / light side MPU 82, the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is performed. The pattern command corresponding to the read data table for the game rotation effect and the stop result command corresponding to the information of the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703) are transmitted to the display side MPU 92. In this case, if the data table modification process (step S1707) is not executed in the sound / light side MPU 82, the data table for the game rotation effect read into the sound / light side RAM 84 in the data table read process (step S1704). A pattern command in which the information corresponding to is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. Further, when the data table modification process (step S1707) is executed in the sound / light side MPU 82, it corresponds to the data table for the game rotation effect read into the sound / light side RAM 84 in the data table read process (step S1704). A pattern command in which not only the information to be played but also the information corresponding to the extended duration of the fluctuation of the game times is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

When the display side MPU 92 receives the pattern command and the stop result command, first, the information corresponding to the data table for the game rotation effect read into the sound light side RAM 84 in the data table read processing (step S1704) in the pattern command. And, the display data table corresponding to the combination of information corresponding to the stop result command is read from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94. The data structure of the display data table is basically the same as that of the game round production data table, and specifically, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the target game round is set. The information of the task contents is set corresponding to each pointer information. The information of the task contents in the display data table is the information set for displaying the moving image corresponding to the current game times, and the image display according to the task contents information is executed in each frame. This is information for controlling the display of the symbol display device 41.

In this case, if the received pattern command is set with information corresponding to the period in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, the same as in the data table correction process (step S1707) in the sound light side MPU 82. , The range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display in the display data table is increased by the period corresponding to this extension. Then, the pointer information following the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display and the information of the content of the corresponding task are shifted to the rear side by the amount of the added pointer information. Further, data for continuing the high-speed fluctuation display is written in the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information added in the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. When adding the pointer information, when the first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 1 second is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the main side is added. When the second extension command is received from the MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the third extension command is received from the main MPU 62. If so, the pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the display data table stored in advance in the display side ROM 93 is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times this time.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended as described above, the high-speed fluctuation display period in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set. It will be extended. As a result, it is possible to extend the fluctuation duration of the game times while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, the data table for the game times effect stored in advance in the sound / light side ROM 83 is modified and displayed in accordance with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. The display data table stored in advance in the side ROM 93 is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. As a result, it is not necessary to store in advance the data table for the game rotation effect and the data table for display corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the ROMs 83 and 93. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity required for the ROMs 83 and 93.

Next, the final stop period selection process executed in step S704 of the special figure changing process (FIG. 15) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30 (a).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1801: NO), the first final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1802). The first final stop period is 0.5 seconds. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1801: YES), the second final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1803). The second final suspension period is 3 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as described above.

As described above, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes the second reference value or more, the final stop period of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, it is the high-frequency support mode. However, the final suspension period of the game times will be longer. Then, as the final stop period of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The final stop period of the game is not extended just by the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games, and the opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games. When the mode occurs three times, the final stop period of the game times is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times a game is played per unit time.

Next, the opening period selection process executed in step S803 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 16) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30 (b).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1811: NO), the first opening period is selected as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S1812). The first opening period is 4 seconds. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1811: YES), the second opening period is selected as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S1813). The second opening period is 10 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as described above.

As described above, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes the second reference value or more, the opening period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the opening period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the opening period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening period of the open / close execution mode is not extended if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the open / close execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games. When the mode occurs three times, the opening period of the open / close execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Next, the interval period selection process executed in step S1006 of the special electric opening processing (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30 (c).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1821: NO), the first interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1822). The first interval period is 2 seconds. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1821: YES), the second interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1823). The second interval period is 6 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as described above.

As described above, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the interval period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the interval period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the interval period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The interval period of the open / close execution mode is not extended if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the open / close execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games. When the mode occurs three times, the interval period of the open / close execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is performed when the open / close execution mode ends, and does not occur in the middle of the open / close execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming long in the middle of the open / close execution mode.

Next, the ending period selection process executed in step S1010 of the special electric opening processing (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30 (d).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1831: NO), the first ending period is selected as the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S1832). The first ending period is 6 seconds. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1831: YES), the second ending period is selected as the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S1833). The second ending period is 12 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as described above.

As described above, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes the second reference value or more, the ending period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the ending period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the ending period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The ending period of the open / close execution mode is not extended if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the open / close execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games. When the mode occurs three times, the ending period of the open / close execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Next, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the open / close execution mode per unit time. The state in which the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the above occurs step by step will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 31 (a) shows the progress of the game state, FIG. 31 (b) shows how the firing cycle of the game ball changes, and FIG. 31 (c) shows how the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended. 31 (d) shows how the final stop period of the game round changes, and FIG. 31 (e) shows how the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening / closing execution mode change.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), in a normal game state in which the mode is a low probability mode, the low frequency support mode, and the open / close execution mode is not, a game round that results in a 2R high accuracy jackpot occurs at the timing of t1, and the game times of t2 At the timing, the round game in the low-frequency winning mode triggered by the 2R high-probability jackpot result ends the opening / closing execution mode twice. In this case, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is maintained at "0". Therefore, in the gaming state of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the gaming ball is as shown in FIG. 31 (b). As for the firing cycle, the first cycle, which is the shortest firing cycle, is maintained, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the situation in which the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur is maintained, and as shown in FIG. 31 (d). The final stop period of the game round is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the opening period of the open / close execution mode is a relatively short first opening period of the open / close execution mode. The interval period is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the open / close execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a game round that results in a 5R high-accuracy jackpot occurs at the timing of t3, which is a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, and the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs at the timing of t4. The open / close execution mode in which the round game in the high-frequency winning mode is performed five times is completed. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends, "5" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode ended this time is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. To. Therefore, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "5" at the timing of t4. This value is less than the first reference value of "10". Therefore, in the gaming state, which is a high-probability mode extending from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 and is a high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the gaming ball is launched as shown in FIG. 31 (b). As for the cycle, the first cycle, which is the shortest firing cycle, is maintained, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the situation where the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur is maintained, and as shown in FIG. 31 (d), the game is played. The final stop period of the times is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the opening period of the open / close execution mode is a relatively short first opening period, and the interval of the open / close execution mode. The period is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the open / close execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a game round that results in a 10R high-accuracy jackpot occurs at the timing of t5, which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs at the timing of t6. The round game in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the above is completed 10 times in the open / close execution mode. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode ended this time is set for the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Will be added. Therefore, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "15" at the timing of t6. This value is greater than or equal to the first reference value of "10" and less than or less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, in the gaming state, which is a high-probability mode extending from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 and is a high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the gaming ball is launched as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The cycle is the second cycle, which is the second shortest firing cycle, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), there is a situation in which an extension of one step (that is, one second) occurs with respect to the fluctuation duration of the game times. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), the final stop period of the game round is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively short. It is the first opening period, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode is the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode is the relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a game round that results in a 10R low-probability jackpot occurs at the timing of t7, which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and the 10R low-probability jackpot result occurs at the timing of t8. The round game in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the above is completed 10 times in the open / close execution mode. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode ended this time is set for the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Will be added. Therefore, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "25" at the timing of t8. This value is greater than or equal to the first reference value of "10" and less than or less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, in the gaming state, which is a low-probability mode extending from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9 and is a high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the gaming ball is launched as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The cycle is maintained in the second cycle, which is the second shortest firing cycle, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the situation where one step extension (that is, 1 second) occurs with respect to the fluctuation duration of the game times is maintained. As shown in FIG. 31 (d), the final stop period of the game round is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the opening period of the open / close execution mode is relatively short. It is the first opening period, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode is the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode is the relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a game round that results in a 10R high-accuracy jackpot occurs at the timing of t9, which is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs at the timing of t10. The round game in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the above is completed 10 times in the open / close execution mode. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode ended this time is set for the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Will be added. Therefore, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "35" at the timing of t10. This value is greater than or equal to the second reference value of "30" and less than or less than the third reference value of "60". Therefore, in the gaming state, which is a high-probability mode extending from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11 and is a high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the gaming ball is launched as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The cycle is the third cycle, which is the second longest firing cycle, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), there is a situation in which a two-step extension (that is, 2 seconds) occurs for the fluctuation duration of the game times. As shown in 31 (d), the final stop period of the game round is a relatively long second final stop period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a game round that results in a 10R high-accuracy jackpot occurs at the timing of t11, and a round game in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs at the timing of t12. The opening / closing execution mode ends 10 times, but in the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode is a relatively long second opening period, and the opening / closing execution mode The interval period of is a relatively long second interval period, and the ending period of the open / close execution mode is a relatively long second ending period.

As described above, in the situation where the number of times of opening / closing execution mode is regulated per unit time, the opening / closing execution mode that results in the 10R low-probability jackpot occurs and the opening / closing execution mode that is triggered by the game times ends, and then after that. It is canceled when 80 game times are executed without a jackpot result occurring in the game state which is the started low probability mode and is the high frequency support mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, when the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0", so that the firing cycle of the game ball returns to the first cycle, which is the shortest firing cycle. , Return to the situation where the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur, the final stop period of the game times returns to the first final stop period, which is relatively short, and the opening period of the open / close execution mode is the relatively short first. It returns to the opening period, the interval period of the open / close execution mode returns to the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the open / close execution mode returns to the relatively short first ending period.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Become. As the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The firing cycle of the game ball gradually increases as the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the greater the number of occurrences. The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle, if the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, in which the round game is played five times, occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from becoming excessive.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the addition is not performed to the total number of rounds counter 64c. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

Addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is performed when the open / close execution mode ends, and does not occur in the middle of the open / close execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the firing cycle of the game ball from suddenly becoming long in the middle of the open / close execution mode.

The larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, it is the high-frequency support mode. However, the fluctuation duration of the game times will be long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes gradually longer as the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the greater the number of occurrences. The fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of times the game is generated per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended only by the opening / closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the round games are played 5 times. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times a game is played per unit time.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times fluctuates according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the various period tables are used instead of changing the processing mode of the various period tables and the period acquisition process (step S614). The fluctuation continuation period of the game times acquired in the period acquisition process (step S614) is varied. This makes it possible to change the variation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while not changing the various period tables and the processing mode of the period acquisition process (step S614). Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the various period tables and the period acquisition process (step S614).

In the first extension process (step S1603) of the fluctuation continuation period executed when the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the period acquisition process (step S614) is performed. Regardless of the variable duration of the game times determined using the various period tables, the fixed first extension period is changed to the variable continuation period of the game times determined in the period acquisition process (step S614). to add. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times. This also applies to the second extension process of the fluctuation continuation period (step S1606) and the third extension process of the fluctuation continuation period (step S1609).

When the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended, the high-speed fluctuation display period in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is extended. As a result, it is possible to extend the fluctuation duration of the game times while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, the data table for the game times effect stored in advance in the sound / light side ROM 83 is modified and displayed in accordance with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. The display data table stored in advance in the side ROM 93 is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. As a result, it is not necessary to store in advance the data table for the game rotation effect and the data table for display corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the ROMs 83 and 93. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity required for the ROMs 83 and 93.

In a situation where the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game number that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs, so that the frequency is low. If the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the support mode, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result The fluctuation duration of the game times, which is one of the above, becomes extremely long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, it takes a long time until the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Even if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, even if a game round that is either a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs, the fluctuation duration of the game round is set. The longest period is not selected, but a period shorter than the longest period is selected. As a result, while delaying the occurrence of the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode and has the largest number of rounds, by prolonging the fluctuation duration of the game times, the longest period is excessively selected as the fluctuation duration of the game times. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

In the game times in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period, the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed on the symbol display device 41. When the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the remaining time for notifying the upper left corner portion of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 of the remaining time of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period. Image G3 is displayed. Since the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period ends when the fluctuation continuation period of the game times elapses, it can be said that the remaining time image G3 is notified of the remaining time of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is the longest period, the player can grasp the remaining time of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. , It is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety about the fact that the game is not completed easily.

When the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player recognize that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, is generated by starting the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period, and the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the remaining time from being lowered by the display of the remaining time image G3.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, it is the high-frequency support mode. However, the final suspension period of the game times will be longer. Then, as the final stop period of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The final stop period of the game is not extended just by the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games, and the opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games. When the mode occurs three times, the final stop period of the game times is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times a game is played per unit time.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the opening period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the opening period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the opening period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening period of the open / close execution mode is not extended if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the open / close execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games. When the mode occurs three times, the opening period of the open / close execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the interval period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the interval period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the interval period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The interval period of the open / close execution mode is not extended if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the open / close execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games. When the mode occurs three times, the interval period of the open / close execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is performed when the open / close execution mode ends, and does not occur in the middle of the open / close execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming long in the middle of the open / close execution mode.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the ending period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the ending period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the ending period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The ending period of the open / close execution mode is not extended if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the open / close execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games. When the mode occurs three times, the ending period of the open / close execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

The total number of rounds counter 64c is the variable duration period of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period, the interval period and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, which can affect the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time. Varies according to the value of. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player. In particular, since the contents of a plurality of events such as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the open / close execution mode, the interval period and the ending period are changed according to the value of the total round number counter 64c. When the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time is changed according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of change.

It should be noted that the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode ends is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, but the configuration is limited to this. However, when the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode may be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Further, instead of the configuration, when the game rounds that trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode are completed, the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is the total number of rounds counter of the main RAM 64. It may be configured to be added to 64c. As a result, it is possible to start the firing cycle of the game ball according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, and the extension of the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode at an early stage.

In addition, the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode is mainly the number of round games that occur in the middle of the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the game round is started. It may be configured to be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the side RAM 64. As a result, the firing cycle of the game ball according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode can be started at an early stage. It will be possible.

Further, when the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. It may be configured. As a result, the firing cycle of the game ball according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are extended. Can be started early.

In addition, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1 each time one round game is started or the execution of one round game is completed in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. It may be configured. As a result, when the round game is executed or when the round game is executed, it can be immediately reflected in the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c.

Further, the round games to be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c are not limited to the round games in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode, and the opening / closing execution mode by the low frequency winning mode and the opening / closing by the high frequency winning mode. Any round game executed in any of the execution modes may be configured to be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c.

Further, all of the round games in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode are not limited to the configuration to be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c, and the high frequency winning mode is the open / close execution mode by the maximum number of rounds. The round game of No. 1 may be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c, while the other round games may not be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c. In addition, the round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is subject to addition to the total round number counter 64c, while the other round games are not subject to addition to the total round number counter 64c. May be good.

Further, as the open continuation period of the round game, not only the long-term mode and the short-term mode but also the medium-term mode which is a period between these may exist. In this case, of the short-term mode round game, the medium-term mode round game, and the long-term mode round game, only the number of long-term round games is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c. The number of round games in the long-term mode and the number of round games in the medium-term mode may be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c. The round game as an aspect and the round game as a short-term aspect may be configured to be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the parameters for generating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of a game ball flowing down the game area PA. In this embodiment, the following detection sensors 142a to 149a are provided instead of the various prize detection sensors 66a to 66e in the first embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the game area PA is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and an out port 24a. The game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and supplied to the game area PA is any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the crab, it will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 142 to 148 are formed corresponding to each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. .. The game ball that has flowed into the discharge passages 142 to 148 is guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed discharge passages 142 to 148, and becomes a discharge ball recovery part (not shown). Will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 142a to 148a for detecting a game ball are provided in each discharge passage portion 142 to 148. The discharge passage portions 142 to 148 and the detection sensors 142a to 148a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided, discharge passage portions 142 to 144 exist corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 31. In this case, one detection sensor 142a, one for each of the first discharge passage portion 142 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 143 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the right side thereof. 143a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 142a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 142, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 143. A second winning opening detection sensor 143a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 142a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 142, and the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31 to the right of the first winning opening detection sensor 142a. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 143a on the way through the second discharge passage portion 143. Further, a third discharge passage portion 144 formed so as to join the two general winning openings 31 on the right side at an intermediate position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 144 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one outlet side region when the inlet side regions merge in the middle. are doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 144a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the outlet side region in the third discharge passage portion 144. The game ball that has entered one of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 144a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 144.

The fourth discharge passage portion 145 exists in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32. The special electric detection sensor 145a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 145, and the game ball that has entered the special electric winning device 32 is on the way through the fourth discharge passage portion 145. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a. A fifth discharge passage portion 146 is present corresponding to the first actuating port 33. The first actuating port detection sensor 146a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 146, and the game ball that has entered the first actuating port 33 uses the fifth discharge passage portion 146. It is detected by the first actuating port detection sensor 146a on the way through. A sixth discharge passage portion 147 exists corresponding to the second actuating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 147a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharging passage portion 147, and the game ball that has entered the second operating port 34 uses the sixth discharging passage portion 147. It is detected by the second actuating port detection sensor 147a on the way through. The seventh discharge passage portion 148 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out port detection sensor 148a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 148, and the game ball that has entered the out port 24a is on the way through the seventh discharge passage portion 148. It is detected by the out port detection sensor 148a.

The game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 142a to 148a is not the detection target of the other detection sensors 142a to 148a. Further, the gate detection sensor 149a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 149a.

As the various detection sensors 142a to 149a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be individually detected. Further, the various detection sensors 142a to 149a are electrically connected to the main MPU 62, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 142a to 149a are output to the main MPU 62. Specifically, the various detection sensors 142a to 149a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the main RAM 64 used for managing the ball ejection rate. In this embodiment, the main RAM 64 is not provided with the total number of rounds counter 64c.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main RAM 64 is provided with a ball entry number area 150. The ball entry number area 150 is provided with a general winning counter 151, a special electric winning counter 152, a first operation counter 153, a second operation counter 154, and an out counter 155. The various counters 151 to 155 in the number of balls entered area 150 measure the number of balls entered in all the gaming states without distinguishing the gaming states. Specifically, the all-game state is a game state that is neither an open / close execution mode nor a high-frequency support mode, a game state that is an open / close execution mode, and a game state that is a high-frequency support mode.

The general winning counter 151 is a counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The special electric winning counter 152 is a counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The first operation counter 153 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counter 154 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counter 155 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

The various counters 151 to 155 in the ball entry number area 150 are used to measure the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It will be used. Specifically, one game ball in the general winning opening 31 based on the detection results of the first winning opening detection sensor 142a, the second winning opening detection sensor 143a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 144a in all the game states described above. When it is specified that the ball has entered, the value of the general winning counter 151 is added by 1, and it is specified that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 based on the detection result of the special electric detecting sensor 145a. In that case, the value of the special electric winning counter 152 is added by 1, and when it is specified that one game ball has entered the first operating port 33 based on the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 146a. When the value of the first operation counter 153 is added by 1 and it is specified that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34 based on the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 147a, the second operation is performed. The value of the counter 154 is added by 1, and when it is specified that one game ball has entered the out port 24a based on the detection result of the out port detection sensor 148a, the value of the out counter 155 is added by 1. ..

The main RAM 64 is provided with a management area 160, a calculation area 171 and a write pointer 172 in addition to the ball entry number area 150. Using the management area 160, the calculation area 171 and the write pointer 172, the payout rate for a predetermined period is calculated. The payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in all game states. When the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the ball entry number area 150 are set to K1 to K5, the ball ejection rate is as follows.

Total number of game balls to be paid out (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "prize for winning the first operating port 33" The ratio of "number of balls" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).

The management area 160 is provided with 60 storage areas 161 to 166 for storing information on the unit payout rate when 100 game balls, which are a predetermined number of units, are ejected from the game area PA. .. That is, the management area 160 is provided with the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166. The first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 all have the same storage capacity, and each has a storage capacity capable of storing information on the unit payout rate.

The calculation area 171 calculates information on the unit payout rate when 100 game balls, which are a predetermined number of units, are discharged from the game area PA, using the values of various counters 151 to 155 of the number of incoming balls area 150. Used in cases. The write pointer 172 is a counter for allowing the main MPU 62 to grasp the storage areas 161 to 166 to which the unit payout rate is written among the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160. be. When a new unit payout rate is calculated by ejecting 100 game balls, which is a predetermined number of units, from the game area PA, the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160 Of these, the new unit payout rate information is overwritten on the storage areas 161 to 166 corresponding to the value of the write pointer 172, and then the value of the write pointer 172 is added by 1. In this case, the value of the write pointer 172 takes a value of "0" to "59", and when the value of the write pointer 172 is "n", a new unit is ejected to the n + 1 storage area in the management area 160. The rate information is overwritten. Further, as a result of adding 1 to the value of the write pointer 172, when the maximum value of the write pointer 172 is exceeded, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

As described above, the management area 160 is provided with 60 storage areas 161 to 166 that can store information on the unit payout rate when 100 game balls, which are a predetermined number of units, are ejected from the game area PA. There is. Therefore, when the information on the unit payout rate is stored in all of the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160, 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are stored from the game area PA. The information that enables the calculation of the information on the target payout rate in the case of being discharged is stored in the management area 160. Each time 100 game balls, which is a predetermined number of units, are ejected from the game area PA, the main MPU 62 calculates the unit payout rate corresponding to the ejection of the 100 game balls, and calculates the unit ball ejection rate of the management area 160. Of the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166, the storage areas 161 to 166 indicated by the write pointer 172 are not only overwritten with the unit payout rate information, but also the 1st to 60th storage areas immediately after the overwriting is performed. By adding the information of all the unit payout rates stored in 161 to 166 and dividing the addition result by "60" which is the number of the storage areas 161 to 166, the calculation reference number of game balls is discharged. Calculate the target payout rate. Then, the calculated target ball ejection rate information is overwritten in the target ball ejection rate area 173 provided in the main RAM 64. In the present embodiment, the information on the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 serves as a parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a ball ejection rate monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62. The payout rate monitoring process is executed by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

When the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step S1901: NO), the ball entry management process is executed (step S1902). FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the ball entry management process.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 142a (step S2001: YES), that is, the signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 142a is cut from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the change has been made, when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 143a (step S2003: YES), that is, the signal received from the second winning opening detection sensor 143a. When it is confirmed that the LOW level has been switched to the HI level, or when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 144a (step S2005: YES), that is, the third winning opening. When it is confirmed that the signal received from the detection sensor 144a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the value of the general winning counter 151 is added by 1 (step S2002, step S2004, step S2006). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10), the detection results of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 142a to 144a are also monitored, and the first to third winning opening detection sensors 142a to 144a are monitored. When it is determined that one game ball is detected in any of the above, a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the general winning opening 31 is executed.

When it was determined that one game ball was detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a (step S2007: YES), that is, it was confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 145a was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the value of the special electric winning counter 152 is added by 1 (step S2008). When the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 145a is also monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10) and it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric power detection sensor 145a. A process for ensuring that the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric winning device 32 is paid out is executed, and a process for specifying the end trigger of the round game is executed.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 146a (step S2009: YES), that is, the signal received from the first operating port detection sensor 146a is cut from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the first operation counter 153 is added by 1 (step S2010). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 146a is also monitored, and one game ball is detected by the first actuating port detection sensor 146a. If it is determined that the number of game balls corresponding to the first operating port 33 is paid out, a process is executed and a process for specifying an opportunity to acquire the reserved information on the first special figure side is executed. do.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 147a (step S2011: YES), that is, the signal received from the second operating port detection sensor 147a is cut from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the second operation counter 154 is added by 1 (step S2012). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 147a is also monitored, and one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 147a. If it is determined that the number of game balls corresponding to the second operating port 34 is paid out, a process is executed and a process for specifying an opportunity to acquire the reserved information on the second special drawing side is executed. do.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the out-port detection sensor 148a (step S2013: YES), that is, the signal received from the out-port detection sensor 148a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If confirmed, the value of the out counter 155 is added by 1 (step S2014). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection result of the out port detection sensor 148a is not monitored.

By executing the ball entry management process as described above, the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counter 151, and the game balls enter the special electric winning device 32. The number is measured using the special electric winning counter 152, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the first operating counter 153, and the number of gaming balls entering the second operating port 34 is measured. The number of balls is measured using the second operation counter 154, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured using the out counter 155. This makes it possible for the main MPU 62 to grasp the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34.

Returning to the description of the payout rate monitoring process (FIG. 34), when an affirmative determination is made in step S1901 or when the process of step S1902 is executed, the calculation process of the total number of ejected pieces is executed (step S1903). In the calculation process of the total number of ejected balls, the value of the general winning counter 151, the value of the special electric winning counter 152, the value of the first operation counter 153, the value of the second operation counter 154, and the value of the out counter 155 in the entry number area 150 Calculate the sum of the values. The result of the calculation is the current total number of emissions. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated current total emission number is "100" or more, which is a predetermined unit number (step S1904). When the current total number of discharged balls is less than the predetermined number of units (step S1904: NO), the main ball ejection rate monitoring process is terminated as it is.

When the current total number of discharged units is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of units (step S1904: YES), the calculation process of the unit payout rate is executed (step S1905). Specifically, when the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the ball entry area 150 are set to K1 to K5,
Total number of game balls to be paid out (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "prize for winning the first operating port 33" The ratio of "number of balls" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) is calculated. In this calculation, the calculation area 171 is used.

The calculated unit payout rate information is overwritten in the storage areas 161 to 166 indicated by the value of the write pointer 172 among the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160 (step S1906). After that, the update process of the write pointer 172 is executed (step S1907). In the update process, the value of the write pointer 172 is added by 1, and when the value after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 172, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

After that, the information of all the unit payout rates stored in the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 in the management area 160 is added (step S1908), and the total value after the addition is added to the management area 160. Divide by "60", which is the number of storage areas 161 to 166 (step S1909). Then, the information of the numerical value obtained by multiplying the division result by 100 is overwritten in the target payout rate area 173 as the target payout rate information (step S1910). The information on the target payout rate is binary information, but is represented as numerical information in the range of "0%" to "999%" in decimal display. In this case, when the target payout rate is "100%", the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA and the game when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA. It means that the total number of balls paid out is the same. When the target payout rate is less than "100%", the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA when the calculation reference number of 6000 game balls is discharged from the game area PA is the game ball. It means that it is more than the total number of payouts. When the target payout rate exceeds "100%", the total number of game balls to be paid out when the calculation standard number of 6000 game balls is discharged from the game area PA is the game discharged from the game area PA. It means that it is more than the total number of spheres. After that, each of the general winning counter 151, the special electric winning counter 152, the first operation counter 153, the second operation counter 154, and the out counter 155 in the ball entry number area 150 is cleared to "0" (step S1911).

By executing the ball ejection rate monitoring process (FIG. 34) as described above, every time 100 game balls, which is a predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the calculation reference number is 6000. The target payout rate for the fact that each game ball is discharged from the game area PA is calculated. This makes it possible to calculate the target payout rate each time a predetermined number of game balls are ejected from the game area PA.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a cycle setting process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is less than the first reference value (step S2101). The first reference value is set to "134%". When the value of the target payout rate is less than the first reference value (step S2101: YES). Information corresponding to the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2102). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (. Step S2103). The second reference value is set to "200%". When the value of the target payout rate is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2103: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2104). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the value of the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (. Step S2105). The third reference value is set to "300%". When the value of the target payout rate is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2105: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables firing of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2106). The third cycle is 0.75 seconds, which is the second longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the third cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

When the value of the target payout rate is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2105: NO). Information corresponding to the fourth cycle, which enables firing of 70 game balls per minute, is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2107). The fourth cycle is about 0.86 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the 4th cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the 4th cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth cycle elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the target ball ejection rate, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Become. As the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The firing cycle of the game ball gradually increases as the value of the target ball ejection rate increases. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the greater the number of occurrences. The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 100 game balls, which is a predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the target ball ejection rate when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number up to that point, is discharged from the game area PA, is calculated. Will be done. Then, the firing cycle of the game ball is changed according to the calculated value of the target ball ejection rate. As a result, it is possible to appropriately change the firing cycle of the game ball according to the change in the value of the target ball ejection rate even during the opening / closing execution mode or the game round.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the hit / fail judgment result this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S2201: YES), the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result this time serve as an opportunity to execute the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode. It is determined whether or not the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result (step S2202). .. The third reference value is the reference value of the largest number among the reference values set in a plurality of types, and is "300%" as already explained.

If this time is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result and the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2202: YES), the present The longest period among the fluctuation continuation periods of the plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times (step S2204). The longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the first per hour period table as in the first embodiment. That is, the longest period acquired in step S2204 is longer than any of the variable durations of the game times selected in other situations. Therefore, in either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, the period during which the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest when the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value. It becomes. When the longest period is selected, the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times does not occur, and when the longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times, it is dedicated to the longest period including various images G1 to G3. The point that the movie image is displayed is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the situation where the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value as described above, when a game round that is either a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs. By selecting the longest period, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode. The fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, becomes extremely long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, it takes a long time until the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

When the process of step S2204 is executed, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the longest period and the type command including the current pass / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S2215). ), The period adjustment process is executed (step S2216). However, in the period adjustment process after executing the process of step S2204, the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times does not occur.

Even if this time is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, if the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is less than the third reference value, and the target ball ejection rate area Even if the target ball output rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, if this time is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small hit result, step S2203 is performed. Read the hit time period table from the main ROM 63. The contents of the hit-time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The processing contents of steps S2205 to S2213 are the same as those of steps S605 to S613 in the acquisition processing of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. Further, the contents of the reach time period table, the normal use period table, and the shortening period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the hit time period table is read in step S2203, when the reach time period table is read in step S2206, when the normal time period table is read in step S2209, the shortening period table is read in step S2210. When it is read, when the normal period table is read in step S2212, or when the shortened period table is read in step S2213, the period acquisition process is executed (step S2214). In the period acquisition process, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out as described above, the variation continuation period of the current game times is acquired.

When the process of step S2204 is executed, or when the process of step S2214 is executed, the change command including the information of the change continuation period of the game times acquired this time, and the type including the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result of this time. The command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S2215). The data structure of these variable commands and type commands is the same as that of the first embodiment. After that, the period adjustment process is executed (step S2216).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in the present embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable continuation period of the game times this time (step S2301: YES), the process for extending the variable continuation period of the game times shown in steps S2302 and subsequent steps is not executed. In step S2204 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration (FIG. 37), when a game number that results in a big hit occurs in a situation where the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value. Therefore, the longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of this game. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, the process for extending the variable duration of the game times shown in step S2302 and subsequent steps is not executed, so that the long period of the variable duration of the game times is long. It is possible to prevent the conversion from being executed cumulatively for the fluctuation duration of one game.

In a situation where the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2301: NO), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. (Step S2302: YES), the first extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed (step S2303). In the first extension processing, similarly to step S1603 of the period adjustment processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S2214 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 37) is Add 1 second as the first extension period. Further, a first extension command indicating that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2304). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment. The first reference value is "134%" as already explained, and the second reference value is "200%" as already explained.

In a situation where the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2301: NO), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value and less than the third reference value. (Step S2305: YES), the second extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S2306). In the second extension process, similarly to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variation continuation period acquired in step S2214 in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 37). Add 2 seconds as the second extension period. Further, a second extension command indicating that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2307). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment. The third reference value is "300%" as already explained.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2301: NO) and the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2308: YES). ), The third extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed (step S2309). In the third extension process, similarly to step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variation continuation period acquired in step S2214 in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 37). Add 3 seconds as the third extension period. Further, a third extension command indicating that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2310). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

As described above, the larger the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, it is the high-frequency support mode. However, the fluctuation duration of the game times will be long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes gradually longer as the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 increases. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the greater the number of occurrences. The fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of times the game is generated per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 100 game balls, which is a predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the target ball ejection rate when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number up to that point, is discharged from the game area PA, is calculated. Will be done. Then, the extension mode of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is changed according to the calculated value of the target payout rate. As a result, the game times are repeatedly executed in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the game times are repeatedly executed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In a normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, it is possible to appropriately change the extension mode of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the change in the value of the target payout rate. In this case, the extension mode of the variation continuation period of the game times can be changed without triggering the start or end of the open / close execution mode.

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are appropriately changed. Specifically, as the final stop period of the game round, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected if the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is less than the second reference value. If the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected. Further, as for the opening period of the open / close execution mode, if the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected and the target ball ejection rate area. If the target payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected. Further, as the interval period of the open / close execution mode, if the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected and the target ball ejection rate area. If the target payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected. As for the ending period of the open / close execution mode, if the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected, and the target payout rate area If the target payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected.

As described above, when the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening / closing are performed. The ending period of the execution mode becomes longer. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the open / close execution is executed per unit time. The number of times the mode occurs is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which various periods are changed according to the target payout rate, and the configuration in which various periods are changed according to any one of the following 1st to 7th parameters. good. Specifically, when the values of the various counters 151 to 155 of the ball entry number area 150 are set to K1 to K5, the first to seventh parameters are as follows.
1st parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K1 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
Second parameter: Ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 K2 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
Third parameter: Ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 K3 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
Fourth parameter: Ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K4 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
Fifth parameter: (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA Ratio of (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
6th parameter: (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K4 x "Second operating port 34" The ratio of "the number of prize balls to the prize").
7th parameter: K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "special electric winning device 32" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the first operating port 33" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34").

Further, the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 may be notified. Specifically, a plurality of 7-segment displays may be mounted on the main control board 61, and the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 may be displayed on the plurality of 7-segment displays. good. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the target payout rate. In the configuration in which any of the above 1st to 7th parameters is used instead of the target payout rate, the configuration in which the parameter to be used is notified may be used.

Further, the predetermined number of units is not limited to "100", and may be a number larger than "100" or less than "100". For example, the predetermined number of units may be "1000". In this case, information on the unit payout rate when 1000 game balls are ejected from the game area PA is stored in each of the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160. ..

Further, the timing at which various periods are changed according to the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is not limited to an arbitrary timing, and may be a predetermined timing. good. For example, various periods may be changed according to the target payout rate when the open / close execution mode is newly started, and the subsequent payout rate may be changed according to the target payout rate when the open / close execution mode ends. The configuration may be such that various periods are changed, or the subsequent various periods may be changed according to the target payout rate when the game round is started, and the target payout when the game round is completed. The configuration may be such that various subsequent periods are changed according to the rate.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the parameters for generating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 (a) is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S2401). If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the processing during determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S2401: YES), the condition that the hit / fail determination result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S2402: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the opening period selection process is executed (step S2403). As the period to be the target of the opening period, two types of 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period) are set as in the first embodiment, and these are set in the opening period selection process. Of the two types of periods, select the side that will be the opening period of this open / close execution mode.

After that, the information of the opening period selected in step S2403 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S2404). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, an opening command including the information of the opening period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2405). By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of the current light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination result that triggered the game round is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S2406). That is, it is determined whether or not the game is a game that triggers the occurrence of the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 provided in the main RAM 64 is set to 1 as shown in the explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 64 in FIG. 39 (b). Add (step S2407). That is, in the present embodiment, the main RAM 64 is not provided with the total number of rounds counter 64c, and instead, the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode executed without the game times in the low frequency support mode. A consecutive villa counter 181 for measuring the number of times is provided.

When a negative determination is made in step S2406 or the process of step S2407 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S2408). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special electric start process.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S2402: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is provided. By determining whether or not the flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the fact that the game times ended this time have a 10R low-probability jackpot result, and the frequency is high. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the support mode (step S2409).

In the case of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S2409: YES), the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S2410). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S2411). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S2411: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2412). This results in a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

After that, the consecutive villa counter 181 of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2413). That is, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is not cleared to "0" even when the high-probability mode is changed to the low-probability mode, but is cleared to "0" when the high-frequency support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S2409, a negative determination is made in step S2411, or the process of step S2413 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2414). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

The addition process to the consecutive villa counter 181 (step S2407) is executed only when either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs as described above. The support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode in which either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs is the high-frequency support mode. Further, as described above, when the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in step S2412 of the special drawing finalizing process (FIG. 39), the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is cleared to "0". The transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in a situation other than the open / close execution mode is executed only in step S2412 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 39). Therefore, the consecutive villa counter 181 is incremented by 1 when the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode that triggers the transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode occurs, and is subsequently in the low-probability mode. 1 is added when the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode occurs before the game round in the low frequency support mode is started. That is, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode executed without interposing the game times in the low-frequency support mode is measured by the consecutive villa counter 181.

Here, even if the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained in the high-frequency support mode and the open / close execution mode by the low-frequency winning mode based on the result is executed, the addition of the consecutive villa counter 181 does not occur. Further, even if a small hit result is obtained in the high frequency support mode and the opening / closing execution mode similar to the low frequency winning mode based on the result is executed, the addition of the consecutive villa counter 181 does not occur. As a result, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode in which the payout of the game ball is substantially executed, in other words, the opening / closing execution mode in which the player is substantially benefited, is measured by the consecutive villa counter 181.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a cycle setting process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S2501). The first reference value is set to "2". That is, even if the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs in the low-frequency support mode with either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 remains. The first reference value is not reached, and in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is triggered by either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. Reoccurs, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 reaches the first reference value.

When the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the first reference value (step S2501: YES), it corresponds to the first cycle in which 100 game balls can be fired in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 per minute. Information to be set is set (step S2502). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503). The second reference value is set to "4". That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs triggered by either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, and then in the high-frequency support mode thereafter. With either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs three times, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 becomes the second reference value. To reach.

When the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2504). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505). The third reference value is set to "6". That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs triggered by either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, and then in the high-frequency support mode thereafter. With either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs five times, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 becomes the third reference value. To reach.

When the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables firing of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2506). The third cycle is 0.75 seconds, which is the second longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the third cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

When the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2505: NO). Information corresponding to the fourth cycle, which enables firing of 70 game balls per minute, is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2507). The fourth cycle is about 0.86 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the 4th cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the 4th cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth cycle elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball is. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Become. As the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls in the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The firing cycle of the game ball gradually increases as the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 increases. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the greater the number of occurrences. The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle, if the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from becoming excessive.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the addition to the consecutive villa counter 181 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from being imposed even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

The addition to the consecutive villa counter 181 is performed before the opening / closing execution mode is started, and does not occur in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the firing cycle of the game ball from being suddenly delayed in the middle of the open / close execution mode. Further, since the addition to the consecutive villa counter 181 is performed before the start of the open / close execution mode, the firing cycle of the game ball corresponding to the reference value is set from the start of the open / close execution mode that triggers the arrival of each reference value. Be changed. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from the start of the open / close execution mode that triggers the arrival of each reference value.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the hit / fail judgment result this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S2601: YES), the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result this time serve as an opportunity to execute the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode. It is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result (step S2602). The third reference value is the reference value of the largest number among the reference values set in a plurality of types, and is "6" as already explained.

If this time is either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2602: YES), the pachinko machine 10 is set. The longest period among the variable continuation periods of the plurality of types of game times is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game times (step S2604). The longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the first per hour period table as in the first embodiment. That is, the longest period acquired in step S2604 is longer than any of the variable durations of the game times selected in other situations. Therefore, in either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period when the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value. When the longest period is selected, the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times does not occur, and when the longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times, it is dedicated to the longest period including various images G1 to G3. The point that the movie image is displayed is the same as that of the first embodiment.

As described above, in the situation where the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game number that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs. If the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the 10R low probability jackpot result and the 10R high The fluctuation duration of the game times, which is one of the probable jackpot results, becomes extremely long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, it takes a long time until the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

When the process of step S2604 is executed, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the longest period and the type command including the current pass / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result to the sound / light side MPU82 (step S2615). ), The period adjustment process is executed (step S2616). However, in the period adjustment process after executing the process of step S2604, the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times does not occur.

Even if this time is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the third reference value, or if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is greater than or equal to the third reference value. Even if there is, if this time is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small-hit result, the hit-time period table is read from the main ROM 63 in step S2603. The contents of the hit-time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The processing contents of steps S2605 to S2613 are the same as those of steps S605 to S613 in the acquisition processing of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. Further, the contents of the reach time period table, the normal use period table, and the shortening period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the hit time period table is read in step S2603, when the reach time period table is read in step S2606, when the normal time period table is read in step S2609, the shortening period table is read in step S2610. When it is read, when the normal period table is read in step S2612, or when the shortened period table is read in step S2613, the period acquisition process is executed (step S2614). In the period acquisition process, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out as described above, the variation continuation period of the current game times is acquired.

When the process of step S2604 is executed, or when the process of step S2614 is executed, the change command including the information of the change continuation period of the game times acquired this time, and the type including the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result of this time. The command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S2615). The data structure of these variable commands and type commands is the same as that of the first embodiment. After that, the period adjustment process is executed (step S2616).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in the present embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable continuation period of the game times this time (step S2701: YES), the process for extending the variable continuation period of the game times shown in steps S2702 and subsequent steps is not executed. As described above, when a game number that results in a big hit occurs in a situation where the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the game this time is performed in step S2604 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 41). The longest period is selected as the duration of the change. In this case, when the longest period is selected, the process for extending the fluctuation continuation period of the game times shown in step S2702 and subsequent steps is not executed, so that the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended. Can be prevented from being executed cumulatively for the fluctuation duration of one game.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2701: NO), and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2702: YES). ), The first extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed (step S2703). In the first extension process, similarly to step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variable continuation period acquired in step S2614 in the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 41). Add 1 second as the first extension period. Further, a first extension command indicating that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2704). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment. The first reference value is "2" as described above, and the second reference value is "4" as described above.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2701: NO), and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2705: YES). ), The second extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed (step S2706). In the second extension process, similarly to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variable continuation period acquired in step S2614 in the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 41). Add 2 seconds as the second extension period. Further, a second extension command indicating that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2707). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment. The third reference value is "6" as described above.

When the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is not the longest period (step S2701: NO) and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2708: YES), the third fluctuation continuation period The extension process is executed (step S2709). In the second extension process, similarly to step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variable continuation period acquired in step S2614 in the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 41). Add 3 seconds as the third extension period. Further, a third extension command indicating that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2710). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, it is the high-frequency support mode. However, the fluctuation duration of the game times will be long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times increases stepwise as the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 increases. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the greater the number of occurrences. The fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of times the game is generated per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended even if the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times a game is played per unit time.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the addition to the consecutive villa counter 181 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from being imposed even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are appropriately changed. Specifically, for the final stop period of the game round, if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is set. If it is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected. Further, as for the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the second reference value. If so, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected. Further, as the interval period of the open / close execution mode, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the second reference value. If so, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected. Further, as for the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the second reference value. If so, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected.

As described above, when the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode become longer. .. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the open / close execution is executed per unit time. The number of times the mode occurs is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

It should be noted that the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 of the main RAM 64 is added when the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is started, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the opening / closing by the high-frequency winning mode is used. The value of the consecutive villa counter 181 may be added when the game round that triggers the transition to the execution mode ends.

Further, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 may be added in the middle of the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the game round is started. .. As a result, it is possible to start the firing cycle of the game ball according to the value of the consecutive villa counter 181, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode at an early stage. Will be.

Further, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 may be added when the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode is started. As a result, the firing cycle of the game ball according to the value of the consecutive villa counter 181, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode can be extended. It will be possible to start early.

Further, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 may be added in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode after the opening period is started or when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

Further, the opening / closing execution mode to be added to the consecutive villa counter 181 is not limited to the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode, and the opening / closing execution mode by either the low frequency winning mode or the high frequency winning mode is continuous. It may be configured to be added to the villa counter 181.

Further, all of the opening / closing execution modes by the high frequency winning mode are not limited to the configuration to be added to the consecutive villa counter 181. In the high frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode by the maximum number of rounds is the consecutive villa counter. While it is subject to addition to 181, other open / close execution modes may be configured not to be subject to addition to the consecutive villa counter 181. Further, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result may be added to the consecutive villa counter 181, while the other opening / closing execution modes may not be added to the consecutive villa counter 181.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for lengthening the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base sequence table 182.

The base arrangement table 182 is stored in advance in the main ROM 63. In the base array table 182, index information is set from the minimum value "0" to a serial number and the maximum value is "n", and the fluctuation duration of the game times is set corresponding to each index information. .. In the base sequence table 182, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be acquired in the situation where the period adjustment process (step S616) is not executed in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) are set, and the index information of a large value is set. The fluctuation duration of the game times for a long period is associated with it. In FIG. 43 (a), the index information of "0" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 2 seconds, and the index information of "1" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 3 seconds. The index information of "k" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 15 seconds, and the index information of "n-1" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 9 minutes. The index information of "" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 10 minutes.

When the longest period is selected as the variation duration of the game times in step S604 in the acquisition process of the variation duration (FIG. 14), the index information of "n" in the base sequence table 182 is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. To. Further, when the period acquisition process is executed in step S614 in the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14), the index information corresponding to the various read period tables and the acquired change type counter CS is mainly used. It is stored in the register of the side MPU 62. The main MPU 62 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times by collating the index information stored in the register with the base sequence table 182. Further, this stored index information is set as data corresponding to the fluctuation duration in the fluctuation command. The same table as the base arrangement table 182 stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 83, and the sound light side MPU 82 is set as a variable command by referring to the table. Grasp the fluctuation duration of the game times corresponding to the index information.

FIG. 43B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the additional sequence table 183.

The additional sequence table 183 is stored in advance in the main ROM 63. The additional array table 183 is sequentially numbered from the minimum value "0", and index information having the maximum value "n" is set. The number of index information and the numerical values that can be taken as index information are the same as those of the base sequence table 182.

In the additional sequence table 183, an additional period for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times is set corresponding to each index information. When the variation continuation period of the game is extended in the period adjustment process (step S616) in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14), it is in the stage before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed. The additional period set in the additional sequence table 183 corresponding to the index information corresponding to the variable continuation period of the game times is added to the acquired fluctuation continuation period of the game times.

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the additional period set in the additional sequence table 183 is not constant and differs depending on the index information. Specifically, a longer additional period is set for the index information contained in a predetermined numerical range that is larger than the index information contained in the small numerical range that continues from the minimum value. .. That is, the variable duration of the game times included in the predetermined period range that is longer than the short period range is longer than the variable duration of the game times included in the short period range that continues from the shortest period. Will be set. However, 0 seconds is set as the additional period for the index information having a predetermined value or more, and the additional period is not substantially set. As a result, the extension of the period does not occur for the fluctuation continuation period of the long game times that is longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, regarding the additional period set in the additional array table 183, the additional period of 1 second is associated with the index information of "0" and the index information of "1", and the index of "k". An additional period of 4 seconds is associated with the information, and an additional period of 0 seconds is associated with the index information of "n-1" and the index information of "n".

When the condition for extending the variation continuation period of the game times is satisfied in the period adjustment process (step S616) of the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14), the game acquired before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed. By collating the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the times against the additional sequence table 183, the additional period corresponding to the index information is grasped. Then, the grasped additional period is added to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times in a manner corresponding to the extension condition, so that the fluctuation continuation period of the game times this time is grasped by the main MPU 62. Further, when the additional period is acquired by the main MPU 62, an extension command in which the additional period is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped based on the fluctuation command, so that the actual fluctuation continuation period of the game times this time To grasp. Further, when the additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the content of the extension command, the content of the data table for the game time effect is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game time. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. The period adjustment process is executed in step S616 in the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2801: YES), the additional sequence table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2802). After that, the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game times stored in the register of the main MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) is collated with the additional sequence table 183 to be added this time. The period is grasped (step S2803). Then, the fluctuation duration of the game times corresponding to the index information is read out based on the base arrangement table 182 of the main ROM 63, and the additional period grasped in step S2803 is added to the read fluctuation duration of the game times. By doing so, the fluctuation duration of the current game times is grasped (step S2804). In this case, if the additional period is longer than 0 seconds, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended, and if the additional period is 0 seconds, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is not extended.

After that, the extension command for which the additional period grasped in step S2803 is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2805). The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped based on the change command, so that the actual fluctuation continuation of the game times this time is continued. Understand the period. Further, when the additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the content of the extension command, the content of the data table for the game time effect is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game time. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2806: YES), the additional sequence table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2807). After that, the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game times stored in the register of the main MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) is collated with the additional sequence table 183 to perform the current additional period. (Step S2808), and further double the grasped additional period (step S2809). Then, the fluctuation duration of the game times corresponding to the index information is read out based on the base arrangement table 182 of the main ROM 63, and the additional period of the result calculated in step S2809 with respect to the read fluctuation duration of the game times. By adding, the fluctuation duration of the current game times is grasped (step S2810). In this case, if the additional period grasped in step S2808 is a period larger than 0 seconds, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended by twice the additional period, and the additional period is 0 seconds. The change duration of the game times is not extended.

After that, the extension command for which the additional period calculated in step S2809 is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2811). The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped based on the change command, so that the actual fluctuation continuation of the game times this time is continued. Understand the period. Further, when the additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the content of the extension command, the content of the data table for the game time effect is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game time. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2812: YES), the additional sequence table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2813). After that, the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game times stored in the register of the main MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) is collated with the additional sequence table 183 to perform the current additional period. (Step S2814), and further triple the grasped additional period (step S2815). Then, the fluctuation duration of the game times corresponding to the index information is read out based on the base arrangement table 182 of the main ROM 63, and the additional period of the result calculated in step S2815 with respect to the read fluctuation duration of the game times. By adding, the fluctuation duration of the current game times is grasped (step S2816). In this case, if the additional period grasped in step S2814 is a period larger than 0 seconds, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended by three times the additional period, and the additional period is 0 seconds. The change duration of the game times is not extended.

After that, the extension command for which the additional period calculated in step S2815 is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2817). The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped based on the change command, so that the actual fluctuation continuation of the game times this time is continued. Understand the period. Further, when the additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the content of the extension command, the content of the data table for the game time effect is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game time. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, if the condition for extending the duration of the fluctuation of the game times is satisfied based on the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the fluctuation of the game times acquired before the execution of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44). An additional period corresponding to the continuation period is acquired, and the acquired additional period is added to the variable continuation period of the game times acquired before the execution of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44). The duration of fluctuations is grasped. As a result, it is possible to extend the period for the length according to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times to be extended, and it is possible to appropriately extend the fluctuation continuation period of the game times.

When increasing the degree of extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode in response to the increase in the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, it was obtained from one additional sequence table 183. By multiplying the additional period by a multiplier of 2 or more according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the additional period is multiplied by a plurality of times, and the additional period obtained by multiplying the multiple times is before the execution of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44). It is configured to be added to the fluctuation duration of the acquired game times. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the variation duration of the game times by using one additional sequence table 183.

It should be noted that the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time as in the second embodiment of the above-mentioned second embodiment is a parameter for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times as in the present embodiment. The number of times the open / close execution mode is executed by the high-frequency winning mode is the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time as in the configuration which is the target payout rate or the third embodiment above. It may be applied to the configuration which is.

When applied to the second embodiment, in step S2801 in the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the first reference value (“134%”). It is determined whether or not the above is less than the second reference value (“200%”), and in step S2806, the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the second reference value (“200%”). % ”) or more and less than the third reference value (“300% ”) is determined, and in step S2812, the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the third reference value. It is determined whether or not it is (“300%”) or more.

When applied to the third embodiment, in step S2801 in the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the first reference value (“2”) and the second reference value (““ 2 ”). 4 ”) is determined, and in step S2806, whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (“4”) and less than the third reference value (“6”). In step S2812, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (“6”).

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for lengthening the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

45 (a) to 45 (d) are explanatory views for explaining the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188.

The first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188 are all stored in advance in the main ROM 63. In each of the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188, index information is set in which the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "n", and the game is associated with each index information. The fluctuation duration of the times is set.

The first base arrangement table 185 shown in FIG. 45A is referred to when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value. In the first base array table 185, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value are set, and the index information of a large value is set. The fluctuation duration of the game times for a long period is associated with it. In the acquisition process of the variation continuation period in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU62. It is stored in the register of. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the first reference value, the main MPU 62 collates the index information stored in the register with the first base sequence table 185 to check the variation duration of the game times. To grasp. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The second base arrangement table 186 shown in FIG. 45B is referred to when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. In the second base arrangement table 186, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value are set. The larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated with it. In the acquisition process of the variation continuation period in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU62. It is stored in the register of. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the main MPU 62 collates the index information stored in the register with respect to the second base sequence table 186. By doing so, you can grasp the fluctuation duration of the game times. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The third base arrangement table 187 shown in FIG. 45 (c) is referred to when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value. In the third base arrangement table 187, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value are set. The larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated with it. In the acquisition process of the variation continuation period in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU62. It is stored in the register of. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 collates the index information stored in the register with respect to the third base sequence table 187. By doing so, you can grasp the fluctuation duration of the game times. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The fourth base arrangement table 188 shown in FIG. 45 (d) is referred to when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value. In the 4th base array table 188, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the 3rd reference value are set, and the index information of a large value is set. The fluctuation duration of the game times for a long period is associated with it. In the acquisition process of the variation continuation period in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU62. It is stored in the register of. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 collates the index information stored in the register with the fourth base sequence table 188 to check the variation duration of the game times. To grasp. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The fluctuation duration of the game times set in each base sequence table 185 to 188 is the shortest in the first base sequence table 185 and the second shortest in the second base sequence table 186 when compared with the same index information. , The third base sequence table 187 is the second longest, and the fourth base sequence table 188 is the longest. As a result, the larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the average period of the fluctuation duration of the selected game times.

Further, the increase in the fluctuation duration of the game times in each of the base sequence tables 185 to 188 when compared with the same index information increases as the value of the index information increases. As a result, when the longer period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the first base sequence table 185 is changed to the second base sequence table 186, the third base sequence table 187, and the fourth base sequence table 188. It is possible to increase the increase in the fluctuation duration of the game times.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S2901: YES), the first base sequence table 185 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2902). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2903: YES), the second base sequence table 186 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2904). ). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2905: YES), the third base sequence table 187 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2906). ). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2905: NO), the fourth base array table 188 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2907).

When the process of step S2902, the process of step S2904, the process of step S2906, or the process of step S2907 is executed, the process for reading the period table according to the game content is executed (step S2908). In this process, if the game times this time is a big hit result or a small hit result, the hit time period table is read out. Further, when the game times this time are not the big hit result and the small hit result, the processes of steps S605 to S613 in the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, if the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result, the hit time period table is read, and if the current game round is out of order and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display, it is for reach time. The period table is read, and if the number of times the game is held this time is the high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than 2, the normal period table is read. If the number of times the game is held this time is in the high frequency support mode and the number of hold information on the second special figure side is two or more, the shortening period table is read out, and the number of times this game is held is low. If the number of hold information on the first special figure side is less than 3 in the support mode, the normal period table is read, and the game times this time is the low frequency support mode and the first If the number of reserved information on the special figure side is 3 or more, the shortening period table is read out.

In these period tables, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and the game times are set for each of these groups. Index information is set instead of information on the fluctuation duration of. The index information is set so that the mode of selecting the variable duration of the game based on each period table is the same as the mode of selecting the variable duration of the game based on each period table in the first embodiment. It has been. Therefore, the variation of the game times in which the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, is either the 2R high accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result. The period is longer than the average period of the duration and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is longer in the game times that are either the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result, or the 10R high probability jackpot result. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times that is displayed as a missed reach is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result. It will be longer than the average period. Further, in the game times in which the reach display does not occur, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is shorter when the shortened period table is selected than when the normal use period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S2908, the index information acquisition process is executed (step S2909). In the index information acquisition process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the index information is acquired by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out in step S2908.

After that, the period acquisition process is executed (step S2910). In the period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S2909 is collated with the base sequence tables 185 to 188 read in any one of step S2902, step S2904, step S2906 and step S2907. Acquire the variable duration of the game times. The acquired information on the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in step S513 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation duration of the game times is started. That is, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired by using the base arrangement tables 185 to 188 corresponding to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the period for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times is obtained. The adjustment process (FIG. 24) is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game times acquired in step S2910 and the type command including the current hit / fail determination result and the distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S2911). .. The sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the game times based on the information set in the received variation command, and controls the execution of the effect according to the grasped fluctuation continuation period of the game times. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation duration extension process (step S1706) is not executed in the sound / light side MPU 82, and the data table modification process (step S1707) for the game rotation effect is not executed.

According to the above configuration, since the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired by using the base sequence tables 185 to 188 according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the period adjustment for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times is obtained. The process (FIG. 24) is not executed. Since the extension of the variation continuation period of the game times is not executed, the extension process of the variation continuation period (step S1706) is not executed in the sound light side MPU 82, and further, the correction process of the data table for the game times production is performed. (Step S1707) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prolong the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while reducing the processing load.

Index information is set in each period table read out according to the game content corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS, and the index information is acquired based on the period table and the value of the variation type counter CS. .. Then, the fluctuation duration of the acquired game times changes even if the index information is the same, depending on which of the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188 is collated with the index information. It is a composition. As a result, it is possible to acquire the fluctuation continuation period of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while using a common table for each period. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while suppressing the increase in the required storage capacity.

It should be noted that the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time as in the second embodiment of the above-mentioned second embodiment is a parameter for changing the variation duration of the game times as in the present embodiment. The number of times the open / close execution mode is executed by the high-frequency winning mode is the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time as in the configuration which is the target payout rate or the third embodiment above. It may be applied to the configuration which is.

When applied to the second embodiment, in step S2901 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration (FIG. 46), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the first reference value (“134”). % ”) Is determined, and in step S2903, the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the first reference value (“134%”) and is the second reference value. It is determined whether or not it is less than (“200%”), and in step S905, the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value (“200%”). 3 It is determined whether or not it is less than the reference value (“300%”).

When applied to the third embodiment, whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the first reference value (“2”) in step S2901 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 46). It is determined, and in step S2903, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the first reference value (“2”) and less than the second reference value (“4”), and in step S905, the consecutive villas are determined. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (“4”) and less than or equal to the third reference value (“6”).

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for reducing the number of game rounds in the high frequency support mode is different from that of the first embodiment, depending on the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the hit / fail determination result this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3001: YES), the hit / time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3002). The contents of the hit-time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the hit / fail determination result of this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not a missed reach display occurs in the current game round (step S3003). When the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round (step S3003: YES), the reach time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3004). The contents of the reach period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

If the out-of-reach display does not occur in this game round (step S3003: NO), the current support is achieved by determining whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 64. It is determined whether or not the mode is the high frequency support mode (step S3005). In the high frequency support mode (step S3005: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is 3 or more (step S3005: YES). Step S3006). In the high-frequency support mode, as described above, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened is relatively high per unit time, so that the hold information on the second special drawing side is acquired. It will be easier. Further, as already explained, the reserved information on the second special drawing side has priority over the reserved information on the first special drawing side as the start target of the game round. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed according to the number of the reserved information on the second special figure side stored. ..

When the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than two (step S3006: NO), the normal period table 191 (see FIG. 48 (a)) is read from the main ROM 63 (step). S3007). When the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is two or more (step S3006: YES), the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is the second reference value (“30”). It is determined whether or not it is the above (step S3008). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S3008: YES), the normal period table 191 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3007). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the second reference value (step S3008: NO), the shortening period table 192 (see FIG. 48B) is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3009).

FIG. 48A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal use period table 191. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), a plurality of groups are set in the normal period table 191 by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other. , Information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set for each of these groups. That is, in the normal use period table 191, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the hit result is not obtained and the reach display does not occur is relatively long and short, and the fluctuation of "0 to 198" is set. Each of the type counters CS is assigned to one of the plurality of types of fluctuation durations.

FIG. 48B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shortening period table 192. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the shortening period table 192, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other. , Information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set for each of these groups. That is, in the shortening period table 192, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the hit result is not obtained and the reach display does not occur is relatively long and short, and the fluctuation of "0 to 198" is set. Each of the type counters CS is assigned to one of the plurality of types of fluctuation durations.

In the shortened period table 192, a variable duration shorter than the variable duration set in other period tables including the normal period table 191 is set. Therefore, if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the second reference value, it will not be a hit result and further reach in the situation where two or more reserved information on the second special figure side is reserved and stored in the high frequency support mode. When a game round in which the display does not occur is started, the fluctuation duration of the game round may be shorter than in other situations. Further, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times by the shortened period table 192 is shorter than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times by the other period tables including the normal use period table 191. Therefore, if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the second reference value, no hit result will be obtained and further reach will be obtained in the situation where two or more reserved information on the second special figure side are reserved and stored in the high frequency support mode. When a game round that does not generate a display is started, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game round is shorter than in other situations.

In the low frequency support mode (step S3005: NO), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is 3 or more (step S3005: NO). Step S3010). In the low-frequency support mode, as described above, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened is relatively low per unit time, so that the hold information on the second special drawing side is acquired. It becomes difficult, and it becomes easier to acquire the reserved information on the first special drawing side than the reserved information on the second special drawing side. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed according to the number of the reserved information on the first special figure side stored. ..

When the number of reserved information on the first special drawing side is less than three (step S3010: NO), the normal period table 191 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3011), and the first special drawing side is used. When the number of hold information stored in the hold information is 3 or more (step S3010: YES), the shortening period table 192 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3012). The contents of the normal period table and the shortened period table are as described above.

When the hit time period table is read in step S3002, when the reach time period table is read in step S3004, when the normal time period table 191 is read in step S3007, the shortening period table is read in step S3009. When 192 is read, when the normal period table 191 is read in step S3011, or when the shortened period table 192 is read in step S3012, the period acquisition process is executed (step S3013). In the period acquisition process, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period tables 191, 192 read out as described above, the variation continuation period of the current game times is acquired. The acquired information on the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in step S513 in the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation duration of the game times is started. That is, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation continuation period of the game times acquired by using the period tables 191, 192 is used as it is, the period adjustment process for extending the fluctuation continuation period of the game times (FIG. 24). Is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information of the variation continuation period of the game times acquired this time and the type command including the success / failure determination result and the distribution determination result of this time are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S3014). The sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the game times based on the information set in the received variation command, and controls the execution of the effect according to the grasped fluctuation continuation period of the game times. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation duration extension process (step S1706) is not executed in the sound / light side MPU 82, and the data table modification process (step S1707) for the game rotation effect is not executed.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is two or more in the high frequency support mode, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or more than the second reference value. , Not the shortened period table 192, but the normal use period table 191 is referred to as the game times as in the case where the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than 2 in the high frequency support mode. The variable duration of is acquired. Furthermore, the normal period table 191 is a period table that is referred to when the number of reserved information on the first special figure side is less than 3 in the low frequency support mode. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode becomes the first. 2 Even if the number of reserved information on the special drawing side is 2 or more, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is not shortened. Then, since the fluctuation duration of the game times is not shortened, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Further, as described above, the period table selected in the situation where the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is 2 or more in the high frequency support mode is the existing normal period table 191 and the shortened period. Since the configuration is switched between the table and the table 192, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load and suppressing the increase in the storage capacity.

It should be noted that the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time as in the second embodiment of the above-mentioned second embodiment is a parameter for changing the variation duration of the game times as in the present embodiment. The number of times the open / close execution mode is executed by the high-frequency winning mode is the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time as in the configuration which is the target payout rate or the third embodiment above. It may be applied to the configuration which is. When applied to the second embodiment, in step S3008 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration (FIG. 47), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the second reference value (“200”). % ") It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than that. When applied to the third embodiment, in step S3008 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration (FIG. 47), the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the second reference value (“4”), and the third reference is applied. Whether or not it is less than the value (“6”) is determined.

Further, in step S3008, instead of determining whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value, it may be configured to determine whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the first reference value. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is equal to or higher than the reference value, or it may be configured to determine whether or not it is equal to or higher than another reference value different from the first to third reference values.

<7th Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

49 (a) to 49 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197.

The first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197 are all stored in advance in the main ROM 63. In each of the first to third base array tables 195 to 197, index information is set in which the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "n", and the game is associated with each index information. The fluctuation duration of the times is set.

In the first base sequence table 195 shown in FIG. 49 (a), the high frequency support mode is generated based on the occurrence of the 5R high accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, and then the low frequency support mode is generated. It is referred to when the high frequency support mode is not continued without the occurrence of the game times in the non-regulated situation. In the first base sequence table 195, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected in the unregulated situation are set, and the larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated with it. In the acquisition process of the variation continuation period in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU62. It is stored in the register of. In the non-regulated situation, the main MPU 62 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times by collating the index information stored in the register with the first base sequence table 195. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

In the second base sequence table 196 shown in FIG. 49 (b), the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 5R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, and then the game times in the low frequency support mode occur. It is referred to when it is the first regulation situation in which the high frequency support mode continues without any problem. In the second base sequence table 196, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected in the first regulation situation are set, and the larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated with it. .. In the acquisition process of the variation continuation period in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the gaming state and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU62. It is stored in the register of. In the first regulation situation, the main MPU 62 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times by collating the index information stored in the register with the second base sequence table 196. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

In the third base sequence table 197 shown in FIG. 49 (c), the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, and then the game times in the low frequency support mode occur. It is referred to in the case of the second regulation situation in which the high frequency support mode continues without any problem. In the third base array table 197, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected in the case of the second regulation situation are set, and the larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated. Has been done. In the acquisition process of the variation continuation period in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the gaming state and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU62. It is stored in the register of. In the second regulatory situation, the main MPU 62 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times by collating the index information stored in the register with the third base sequence table 197. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The fluctuation duration of the game times set in each base sequence table 195 to 197 is the shortest in the first base sequence table 195 and the second shortest in the second base sequence table 196 when compared with the same index information. , Third base sequence table 197 is the longest. As a result, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the selected game times becomes longer in the order of non-regulated status → first regulated status → second regulated status.

In addition, the increase in the fluctuation duration of the game times in each base sequence table 195 to 197 when compared with the same index information increases as the value of the index information increases. As a result, the longer period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the first base sequence table 195 is changed to the second base sequence table 196 and the third base sequence table 197. It is possible to increase the amount of increase.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a special electric termination process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S3101). If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the special electric train termination process is terminated as it is.

When the ending period in the current open / close execution mode has elapsed (step S3101: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S3102). The processing content of the game state transition processing is the same as step S1202 of the special electric power ending processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, it is determined whether or not the support mode before the start of the current open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode and the support mode after the end of the current open / close execution mode is the high frequency support mode (step). S3103). The main RAM 64 is provided with a pre-start support flag. If the support mode immediately before the start of the open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode, the pre-start support flag is cleared to "0" and the open / close execution mode is started. If the support mode immediately before is set to the high frequency support mode, "1" is set in the pre-start support flag. In step S3103, an affirmative determination is made when the pre-start support flag is "0" and the high frequency support flag is "1".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S3104). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3105). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

After that, the second base arrangement table 196 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3106). As a result, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired, the second base sequence table 196 will be referred to.

When a negative determination is made in step S3104, it is determined whether or not the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S3107). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, information corresponding to the third cycle that enables firing of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3108). The third cycle is 0.75 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the third cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

After that, the third base arrangement table 197 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3109). As a result, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired, the third base sequence table 197 will be referred to.

When a negative determination is made in step S3103, when the process of step S3106 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3107, or when the process of step S3109 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" ( Step S3110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric end processing to the one corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S3201). If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the processing during determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S3201: YES), the condition that the hit / fail determination result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3202: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the acquisition process of the opening period is executed (step S3203). In the present embodiment, the opening period is one type, and specifically, it is set to 4 seconds.

After that, the information of the opening period acquired in step S3203 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S3204). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S3205). The sound / light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period by receiving the opening command, and causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the opening effect. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3206). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special electric start process.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3202: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is provided. By determining whether or not the flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the fact that the game times ended this time have a 10R low-probability jackpot result, and the frequency is high. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the support mode (step S3207).

In the case of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3207: YES), the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S3208). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S3209). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S3209: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3210). This results in a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

After that, the information corresponding to the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3211). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

After that, the first base arrangement table 195 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3212). As a result, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired, the first base sequence table 195 is referred to.

When a negative determination is made in step S3207, a negative determination is made in step S3209, or the process of step S3212 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3213). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

The first regulation status is reached when the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 5R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode. In the first regulation situation, as described above, the firing cycle of the game ball is the second shortest, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is the second longest. The second base sequence table 196 is referenced. Then, this first regulated situation is terminated when the game times can be executed in the low frequency support mode, and becomes a non-regulated situation. In the unregulated situation, as described above, the first cycle is the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, and when determining the variable duration of the game, the first base array table has the shortest average period of the variable duration of the game. 195 is referenced.

The second regulation status is reached when the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode. In the second regulation situation, as described above, the firing cycle of the game ball is the longest third cycle, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times, the third base array has the longest average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times. Table 197 is referenced. Then, this second regulated situation is terminated when the game times can be executed in the low frequency support mode, and becomes a non-regulated situation. In the unregulated situation, as described above, the first cycle is the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, and when determining the variable duration of the game, the first base array table has the shortest average period of the variable duration of the game. 195 is referenced.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, a process for reading the period table according to the game content is executed (step S3301). In this process, if the game times this time is a big hit result or a small hit result, the hit time period table is read out. Further, when the game times this time are not the big hit result and the small hit result, the processes of steps S605 to S613 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, if the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result, the hit time period table is read, and if the current game round is out of order and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display, it is for reach time. The period table is read, and if the number of times the game is held this time is the high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than 2, the normal period table is read. If the number of times the game is held this time is in the high frequency support mode and the number of hold information on the second special figure side is two or more, the shortening period table is read out, and the number of times this game is held is low. If the number of hold information on the first special figure side is less than 3 in the support mode, the normal period table is read, and the game times this time is the low frequency support mode and the first If the number of reserved information on the special figure side is 3 or more, the shortening period table is read out.

In these period tables, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and the game times are set for each of these groups. Index information is set instead of information on the fluctuation duration of. The index information is set so that the mode of selecting the variable duration of the game based on each period table is the same as the mode of selecting the variable duration of the game based on each period table in the first embodiment. It has been. Therefore, the variation of the game times in which the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, is either the 2R high accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result. The period is longer than the average period of the duration and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is longer in the game times that are either the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result, or the 10R high probability jackpot result. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times that is displayed as a missed reach is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result. It will be longer than the average period. Further, in the game times in which the reach display does not occur, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is shorter when the shortened period table is selected than when the normal use period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S3301, the index information acquisition process is executed (step S3302). In the index information acquisition process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the index information is acquired by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out in step S3301.

After that, the period acquisition process is executed (step S3303). In the period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the base sequence tables 195 to 197 currently read in the main RAM 64 to acquire the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. do. Specifically, if it is in a non-regulated state, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the first base sequence table 195 read into the main RAM 64. If it is the first regulation situation, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the second base arrangement table 196 read out to the main RAM 64. If it is in the second regulation state, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the third base arrangement table 197 read out to the main RAM 64.

The information on the variation duration of the game times acquired in step S3303 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in step S513 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation duration of the game times is started. That is, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is acquired by using the base sequence tables 195 to 197, the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) for extending the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game times acquired in step S3303 and the type command including the current hit / fail determination result and the distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S3304). .. The sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the game times based on the information set in the received variation command, and controls the execution of the effect according to the grasped fluctuation continuation period of the game times. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation duration extension process (step S1706) is not executed in the sound / light side MPU 82, and the data table modification process (step S1707) for the game rotation effect is not executed.

Next, how the non-regulated situation, the first regulated situation, and the second regulated situation are set will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53A shows a period in which the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, and FIG. 53B shows a period in which the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. (C) shows a period in which the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot result other than the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, and FIG. 53 (d) shows a period in which the high-frequency support mode is used. (E) shows a period in which it is in a non-regulated status, FIG. 53 (f) shows a period in which it is in a first regulated status, and FIG. 53 (g) shows a period in which it is in a second regulated status.

As shown in FIG. 53 (e), the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t1 in the non-regulated situation, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), triggered by the result of the 10R low probability jackpot, and the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t2. Is finished. At the timing of t2, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53 (d). In this case, the low-frequency support mode is set immediately before the open / close execution mode is started, and the high-frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode is finished. Since neither the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result nor the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained, the unregulated situation is maintained as shown in FIG. 53 (e). Even if the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the first regulation status or the second regulation The unregulated situation is maintained without any transition to the situation. After that, when the digestion of the game times of the end reference number is completed in the high frequency support mode at the timing of t3, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53 (d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result is started at the timing of t4 in the unregulated situation, and as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t5. The execution mode ends. At the timing of t5, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53 (d). In this case, the low-frequency support mode is set immediately before the open / close execution mode is started, and the high-frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode ends, and the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is Since it is a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the non-regulated situation is terminated and the first regulated situation is started as shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 53 (f). Due to the first regulation situation, as mentioned above, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the second shortest cycle, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is the second. A long second base sequence table 196 is referenced.

After that, in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues, the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 53 (b), and the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t7. Is finished. Since the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the first regulatory status is maintained. Here, the second base sequence table 196 is referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times even if the game times result in a 10R high accuracy jackpot in the first regulation situation.

During the period when the open / close execution mode is executed, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set, and when the open / close execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set again. .. In the first regulation situation, an open / close execution mode is generated triggered by a 10R low probability jackpot result, and further, in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the game times of the end reference number are exhausted and the low frequency support mode is executed. It ends by moving to.

Next, a case where a second regulatory situation occurs will be described.

As shown in FIG. 53 (e), the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is started at the timing of t8 in the non-regulated situation, and as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t9. Is finished. At the timing of t9, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53 (d). In this case, the low-frequency support mode is set immediately before the open / close execution mode is started, and the high-frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode ends, and the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is Since it is a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the non-regulated situation is terminated and the second regulated situation is started as shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 53 (g). Due to the second regulation situation, as described above, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the longest third cycle, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest third cycle. The base sequence table 197 is referenced.

After that, in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues, the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high accuracy jackpot result is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 53 (a), and the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t11. Is finished. Since the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the second regulatory status is maintained. Here, the third base sequence table 197 is referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times even if the game times result in a 5R high accuracy jackpot in the second regulation situation.

During the period when the open / close execution mode is executed, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set, and when the open / close execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set again. .. In the second regulation situation, the open / close execution mode is generated triggered by the result of the 10R low probability jackpot, and in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the game times of the end reference number are exhausted and the low frequency support mode is executed. It ends by moving to.

According to the above configuration, the high-frequency support mode is generated based on the occurrence of the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, which is the first regulation status, and the first regulation status is the game times in the low-frequency support mode. Continue until the situation is such that can be executed. In addition, the high frequency support mode is generated based on the occurrence of the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, so that the second regulation situation is reached, and in the second regulation situation, the game round can be executed in the low frequency support mode. Continue until the situation arises. In other words, if the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period in which the game times are executed in the high frequency support mode is the type to be regulated, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer and the game times fluctuate. There will be regulatory situations where the average duration will be longer. Then, the regulatory situation is continued as long as the advantageous period continues, and ends when the advantageous period ends. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period according to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

High-frequency support mode is the first regulation status due to the occurrence of 5R high-accuracy jackpot result in low-frequency support mode, and high-frequency support is based on the occurrence of 10R high-accuracy jackpot result in low-frequency support mode. When the mode is generated, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time becomes lower than that of the first regulation situation, which is the second regulation situation. As a result, the higher the advantage of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period, the lower the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

In order to extend the fluctuation duration of the game times because the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired using the base sequence tables 195 to 197 according to each of the non-regulated status, the first regulation status and the second regulation status. The period adjustment process (FIG. 24) is not executed. Since the extension of the variation continuation period of the game times is not executed, the extension process of the variation continuation period (step S1706) is not executed in the sound light side MPU 82, and further, the correction process of the data table for the game times production is performed. (Step S1707) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times in the first regulation situation and the second regulation situation while reducing the processing load.

Index information is set in each period table read out according to the game content corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS, and the index information is acquired based on the period table and the value of the variation type counter CS. .. Then, the fluctuation duration of the acquired game times changes even if the index information is the same, depending on which of the first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197 is collated with the index information. It is a composition. As a result, it is possible to acquire the fluctuation continuation period of the game times according to each of the non-regulated status, the first regulated status, and the second regulated status while using a common table for each period. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the fluctuation continuation period of the game times in the first regulation situation and the second regulation situation while suppressing the increase in the required storage capacity.

At least one of the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode depends on the non-regulated status, the first regulated status, and the second regulated status. It may have different configurations. For example, in the non-regulated situation, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game round, and in the first regulated situation, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game round. Is selected, and if the second regulation situation is used, the third final stop period (5 seconds) may be selected as the final stop period of the game. In the non-regulated situation, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected as the opening period of the open / close execution mode, and in the first regulated situation, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected as the opening period of the open / close execution mode. If it is the second regulation situation, the third opening period (16 seconds) may be selected as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode. In the non-regulated situation, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected as the interval period of the open / close execution mode, and in the first regulated situation, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected as the interval period of the open / close execution mode. In the case of the second regulation situation, the third interval period (10 seconds) may be selected as the interval period of the open / close execution mode. In the non-regulated situation, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected as the ending period of the open / close execution mode, and in the first regulated situation, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected as the ending period of the open / close execution mode. If it is the second regulation situation, the third ending period (18 seconds) may be selected as the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode.

As described above, the first regulation status or the second regulation status increases the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period according to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

<Eighth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S3401). If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the processing during determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S3401: YES), the winning / failing determination result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3402: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the acquisition process of the opening period is executed (step S3403). In the present embodiment, the opening period is one type, and specifically, it is set to 4 seconds.

After that, the information of the opening period acquired in step S3403 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S3404). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S3405). The sound / light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period by receiving the opening command, and causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the opening effect. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect.

After that, on condition that the hit result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S3406: YES), the firing cycle area of the main RAM 64 Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in 64b (step S3407). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S3406, or when the process of step S3407 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3408). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special electric start process.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3402: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is provided. By determining whether or not the flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the fact that the game times ended this time have a 10R low-probability jackpot result, and the frequency is high. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the support mode (step S3409).

In the case of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3409: YES), the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S3410). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S3411). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S3411: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3412). This results in a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

After that, the information corresponding to the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3413). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S3409, a negative determination is made in step S3411, or the process of step S3413 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3414). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

With the above configuration, the launch cycle of the game ball is the longest second cycle based on the occurrence of the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode. Then, this regulation situation is terminated when the game times can be executed in the low frequency support mode. When the regulation status is lifted, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the shortest first cycle. That is, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period in which the game round is executed in the high frequency support mode is the type of the regulation start target, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Then, the regulatory situation is continued as long as the advantageous period continues, and ends when the advantageous period ends. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period in the advantageous period triggered by the jackpot result, which is the type of the regulation start target.

When the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs in the low-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode is started from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the firing cycle of the game ball from the start of the open / close execution mode that triggered the setting of the regulation status, and it is possible to slow down the progress speed of the open / close execution mode.

When the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 10R low accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, the above regulation situation does not occur. As a result, the above-mentioned regulation situation occurs on condition that the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are set after the opening / closing execution mode, and the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time is excessive. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a strange thing.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed in the low frequency support mode, the above regulation status does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from being imposed even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

<9th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S3501). If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the processing during determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S3501: YES), the condition that the hit / fail determination result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3502: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the acquisition process of the opening period is executed (step S3503). In the present embodiment, the opening period is one type, and specifically, it is set to 4 seconds.

After that, the information of the opening period acquired in step S3503 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S3504). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S3505). The sound / light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period by receiving the opening command, and causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the opening effect. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect.

After that, on condition that the opening / closing execution mode generated this time is the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (step S3506: YES), that is, the high frequency winning mode and the most rounds. On condition that a number of open / close execution modes are generated, information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3507). .. The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S3506 or when the process of step S3507 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3508). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special electric start process.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3502: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is provided. By determining whether or not the flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the fact that the game times ended this time have a 10R low-probability jackpot result, and the frequency is high. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the support mode (step S3509).

In the case of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3509: YES), the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S3510). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not it is present (step S3511). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S3511: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3512). This results in a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S3509, a negative determination is made in step S3511, or the process of step S3512 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3513). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a special electric power termination process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S3601). If a negative determination is made in step S3601, the special electric train termination process is terminated as it is.

When the ending period in the current open / close execution mode has elapsed (step S3601: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S3602). The processing content of the game state transition processing is the same as step S1202 of the special electric power ending processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, the information corresponding to the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3603). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3604). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric end processing to the one corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation start processing.

With the above configuration, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, which is the type of regulation start target, is started, the launch cycle of the game ball is the longest second cycle. Then, this regulation status is terminated when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated. When the regulation status is lifted, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the shortest first cycle. This makes it possible to slow down the progress speed of the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, which is the type of regulation start target, and as a result, an excessively large profit is given to the player in a short time. It becomes possible to suppress it.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution cycle with the largest number of rounds, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer, and in the opening / closing execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, and the opening / closing execution mode, which does not have the maximum number of rounds, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. It is kept short. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from becoming excessive.

The opening / closing execution mode in which the firing cycle of the game ball is set to the second cycle is not limited to the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode, as long as it is the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. The firing cycle of the game ball may be set to the second cycle regardless of the number of times the round game is executed, or the firing cycle of the game ball may be set to the second cycle regardless of the opening / closing execution mode. It may be configured that the firing cycle of the game ball is set to the second cycle only in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the method of measuring the total number of rounds generated in a predetermined period is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment, and the configuration for changing the game situation according to the total number of rounds is the above-mentioned first embodiment. It is different from the embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the main RAM 64 used for managing the total number of rounds. In this embodiment, the main RAM 64 is not provided with the total number of rounds counter 64c.

As shown in FIG. 57, the main RAM 64 is provided with a measurement round number counter 201 and a period measurement counter 202. In the measurement round number counter 201, the total number of times within the calculation trigger period (specifically, 10 minutes) of the round game executed in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode is measured. In the period measurement counter 202, the main MPU 62 indicates that the calculation trigger period has elapsed since the supply of operating power to the main MPU 62 was started, and that the calculation trigger period has newly elapsed from the elapsed timing of the previous calculation trigger period. It is a counter for specifying at.

In addition to the measurement round number counter 201 and the period measurement counter 202, the main RAM 64 is provided with a management area 203 and a write pointer 204. Using these management areas 203 and the write pointer 204, the number of target rounds, which is the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode generated in the measurement target period (1 hour), is calculated.

The management area 203 is provided with six storage areas 203a to 203f for storing information on the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode that occurred during the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes. ing. That is, the management area 203 is provided with the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. The first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f all have the same storage capacity, and each can store information on the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode that occurred within the calculation trigger period. It has a large storage capacity.

The write pointer 204 sets the storage areas 203a to 203f, which are the write destinations of the total number of rounds in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203 when the calculation trigger period has newly elapsed, to the main MPU 62. It is a counter to make it possible to grasp. When the total number of rounds is newly calculated after the calculation trigger period elapses, the storage areas 203a to 203f corresponding to the value of the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. The information on the new total number of rounds is overwritten on 203f, and then the value of the write pointer 204 is added by 1. In this case, the value of the write pointer 204 takes a value of "0" to "5", and when the value of the write pointer 204 is "n", the total number of rounds newly added to the n + 1 storage area in the management area 203. Information is overwritten. Further, as a result of adding 1 to the value of the write pointer 204, when the maximum value of the write pointer 204 is exceeded, the write pointer 204 is cleared to "0".

As described above, the management area 203 is provided with six storage areas 203a to 203f that can store information on the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode that occurred during the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes. Has been done. Therefore, when the information on the total number of rounds (including "0") is stored in all of the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203, it occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour). Information on the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is stored in the management area 203. Each time the calculation trigger period (10 minutes) elapses, the main MPU 62 stores information on the total number of rounds stored in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time in the first to sixth storage areas 203a of the management area 203. Information on the total number of rounds stored in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f immediately after the overwrite is performed, as well as overwriting the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204. Is added and the information of the addition result is overwritten on the target round number area 205 provided in the main RAM 64 as the target round number information. In the present embodiment, the information on the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 (information on the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode generated in the measurement target period (1 hour)) is a unit. It is a parameter to generate an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per hour.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a special electric power termination process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the current open / close execution mode has elapsed (step S3701). If a negative determination is made in step S3701, the special electric train termination process is terminated as it is.

When the ending period in the current open / close execution mode has elapsed (step S3701: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S3702). The processing content of the game state transition processing is the same as step S1202 of the special electric power ending processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, by determining whether the hit result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the opening / closing this time is performed. It is determined whether or not the execution mode is the high frequency winning mode (step S3703). When the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode (step S3703: YES), the number of executions of the round game executed in the current opening / closing execution mode is added to the measurement round number counter 201 of the main RAM 64. (Step S3704).

When a negative determination is made in step S3703 or when the process of step S3704 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3705). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric end processing to the one corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by the main MPU 62. The management process is executed by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

First, the value of the period measurement counter 202 of the main RAM 64 is added by 1 (step S3801). Then, when the value of the period measurement counter 202 after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the calculation trigger period (10 minutes) (step S3802: YES), the processes shown in steps S3803 to S3808 are executed.

Specifically, the information of the measurement round number counter 201 of the main RAM 64 is overwritten on the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the value of the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. (Step S3803). After that, the update process of the write pointer 204 is executed (step S3804). In the update process, the value of the write pointer 204 is added by 1, and when the value after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 204, the write pointer 204 is cleared to "0".

After that, the information of all the total number of rounds stored in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203 is added (step S3805), and the addition result is used as the information of the number of target rounds and the number of target rounds. The area 205 is overwritten (step S3806). After that, the value of the measurement round number counter 201 is cleared to "0" (step S3807), and the value of the period measurement counter 202 is cleared to "0" (step S3808).

By executing the management process (FIG. 59) as described above, every time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, elapses, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is stored in the management area 203. Of the 1st to 6th storage areas 203a to 203f, the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 are overwritten, and the total number of rounds stored in each of the 1st to 6th storage areas 203a to 203f is The number of target rounds is calculated by adding all of them. Then, the calculated information on the number of target rounds is overwritten in the target round number area 205. As a result, every time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, elapses, the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode executed in the immediately preceding measurement target period (1 hour) is measured and measured. Information on the number of target rounds as a result is stored in the target round number area 205.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a selection process of the final stop period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S3901). The first reference value is a value larger than the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, as in the first embodiment, and is the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R. It is the value of the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode triggered by the high-accuracy jackpot result. Specifically, it is set to "10". As a result, the number of target rounds does not reach the first reference value even if the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs only once in the measurement target period (1 hour). Further, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs once in the measurement target period (1 hour), the number of target rounds reaches the first reference value.

The first reference value is not limited to "10", and is a value larger than the value of the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively small. The value may be less than or equal to the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively large. Further, the first reference value may be a value larger than the value of the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively large, and the number of times the round game is executed is relatively high. The value may be less than or equal to the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode.

When the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value (step S3901: YES), the base final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S3902). The base final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds. The information of the base final stop period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base final stop period in step S3902, the information is selected in step S705 in the special figure changing process (FIG. 15). The final stop period of the base is set in the special power timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period in this game round is started. Further, in step S706 in the special figure changing process (FIG. 15), a final stop command in which information indicating that the base final stop period is the final stop period of the current game round is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. .. By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and at the same time, by transmitting the corresponding command to the display side MPU 92. The symbol display device 41 starts the static display of each symbol that is the result of stopping the game round this time. The static display will continue for the final stop period of this game.

When a negative determination is made in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S3903). The second reference value is executed when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs twice, which is the first plurality of times, as in the first embodiment. It is a value larger than the value of the total number of round games, and is executed when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs three times, which is the second multiple times. It is the value of the total number of round games. Specifically, it is set to "30". As a result, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is generated in the measurement target period (1 hour), and the opening / closing is triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. Even if the execution mode occurs, the number of target rounds does not reach the second reference value. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is further generated in the measurement target period (1 hour), the number of target rounds reaches the second reference value. The second reference value is not limited to "30", and may be less than 30 or larger than "30" as long as it is larger than the first reference value. ..

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S3903: YES), first, the information on the base final stop period and the information on the first common extension period are read from the main ROM 63 (step S3903: YES). Step S3904). The base final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds as described above. The first common extension period is set to 1 second. Then, the final suspension period of the current game round is calculated by adding the first common extension period to the base final suspension period (step S3905). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, 1.5 seconds, which is the sum of the base final stop period and the first common extension period, is the game round this time. It will be the final suspension period of. In step S705 in the special figure changing process (FIG. 15), the sum period of the base final stop period and the first common extension period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period in this game round is started. Further, in step S706 in the special figure changing process (FIG. 15), information indicating that the sum period of the base final stop period and the first common extension period is the final stop period of the current game round is set. The stop command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and at the same time, by transmitting the corresponding command to the display side MPU 92. The symbol display device 41 starts the static display of each symbol that is the result of stopping the game round this time. The static display will continue for the final stop period of this game.

Number of target rounds When the number of target rounds stored in the area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S3903: NO), first, information on the base final stop period and information on the first common extension period are obtained from the main ROM 63. Read (step S3906). The base final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds as described above, and the first common extension period is set to 1 second as described above. After that, the final stop period of the current game round is calculated by doubling the first common extension period (step S3907) and adding the period of the doubled result to the base final stop period (step S3908). In other words, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, 2.5 seconds, which is the sum of the base final suspension period and twice the first common extension period, is the final suspension period of this game. Become. In step S705 in the special figure changing process (FIG. 15), the sum period of the base final stop period and twice the first common extension period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period in this game round is started. Further, in step S706 in the special figure changing process (FIG. 15), information indicating that the sum period of the base final stop period and twice the first common extension period is the final stop period of the current game round is set. The final stop command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and at the same time, by transmitting the corresponding command to the display side MPU 92. The symbol display device 41 starts the static display of each symbol that is the result of stopping the game round this time. The static display will continue for the final stop period of this game.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the final stop period of the game. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour), the final stop period of the game round becomes long. Then, as the final stop period of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The final stop period of the game round becomes gradually longer as the value of the number of target rounds increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs during the measurement target period (1 hour), the larger the number of occurrences, the longer the final stop period of the game. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of times the game is generated per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, elapses, the information on the total number of rounds of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is indicated by the write pointer 204 of the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203. The number of target rounds is calculated by overwriting the storage areas 203a to 203f and adding all the total number of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. Then, the final stop period of the game round is changed according to the calculated number of target rounds. As a result, it is possible to change the final stop period of the game as appropriate according to the change in the number of target rounds.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the first common extension period read from the main ROM 63 is added to the base final stop period to finally stop the game. When the period is measured and the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop of this game is performed by adding twice the first common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base final stop period. The period is measured. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of the final suspension period of the game by using the information of the first common extension period.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a selection process of an opening period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4001: YES), the base opening period is selected as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S4002). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds. The information of the base opening period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base opening period in step S4002, the selected base in step S804 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16). The opening period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started. Further, in step S805 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), an opening command in which information indicating that the base opening period is the current opening period is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of the current light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

Number of target rounds When the number of target rounds stored in the area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4003: YES), first, information on the base opening period and the second from the main ROM 63. The information of the common extension period is read out (step S4004). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds. Then, the current opening period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base opening period (step S4005). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the opening period of this time is 9 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period. In step S804 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), the sum period of the base opening period and the second common extension period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of this opening period is started. Further, in step S805 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), the opening command in which the information indicating that the sum period of the base opening period and the second common extension period is the current opening period is set is on the sound side. It is transmitted to MPU82. By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of the current light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

Number of target rounds When the number of target rounds stored in the area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4003: NO), first, the information on the base opening period and the information on the second common extension period are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4006). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as described above, and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as described above. After that, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4007), and the period resulting from the doubling is added to the base opening period to calculate the current opening period (step S4008). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period of this time is 14 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period. In step S804 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), the sum period of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of this opening period is started. Further, in step S805 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), an opening command in which information indicating that the sum period of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period is the current opening period is set is set. It is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of the current light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the opening period of the open / close execution mode. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour), the opening period of the open / close execution mode becomes long. Then, as the opening period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening period of the open / close execution mode gradually increases as the value of the number of target rounds increases. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour), the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode becomes longer as the number of occurrences increases. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, elapses, the information on the total number of rounds of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is written by the write pointer 204 in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203. The number of target rounds is calculated by overwriting the indicated storage areas 203a to 203f and adding all the total number of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. Then, the opening period of the open / close execution mode is changed according to the calculated number of target rounds. This makes it possible to appropriately change the opening period of the open / close execution mode according to the change in the number of target rounds.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode of this time is performed by adding the second common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base opening period. Is measured, and when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period of this open / close execution mode is set by adding twice the second common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base opening period. It is measured. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode by using the information of the first second common extension period.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the special electric start processing in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special power timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S4101). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the special electric train start process is terminated as it is.

When the opening period in the current open / close execution mode has elapsed (step S4101: YES), the jackpot result is provided on the condition that the execution trigger of the current open / close execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S4102: YES). Executes the time setting process.

In the setting process at the time of the big hit result, the value of the number of round games corresponding to the current big hit result is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S4103). Specifically, if the jackpot result this time is a 2R high accuracy jackpot result, "2" is set in the round counter, and if the jackpot result this time is a 5R high accuracy jackpot result, the round counter is set. Set "5", and if the current jackpot result is a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result, set "10" in the round counter. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games by the main MPU 62 in the open / close execution mode.

After that, the process at the start of opening is executed (step S4104). Although the details of the process at the start of opening will be described later, a process for newly starting a round game or a process for allowing the special electric winning device 32 to be opened a plurality of times in one round game is executed. If the processing at the start of opening is executed to newly start the round game, the upper limit number of game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in this round game is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64. Further, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in this round game is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 64, and the opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 in this opening time is selected. In addition, if the processing times are such that the special electric winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times in one round game, the values are not set in the winning counter and the open / close counter, and the opening times this time. The opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 in the above is selected.

On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the small hit result (step S4102: NO), the setting process at the time of the small hit result is executed. In the setting process at the time of the small hit result, "2" is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4105), and "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4106). The open / close counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed by the main MPU 62 in the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode, and is one round in the open / close execution mode of the round number specified mode. It is a counter for specifying the number of times of opening and closing the special electric winning device 32 in the game by the main MPU 62. After that, the read processing of the open continuation period corresponding to the small hit result is executed (step S4107). The opening continuation period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and specifically, it is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball.

When the process of step S4104 or step S4107 is executed, the read open continuation period information is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4108). As a result, the measurement of the open continuation period is started. After that, the opening setting process for opening the special electric winning device 32 is executed (step S4109). Further, a release command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S4110). Upon receiving the release command, the sound / light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effect in the open / close execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 accordingly. After that, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S4111). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric power opening processing.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the special electric power in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the open monitoring process is executed (step S4201). In the open monitoring process, the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 for the winning of one game ball in the special electric winning device 32.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4202). Further, by determining whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the current open continuation period has elapsed, and the round period counter provided in the main RAM 64 is determined. By determining whether or not the value of is "0", it is determined whether or not the upper limit period of the current round game has elapsed (step S4203).

The round period counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the upper limit period of the round game has passed, and the round game is displayed on the round period counter at the start of each round game triggered by the 5R high accuracy jackpot result. The upper limit period of is set. In the round game triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, even if the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 has not reached the upper limit and the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state. The round game ends when the upper limit period of the round game elapses. In the round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once, so that the opening continuous period of the special electric winning device 32 is the round game. It becomes the upper limit period of. Further, in the round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened generated in one round game is the target number of rounds area, as will be described in detail later. It will vary according to the number of target rounds stored in 205, but if the special electric winning device 32 is opened only once in one round game, the opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 will be. It is the upper limit period of the round game, and if the special electric winning device 32 is opened multiple times in one round game, the sum of the total period of the opening continuation period and the total closing period of the special electric winning device 32 is calculated. This is the maximum period for round games.

If the open continuation period has elapsed, or if the upper limit period of the round game has elapsed in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a positive judgment is made in step S4203, and the open continuation period has elapsed. If the upper limit period of the round game has not elapsed in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S4203. If a negative determination is made in both steps S4202 and S4203, the processing during the opening of the special electric power is terminated as it is. As a result, if the closing condition is not satisfied, the open state of the special electric winning device 32 is continued.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S4202 or step S4203, the closing setting process for closing the special electric winning device 32 is executed (step S4204). After that, the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S4205). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" or whether the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4206). If the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" or the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" in the open / close execution mode of the round number specified mode, the end of one round game. It means that the condition is satisfied. If the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" or the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" in the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode, the end condition of the open / close execution mode. Means that was established.

In the case of a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a condition that the value of the round period counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" is set as a closing condition of the special electric winning device 32. The situation where the value of the round period counter becomes "0" occurs only in the last open round of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied when the value of the round period counter becomes "0", the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 in the subsequent step S4205, so that the value of the open / close counter becomes "0". It becomes "0". Therefore, when the upper limit period of the round game has elapsed in the round game of the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 becomes “0”, so that step S4206 Make an affirmative judgment at.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S4206, the value of the round counter of the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 on condition that the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit result (step S4207: YES) (step S4208). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4209).

If a negative determination is made in step S4206, or if a negative determination is made in step S4209, it means that the open state of the special electric winning device 32 will continue to occur in the opening / closing execution mode this time. In this case, the closing period selection process is executed (step S4210). Although the details of the closing period selection process will be described later, a process for selecting a period for keeping the special electric winning device 32 in the closed state between one opening time and the next opening times in the special electric winning device 32 is executed. do.

After that, the information of the closing period selected in step S4210 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4211). As a result, the measurement of this closing period is started. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S4212). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4206 and a negative determination is made in step S4207, it means that the end condition of the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is satisfied. Further, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S4206 and step S4207 and the affirmative judgment is made in step S4209, it means that the end condition of the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result is satisfied. In these cases, the ending period selection process is executed (step S4213). The processing content of the ending period selection process in the present embodiment will be described later.

After that, the information of the ending period selected in step S4213 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4214). As a result, the measurement of the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, an ending command including the information of the ending period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S4215). By receiving the ending command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2 (step S4216). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric end processing.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the processing during closing of the special electric power in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the current closing period or the interval period has elapsed (step S4301). If a negative determination is made in step S4301, the processing during closing of the special electric train is terminated as it is.

When the current closing period or the interval period has elapsed (step S4301: YES), the opening start time, provided that the execution trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S4302: YES). (Step S4303). Although the details of the process at the start of opening will be described later, a process for newly starting a round game or a process for allowing the special electric winning device 32 to be opened a plurality of times in one round game is executed. If the processing at the start of opening is executed to newly start the round game, the upper limit number of game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in this round game is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64. Further, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in this round game is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 64, and the opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 in this opening time is selected. In addition, if the processing times are such that the special electric winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times in one round game, the values are not set in the winning counter and the open / close counter, and the opening times this time. The opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 in the above is selected.

When the execution trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the small hit result (step S4302: NO), the read processing of the open continuation period corresponding to the small hit result is executed (step S4304). The content of the read processing of the open continuation period corresponding to the small hit result is the same as that of step S4107 in the special electric start processing (FIG. 62).

When the process of step S4303 or step S4304 is executed, the read open continuation period information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4305). As a result, the measurement of the open continuation period is started. In addition, an open setting process for opening the special electric winning device 32 is executed (step S4306).

After that, it is determined whether or not the new opening of the special electric winning device 32 corresponds to the start of a new round game in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result (step S4307). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4307, an additional opening command including information on the opening duration selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S4308). By receiving the additional opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the current opening continuation period and starts measuring the opening continuation period, and also opens / close execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41. The control for switching the production inside is executed accordingly. As a result, the contents of the effect in the open / close execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 are switched in accordance with the start of a new round game.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4307, that is, when a new opening turn of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing number regulation mode triggered by the small hit result, or when the big hit result is triggered. When a new opening turn of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the middle of the round game in the opening / closing execution mode of the round number specified mode, the additional opening command is not transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. Therefore, when a new opening turn of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing number specified mode triggered by the small hit result, or in the opening / closing execution mode of the round number specified mode triggered by the big hit result, the round game When a new opening turn of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the middle of the above, the contents of the effect in the opening / closing execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 are continued as they are without being switched. To. As a result, a new opening turn of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing number specified mode triggered by the small hit result, and in the opening / closing execution mode of the round number specified mode triggered by the big hit result. It is possible to make the start of a new opening round of the special electric winning device 32 in the middle of the round game inconspicuous to the player.

When a negative determination is made in step S4307, or when the process of step S4308 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is decremented by 1 (step S4309). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of opening executed in step S4104 of the special electric power start process (FIG. 62) or step S4303 of the special electric power closing process (FIG. 64).

When the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4401: NO), that is, when the round game is newly started in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, it is shown in steps S4402 to S4416. Execute the process for starting the round game. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode is triggered by the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S4402: YES), the setting process for 2R is executed (step S4403). In the setting process for 2R, "1" is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 64, and 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the opening continuation period corresponding to the small hit result, is selected as the opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32. .. The selected open continuation period is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 in step S4108 of the special electric start processing (FIG. 62) or step S4305 of the special electric closing process (FIG. 64), and the open continuation period is set. The measurement is started. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, the special electric winning device 32 will open once for 0.5 seconds, which is a short-term mode, in each of the two round games.

If the open / close execution mode is triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S4404: YES), "2" is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4405), and the opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 this time. 5 seconds is selected as (step S4406). This selected open continuation period is set in the special electric special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 in step S4108 of the special electric start processing (FIG. 62) or step S4305 of the special electric closing processing (FIG. 64), and the open continuation period is set. The measurement is started. Further, the round period counter of the main RAM 64 is set to 11 seconds, which is the upper limit period of the round game (step S4407). The update of the numerical information set in the round period counter is executed in the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) in the same manner as the update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter. ..

In the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (step S4404: NO), the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in one round game and the opening duration of each opening time are Number of target rounds Varies according to the number of target rounds stored in the area 205. Specifically, if the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value (step S4408: YES), "1" is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4409), and the special electric winning device 32 is opened this time. Select 11 seconds as the duration (step S4410). If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4411: YES), "3" is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4412), and the special electric winning device Select 3 seconds as the current opening duration of 32 (step S4413). If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4411: NO), "6" is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4414), and the opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 is 1 second. Is selected (step S4415). These selected open continuation periods are set in the special electric special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 in step S4108 of the special electric start processing (FIG. 62) or step S4305 of the special electric closing processing (FIG. 64), and the open continuation period is set. The measurement is started.

As described above, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, in each of the 10 round games, the opening of the special electric winning device 32 occurs the number of times corresponding to the number of target rounds, and each The open continuation period of the open times is also the period corresponding to the number of target rounds. In this case, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the larger the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in each round game, and the shorter the opening continuation period of each opening time. Furthermore, the total open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game becomes shorter as the value of the number of target rounds increases.

When the process of step S4403 is executed, the process of step S4407 is executed, the process of step S4410 is executed, the process of step S4413 is executed, or the process of step S4415 is executed, the main RAM 64 The upper limit number of "10" is set in the winning counter (step S4416). That is, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the open / close execution mode and the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205, the upper limit number in each round game is constant at 10.

When the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 is 1 or more (step S4401: YES), that is, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, the opening times of the second and subsequent special electric winning devices 32 in one round game are When started, the rear opening process shown in steps S4417 to S4421 is executed. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode is triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S4417: YES), 5 seconds is selected as the current opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4418). The selected open continuation period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 in step S4305 of the special electric closing process (FIG. 64), and the measurement of the open continuation period is started.

Here, when a round game is newly started in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, "2" is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 as described above, and the open continuation period is 5 Seconds are selected, and the round period counter is set to 11 seconds, which is the upper limit of the round game. Further, in the second and subsequent opening times of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game, 5 seconds is selected as the opening continuation period. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, in each of the five round games, the special electric winning device 32 opens for 5 seconds, which is longer than the short-term mode and shorter than the long-term mode. It will occur several times. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, the closing period between one opening time and the next opening time in the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is the target round number area 205. It will vary according to the number of target rounds stored in, but the round game will end when the upper limit of 11 seconds has passed, regardless of which period is selected as the closing period. It will be.

If the open / close execution mode is triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (step S4417: NO), the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is the first reference value as described above. In the above case, the special electric winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times in one round game. When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4419: YES), 3 seconds is selected as the current opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4420). ), When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4419: NO), 1 second is selected as the current opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4421). These selected open continuation periods are set in the special electric special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 in step S4305 of the special electric closed processing (FIG. 64), and the measurement of the open continuous period is started.

With the above configuration, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, if the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the special electric winning device 32 in each round game The opening time is once, and the opening duration is 11 seconds. In this case, in the present embodiment, the firing cycle of the game ball does not change according to the number of target rounds, and the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball is fired. The firing cycle of the game ball is constant at 0.6 seconds when the operation is continued. In addition, the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32, which is a condition for ending the round game, is 10. Then, when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the open continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of the game balls entering the special electric winning device 32. It is a value larger than the product of. Therefore, it can be expected that a maximum number of game balls or more will enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round game.

If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, the opening times of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game Is 3 times, and the opening duration is 3 seconds. In this case, the total open duration in one round game is 9 seconds, which is larger than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the maximum number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32. .. Therefore, in each round game, it is possible to insert more than the maximum number of game balls into the special electric winning device 32. However, since the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed three times in one round game, the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is the upper limit depending on the supply mode of the game balls to the special electric winning device 32. It is possible that the number will not be reached. For example, there is a possibility that the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 will be 9 at a rate of 1 out of 5 round games.

If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened 6 times in each round game. The duration is 1 second. In this case, the total period of the open continuation period in one round game is 6 seconds, which is the same as the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of the game ball entering the special electric winning device 32. Further, in one round game, the special electric winning device 32 having an opening duration of 1 second is opened and closed 6 times. Therefore, in each round game, there is a high possibility that the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit. For example, the expected number of game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is five.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a closing period selection process executed in step S4210 of the special electric power opening process (FIG. 63).

When the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 is 1 or more (step S4501: YES), that is, when there is a further open turn of the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result. Or, in the case of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the closing period setting process shown in steps S4502 to S4507 is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode this time is triggered by either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, or the small hit result (step S4502: NO), 1 second is selected as the closing period (step S4502: NO). Step S4504). This selected closing period is set in the special drawing special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 in step S4211 of the special electric opening processing (FIG. 63), and the measurement of the closing period is started. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, the special electric winning device 32 does not open multiple times in one round game.

In the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, as described above, the special electric winning device 32 in one round game according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205. The number of open times may vary, but the closing period between one open time and the next open time when the special electric winning device 32 is opened multiple times in one round game is the target number of rounds. Regardless, it is constant in 1 second. As a result, even if the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in one round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result and the 10R high accuracy jackpot result increases, the range of one round game It is possible to prevent the period in which the special electric winning device 32 is closed from becoming excessively long.

In the process of setting the closing period during the round game, when the opening / closing execution mode this time is triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S4502: YES), the opening times of 1 of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game The closing period between the next opening times varies depending on the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205. Specifically, if the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value (step S4503: YES), 1 second is selected as the current closing period of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4504), and the number of target rounds is the first. If it is equal to or more than the reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4505: YES), 4 seconds is selected as the current closing period of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4506), and the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value. If (step S4505: NO), 5 seconds is selected as the current closing period of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4507). These selected closing periods are set in the special drawing special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 in step S4211 of the special electric opening processing (FIG. 63), and the measurement of the closing period is started.

As described above, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened multiple times in each of the five round games. The closing period between the opening times of is longer as the value of the number of target rounds is larger.

When the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4501: NO), that is, when the interval period between a plurality of round games in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started, steps S4508 to The interval period setting process shown in step S4516 is executed. Specifically, when the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4508: YES), the base interval period is selected as the interval period of the current open / close execution mode (step S4508: YES). Step S4509). The base interval period is set to 2 seconds. The information of the base interval period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and when the base interval period is selected in step S4509, the selected base interval is selected in step S4211 in the special electric opening processing (FIG. 63). The period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of this interval period is started.

Number of target rounds When the number of target rounds stored in the area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4510: YES), first, information on the base interval period and the first from the main ROM 63. The information of the common extension period is read out (step S4511). The base interval period is set to 2 seconds as described above. The first common extension period is set to 1 second as described above. Then, the current interval period is calculated by adding the first common extension period to the base interval period (step S4512). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the current interval period is 2 seconds, which is the sum of the base interval period and the first common extension period. In step S4211 in the processing during opening of the special electric power (FIG. 63), the period of the sum of the base interval period and the first common extension period is set in the special electric power timer counter. As a result, the measurement of this interval period is started.

When the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4510: NO), first, the base interval period information and the first common extension period information are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4513). The base interval period is set to 1 second as described above, and the first common extension period is set to 1 second as described above. After that, the current interval period is calculated by doubling the first common extension period (step S4514) and adding the period resulting from the doubling to the base interval period (step S4515). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the current interval period is 3 seconds, which is the sum of the base interval period and twice the first common extension period. In step S4211 in the process of opening the special electric power (FIG. 63), the sum period of the base interval period and twice the first common extension period is set in the special electric power timer counter. As a result, the measurement of this opening period is started.

When the process of step S4509, the process of step S4512, or the process of step S4515 is executed, the closing command in which the information of the interval period selected this time is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S4516). Upon receiving the closing command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the current interval period and starts the measurement of the interval period, and displays the interval effect corresponding to the current interval period on the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Let it run. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the interval effect corresponding to the current interval period.

Here, when the opening round in the middle of the special electric winning device 32 is completed in the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing number specified mode triggered by the small hit result, or in the opening / closing execution mode of the round number specified mode triggered by the big hit result, the round When the opening round of the special electric winning device 32 is completed in the middle of the game, the closing command is not transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. Therefore, when the opening round in the middle of the special electric winning device 32 is completed in the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing number specified mode triggered by the small hit result, or in the opening / closing execution mode of the round number specified mode triggered by the big hit result, the round game When the opening round of the special electric winning device 32 is completed in the middle of the above, the contents of the effect in the opening / closing execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 are continued as they are without being switched. As a result, in the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode triggered by the small hit result, the opening times in the middle of the special electric winning device 32 are completed, and in the open / close execution mode of the round number specified mode triggered by the big hit result. It is possible to make the fact that the opening round of the special electric winning device 32 is completed in the middle of the round game inconspicuous to the player.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the interval period of the open / close execution mode. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour), the interval period of the open / close execution mode becomes long. Then, as the interval period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The interval period of the open / close execution mode becomes gradually longer as the value of the number of target rounds increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour), the interval period of the open / close execution mode becomes longer as the number of occurrences increases. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, elapses, the information on the total number of rounds of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is written by the write pointer 204 in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203. The number of target rounds is calculated by overwriting the indicated storage areas 203a to 203f and adding all the total number of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. Then, the interval period of the open / close execution mode is changed according to the calculated number of target rounds. This makes it possible to appropriately change the interval period of the open / close execution mode according to the change in the number of target rounds.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode this time is performed by adding the first common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base interval period. Is measured, and when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode this time is set by adding twice the first common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base interval period. It is measured. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the interval period of the open / close execution mode by using the information of the first common extension period.

The information on the first common extension period is also used when the final suspension period of the game round is extended as the number of target rounds increases. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the final stop period of the game round but also the interval period of the open / close execution mode by using the information of the first common extension period.

Next, how the execution mode of the round game changes according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b). FIG. 67 (a) shows how the execution mode of the round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result) changes according to the number of target rounds, and FIG. 67 (b) shows. Shows how the execution mode of the round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result changes according to the number of target rounds. 67 (a1) and 67 (b1) show the execution period of the round game, and FIGS. 67 (a2) and 67 (b2) show the special electric winning device 32 when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value. The opening / closing mode is shown, and FIGS. 67 (a3) and 67 (b3) show the opening / closing mode of the special electric winning device 32 when the number of target rounds is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. (A4) and 67 (b4) show an opening / closing mode of the special electric winning device 32 when the number of target rounds is equal to or more than the second reference value.

First, a round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a). A case where the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit in the middle of the round game will be described.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the round game is executed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. The execution period of the round game is constant at 11 seconds regardless of the value of the number of target rounds stored in the target number of rounds area 205. When the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the special electric winning device 32 is opened from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 67 (a2).

That is, when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the period during which the round game is executed coincides with the period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state. In the present embodiment, the launch cycle of the game ball does not change according to the number of target rounds, and the game ball launch operation is continued in a situation where the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27. The firing cycle of the game ball is constant at 0.6 seconds. In addition, the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32, which is a condition for ending the round game, is 10. Then, when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the open continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of the game balls entering the special electric winning device 32. It is a value larger than the product of. Therefore, it can be expected that a maximum number of game balls or more will enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round game.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the special electric winning device 32 is opened for the first time from the timing of t1 to the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 67 (a3). After the first closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the second opening time of the special electric winning device 32 from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 occurs. Is generated, and after the second closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, the third opening time of the special electric winning device 32 is performed from the timing of t6 to the timing of t2. Occur. Then, the round game ends when the third opening round is completed.

That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the special electric winning device 32 is opened three times in one round game, and the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Occurs twice. The opening duration of each opening time is constant at 3 seconds, and each closing period is constant at 1 second. In this case, the total opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is 9 seconds, which is the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the maximum number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32. Is also a large value. Therefore, in each round game, it is possible to insert more than the maximum number of game balls into the special electric winning device 32. However, since the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed three times in one round game, the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is the upper limit depending on the supply mode of the game balls to the special electric winning device 32. It is possible that the number will not be reached. For example, there is a possibility that the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 will be 9 at a rate of 1 out of 5 round games. As a result, the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is smaller than when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the first opening round of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t1 to the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 67 (a4), and the timing of t7. After the first closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t8, the second opening time of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, and the timing of t9 ~ After the second closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t10, the third opening time of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, and the timing of t11 to t12. After the third closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the timing of, the fourth opening time of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, and the timing of t13 to t14. After the fourth closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the timing, the fifth opening time of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t15 to t16. After the fifth closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs, the sixth opening period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t16 to the timing of t2. Then, the round game ends when the sixth opening round is completed.

That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the special electric winning device 32 is opened 6 times and the special electric winning device 32 is closed 5 times in one round game. The opening duration of each opening time is constant at 1 second, and each closing period is constant at 1 second. In this case, the total period of the open continuation period in one round game is 6 seconds, which is the same as the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of the game ball entering the special electric winning device 32. Further, in one round game, the special electric winning device 32 having an opening duration of 1 second is opened and closed 6 times. Therefore, in each round game, there is a high possibility that the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit. For example, the expected number of game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is five. As a result, the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is smaller than when the number of target rounds is less than the second reference value.

From the above, if the value of the number of target rounds becomes a large value due to the repeated occurrence of the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode during the measurement target period (1 hour), the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy The expected number of balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result will decrease. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The expected number of balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result gradually decreases as the value of the number of target rounds increases. Therefore, it is possible to give a regulation according to the profit amount given to the player regarding the expected number of balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. Will be.

Next, a round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (b). A case where the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit during the round game will be described.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b1), the round game is executed from the timing of t21 to the timing of t22. The execution period of the round game is constant at 11 seconds regardless of the value of the number of target rounds stored in the target number of rounds area 205. When the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, as shown in FIG. 67 (b2), the first opening round of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t21 to the timing of t23, and the timing of t23. After the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t24 to the timing of t24, the second opening time of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t24 to the timing of t22. Then, the round game ends when the second opening round is completed.

In this case, the opening duration of each opening time is 5 seconds, and the closing period is 1 second. The total open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is 10 seconds, which is larger than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the maximum number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32. Will be. Therefore, in each round game, it is possible to insert more than the maximum number of game balls into the special electric winning device 32. However, since the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed twice in one round game, depending on the supply mode of the game ball to the special electric winning device 32, the special electric winning device 32 is entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game. There is a possibility that the number does not reach the upper limit. For example, there is a possibility that the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 will be 9 at a rate of 1 out of 20 round games.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the special electric winning device 32 is opened for the first time from the timing of t21 to the timing of t23 as shown in FIG. 67 (b3). After the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t23 to the timing of t25, the second opening round of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t25 to the timing of t22. .. The second opening round ends when the upper limit period of the round game elapses at the timing of t22, which is the timing before the opening continuation period elapses, and the end condition of the round game is satisfied.

In this case, the first opening duration is 5 seconds, the closing period is 4 seconds, and the second substantial opening duration is 2 seconds. The total open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is 7 seconds, which is larger than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the maximum number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32. Will be. Therefore, in each round game, it is possible to insert more than the maximum number of game balls into the special electric winning device 32. However, in one round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed twice, and the second substantial opening duration is 2 seconds. Therefore, depending on the mode of supplying the game balls to the special electric winning device 32, the number of gaming balls entering the special electric winning device 32 may not reach the upper limit in the round game. For example, there is a possibility that the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 will be 9 at a rate of 1 out of 3 round games. As a result, the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is smaller than when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the first opening round of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t21 to the timing of t23 as shown in FIG. 67 (b4), and the timing of t23. After the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t26 to the timing of t26, the second opening time of the special electric winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t26 to the timing of t22. The second opening round ends when the upper limit period of the round game elapses at the timing of t22, which is the timing before the opening continuation period elapses, and the end condition of the round game is satisfied.

In this case, the first opening duration is 5 seconds, the closing period is 5 seconds, and the second substantial opening duration is 1 second. The total opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is 6 seconds, which is the same as the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the maximum number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32. .. Further, in the second opening time, the opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 is 1 second. Therefore, in each round game, there is a high possibility that the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit. For example, the expected number of game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is eight. As a result, the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is smaller than when the number of target rounds is less than the second reference value.

From the above, when the value of the number of target rounds becomes a large value due to the repeated occurrence of the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode during the measurement target period (1 hour), the 5R high accuracy jackpot result was used as an opportunity. The expected number of balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The expected number of balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result gradually decreases as the value of the number of target rounds increases. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the expected number of balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result according to the amount of profit given to the player.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an ending period selection process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. The process of selecting the ending period is executed in step S4213 in the process of opening the special electric power (FIG. 63).

When the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4601: YES), the base ending period is selected as the ending period of the current open / close execution mode (step S4602). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds. The information of the base ending period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and when the base ending period is selected in step S4602, the selected base ending is selected in step S4214 in the special electric opening processing (FIG. 63). The period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started. Further, in step S4215 in the special electric opening processing (FIG. 63), an ending command in which information indicating that the base ending period is the current ending period is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. By receiving the ending command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

Number of target rounds When the number of target rounds stored in the area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4603: YES), first, information on the base ending period and the second from the main ROM 63. The information of the common extension period is read out (step S4604). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the current ending period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base ending period (step S4605). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the ending period of this time is 11 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the process during opening of the special electric power (FIG. 63), the period of the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period is set in the special electric power timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the ending period of this time is started. Further, in step S4215 in the processing during opening of the special electric power (FIG. 63), the ending command in which the information indicating that the sum period of the base ending period and the second common extension period is the current ending period is set is the sound light side MPU82. Will be sent to. By receiving the ending command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

When the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4603: NO), first, the information on the base ending period and the information on the second common extension period are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4606). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as described above, and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as described above. After that, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4607), and the period resulting from the doubling is added to the base ending period to calculate the current ending period (step S4608). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of this time is 16 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the process during opening of the special electric power (FIG. 63), the sum period of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special electric power timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the ending period of this time is started. Further, in step S4215 in the processing during opening of the special electric power (FIG. 63), an ending command in which information indicating that the sum period of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is the current ending period is set is sounded. It is transmitted to the optical side MPU 82. By receiving the ending command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the ending period of the open / close execution mode. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour), the ending period of the open / close execution mode becomes long. Then, as the ending period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The ending period of the open / close execution mode becomes longer in stages as the value of the number of target rounds increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour), the ending period of the open / close execution mode becomes longer as the number of occurrences increases. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, elapses, the information on the total number of rounds of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is written by the write pointer 204 in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203. The number of target rounds is calculated by overwriting the indicated storage areas 203a to 203f and adding all the total number of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. Then, the ending period of the open / close execution mode is changed according to the calculated number of target rounds. This makes it possible to appropriately change the ending period of the open / close execution mode according to the change in the number of target rounds.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode of this time is performed by adding the second common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base ending period. Is measured, and when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode this time is set by adding twice the second common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base ending period. It is measured. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode by using the information of the first second common extension period.

The information on the second common extension period is also used when the opening period of the open / close execution mode is extended as the number of target rounds increases. As a result, it is possible to increase not only the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode but also the extension degree of the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode by using the information of the first second common extension period.

According to the tenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, and the interval period, which can affect the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time. And the ending period varies according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player. In particular, the contents of a plurality of events such as the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the open / close execution mode, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period depend on the number of target rounds. Since it is fluctuated, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of fluctuation when the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time is fluctuated according to the number of target rounds.

The information on the first common extension period is used when each of the final stop period of the game round and the interval period of the open / close execution mode is extended according to the increase in the number of target rounds. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the final stop period of the game round but also the interval period of the open / close execution mode by using the information of the first common extension period.

The information on the second common extension period is used when each of the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode is extended according to the increase in the number of target rounds. As a result, it is possible to increase not only the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode but also the extension degree of the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode by using the information of the first second common extension period.

The opening period, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period included in the opening / closing execution mode are changed according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205. As a result, the period required to digest the open / close execution mode varies depending on the number of target rounds. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Number of target rounds Depending on the number of target rounds stored in the area 205, the opening period, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period, which are the periods during which the special electric winning device 32 does not win in the open / close execution mode, are set. fluctuate. Then, as the period during which the special electric winning device 32 is not awarded changes in this way, the period required until the period during which the special electric winning device 32 can be awarded changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

The result is that the closed period in which the special electric winning device 32 is closed in the round game is changed according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 without changing the upper limit period in the round game. Therefore, the period during which the special electric winning device 32 is open in the round game is varied. This makes it possible to make the expected number of balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game appropriate according to the number of target rounds.

In the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, in the configuration in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed multiple times in each round game, the special electric power sandwiched between the multiple opening times in the special electric winning device 32 in the round game. The closing period of the winning device 32 varies according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205. Then, the change in the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, and as a result, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32 that occurs after the closing period changes. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result appropriate according to the number of target rounds.

In the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the upper limit period in each round game is not changed, and the special electric winning device 32 sandwiches the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 in the round game. The number of times that is open varies according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205. As a result, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 in the round game changes according to the number of target rounds. Further, in the configuration, the length of one opening turn of the special electric winning device 32 generated in the round game also varies. Then, as the length of one opening of the special electric winning device 32 fluctuates, the ease of entering the game ball into the special electric winning device 32 also fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game appropriate according to the number of target rounds.

Every time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, elapses, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is written by the write pointer 204 in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. The number of target rounds is calculated by overwriting the indicated storage areas 203a to 203f and adding all the total number of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. Then, the calculated information on the number of target rounds is overwritten in the target round number area 205. As a result, every time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, elapses, the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode executed in the immediately preceding measurement target period (1 hour) is measured and measured. Information on the number of target rounds as a result is stored in the target round number area 205. That is, the number of target rounds in the next measurement target period can be set to the number of target rounds in a range shifted by the calculation trigger period with respect to the number of target rounds in one measurement target period. Therefore, it is possible to manage the number of target rounds in detail.

Based on the elapse of the calculation trigger period shorter than the measurement target period, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. The storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 are overwritten. As a result, the number of target rounds in the next measurement target period can be set to the number of target rounds in a range shifted by the calculation trigger period with respect to the number of target rounds in one measurement target period.

Each time the calculation trigger period elapses, the value of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is overwritten on the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. After the overwriting is completed, the number of target rounds in the measurement target period is calculated based on the information on the number of times the round game is executed stored in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. As a result, the number of target rounds in the next measurement target period can be set to the number of target rounds in a range shifted by the calculation trigger period with respect to the number of target rounds in one measurement target period.

The number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode ends is added to the measurement round number counter 201 of the main RAM 64, but the configuration is limited to this. However, when the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode may be added to the measurement round number counter 201. Further, instead of the configuration, when the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode ends, the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is added to the measurement round number counter 201. It may be configured to be. In addition, the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode is measured during the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the game round is started. It may be configured to be added to the round number counter 201. Further, when the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is added to the measurement round number counter 201. good. Further, the value of the measurement round number counter 201 is incremented by 1 each time one round game is started or each time the execution of one round game is completed in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. good. As a result, when the round game is executed or when the round game is executed, it can be immediately reflected in the value of the measurement round number counter 201.

Further, the round game to be added to the measurement round number counter 201 is not limited to the round game in the open / close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, and depends on the opening / closing execution mode in the low frequency winning mode and the high frequency winning mode. Any round game executed in any of the open / close execution modes may be configured to be added to the measurement round number counter 201.

Further, all of the round games in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode are not limited to the configuration to be added to the measurement round number counter 201, and the opening / closing execution is performed by the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode. The round game of the mode may be configured to be added to the measurement round number counter 201, while the other round games may not be added to the measurement round number counter 201. Further, the round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is subject to addition to the measurement round number counter 201, while other round games are not subject to addition to the measurement round number counter 201. It may be configured.

Further, as the open continuation period of the round game, not only the long-term mode and the short-term mode but also the medium-term mode which is a period between these may exist. In this case, of the short-term mode round game, the medium-term mode round game, and the long-term mode round game, only the number of long-term round games is added to the measurement round number counter 201. The round game, which is a long-term mode, may be configured such that the number of round games, which is a long-term mode, and the number of round games, which is a medium-term mode, are to be added to the measurement round number counter 201. The round game in the medium-term mode and the round game in the short-term mode may be added to the measurement round number counter 201.

In addition, it is an opportunity to change the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode. The parameter is not limited to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205, and may be the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c as in the first embodiment. It may be the target ball output rate as in the embodiment, or it may be the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 as in the third embodiment.

Further, the measurement of the calculation trigger period using the period measurement counter 202 is configured to be started when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 62 is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of them is used. It may be configured to be started when a type of open / close execution mode occurs, or it may be configured to be started when an open / close execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurs. It is a high-frequency winning mode and has the maximum number of rounds. It may be configured to be started when the open / close execution mode of is started, or it may be configured to be started when the high frequency winning mode is started.

Further, every time the calculation trigger period elapses, the information of the total number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is stored in the storage area 203a indicated by the write pointer 204 in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. The total number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 each time the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs or is completed, without being limited to the configuration overwritten by ~ 203f. The information may be overwritten on the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. In this case, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since the overwriting was performed, the overwritten storage area may be cleared to "0".

Further, the upper limit period of the round game in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode is not limited to 11 seconds, and the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 or the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 is determined according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205. It is arbitrary as long as the expected number of balls to be entered in the special electric winning device 32 in the round game changes as the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened changes. For example, the upper limit period of the round game may be less than 11 seconds such as 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds and 10 seconds, and may be longer than 11 seconds such as 12 seconds, 13 seconds and 14 seconds. good. However, if the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, in the round game in the open / close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, more than the maximum number of game balls in the round game can enter the special electric winning device 32. Therefore, it is preferable that the upper limit period of the round game is a period equal to or larger than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of round games.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode of determining the opening period and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode is different from the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the tenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a selection process of the opening period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4701: YES), the base opening period is selected as the opening period of the current open / close execution mode (step S4702). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds. Information on the base opening period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and when the base opening period is selected in step S4002, the selected base is selected in step S804 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16). The opening period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started. Further, in step S805 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), an opening command in which information indicating that the base opening period is the current opening period is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of the current light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

Number of target rounds When the number of target rounds stored in the area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the third reference value (step S4703: YES), first, information on the base opening period and the second from the main ROM 63. The information of the common extension period is read out (step S4704). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds. Then, the current opening period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base opening period (step S4705). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the third reference value, the opening period of this time is 9 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period. In step S804 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), the sum period of the base opening period and the second common extension period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of this opening period is started. Further, in step S805 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), the opening command in which the information indicating that the sum period of the base opening period and the second common extension period is the current opening period is set is on the sound side. It is transmitted to MPU82. By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of the current light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

Here, the third reference value is the same as in the first embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs five times, which is the third plurality of times. When the value is larger than the value of the total number of round games to be executed and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs 6 times, which is the fourth multiple times. It is the value of the total number of round games executed. Specifically, it is set to "60". As a result, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is generated in the measurement target period (1 hour), and the opening / closing is triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. Even if the execution mode occurs four times, the number of target rounds does not reach the third reference value. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is further generated in the measurement target period (1 hour), the number of target rounds reaches the third reference value. The third reference value is not limited to "60", and may be less than 60 or larger than "60" as long as it is larger than the second reference value. ..

Number of target rounds When the number of target rounds stored in the area 205 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S4703: NO), first, the information on the base opening period and the information on the second common extension period are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4706). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as described above, and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as described above. After that, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4707), and the period resulting from the doubling is added to the base opening period to calculate the current opening period (step S4708). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the opening period of this time is 14 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period. In step S804 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), the sum period of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of this opening period is started. Further, in step S805 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), an opening command in which information indicating that the sum period of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period is the current opening period is set is set. It is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of the current light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an ending period selection process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the second reference value (step S4801: YES), the base ending period is selected as the ending period of the current open / close execution mode (step S4802). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds. The information of the base ending period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and when the base ending period is selected in step S4602, the selected base ending is selected in step S4214 in the special electric opening processing (FIG. 63). The period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started. Further, in step S4215 in the special electric opening processing (FIG. 63), an ending command in which information indicating that the base ending period is the current ending period is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. By receiving the ending command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

Number of target rounds When the number of target rounds stored in the area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S4803: YES), first, information on the base ending period and the second from the main ROM 63. The information of the common extension period is read out (step S4804). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the current ending period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base ending period (step S4805). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the ending period of this time is 11 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the process during opening of the special electric power (FIG. 63), the period of the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period is set in the special electric power timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the ending period of this time is started. Further, in step S4215 in the processing during opening of the special electric power (FIG. 63), the ending command in which the information indicating that the sum period of the base ending period and the second common extension period is the current ending period is set is the sound light side MPU82. Will be sent to. By receiving the ending command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

When the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S4803: NO), first, the information on the base ending period and the information on the second common extension period are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4806). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as described above, and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as described above. After that, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4807), and the period resulting from the doubling is added to the base ending period to calculate the current ending period (step S4808). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of this time is 16 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the process during opening of the special electric power (FIG. 63), the sum period of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special electric power timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the ending period of this time is started. Further, in step S4215 in the processing during opening of the special electric power (FIG. 63), an ending command in which information indicating that the sum period of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is the current ending period is set is sounded. It is transmitted to the optical side MPU 82. By receiving the ending command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

According to the above configuration, when the number of target rounds exceeds the first reference value, the ending period is maintained while the opening period is longer among the opening period and ending period of the open / close execution mode, and the number of target rounds is increased. If the value exceeds the 2nd standard value, the ending period will be longer than the opening period and the ending period, but the opening period will be maintained. If the number of target rounds exceeds the 3rd standard value, the opening period will be maintained. And both the ending period will be longer. As a result, until the number of target rounds exceeds the third reference value, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time, and the number of target rounds is increased. When the value exceeds the third reference value, it is possible to sharply increase the function of suppressing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

If the number exceeds the first reference value, the ending period will be longer, but the opening period will be maintained, and if the number of target rounds exceeds the second reference value, the opening period will be longer. On the other hand, when the ending period is maintained and the number of target rounds exceeds the third reference value, both the opening period and the ending period may be lengthened.

Further, the parameter that triggers the change of the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205, and is not limited to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205. It may be the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c as in the above, the target ball ejection rate as in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 as in the third embodiment. May be.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the modification mode of the game rotation effect when the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, standby areas SA1 to SA9 are set so that three symbols are displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result, 3 × A total of 9 symbols of 3 are displayed at the same time. By the way, each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, and when the symbol is finally displayed as a stop, the symbol waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 is stopped at each stop position. Is displayed.

On the display surface 41a, five effective lines, that is, left line L1 and middle line L2, are connected so as to connect one standby area SA1 to SA9 (a total of three standby areas SA1 to SA9) in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. , Right line L3, right down line L4, right up line L5 are set. Then, the scroll display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 and switched to the standby display, and the final stop command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 as the fluctuation continuation period elapses. It is switched to the static display for all the symbols for which the standby display is performed. This static display continues over the final stop period of the game round. In this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round is constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64.

In the game round in which the game round effect is executed while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are maintained, the scroll display of the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started in the high-speed fluctuation display which is a low discrimination mode, and then the scroll display is started. Each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display which is a high discrimination mode in a predetermined order, and the standby display of symbols is started in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. Will be done. Then, after the symbols are oscillatedly displayed in the state where the waiting display of the symbols is performed in the standby areas ST1 to ST9 of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are still displayed as the final stop display ( That is, it is confirmed and displayed), and the stationary display state is continued for the final stop period of the game round.

By the way, the swing display, which is a kind of standby display, means that the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 swing in the same standby areas SA1 to SA9, and each symbol is in the corresponding standby mode. It swings in the range including the stop position in the regions SA1 to SA9, and each symbol swings in the range including the corresponding stop position in between.

On the other hand, in the game times in which the reach display is executed in a state where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not maintained, the scroll display of the symbols is started, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row which are some of the symbol rows are started. After the symbol of Z3 is displayed on standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA3 and SA7 to SA9 to form a reach line, an image for super reach is displayed. After that, in a state where a combination of jackpot symbols or a combination of out-reach symbols is formed, the symbols displayed in standby in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are oscillated over the oscillating display period. Will be done. Then, those symbols are statically displayed, and the static display state is continued for the final stop period.

In the lower part of the display surface 41a, the first reserved display area Ga for notifying the number of reserved information on the first special drawing side and the reserved information on the second special drawing side are reserved and stored. A second hold display area Gb for notifying the number of items is set. The first reserved display area Ga and the second reserved display area Gb are set so as not to overlap with the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the display surface 41a, but the present invention is not limited to this and is a part of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. It may be set to overlap with.

FIG. 72 is a time chart showing how the display mode of the symbols changes when the game rotation effect is executed while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are maintained. 72 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, FIG. 72 (b) shows the state of the variation display of the symbol in the upper symbol sequence Z1, and FIG. 72 (c) shows the variation display of the symbol in the middle symbol sequence Z2. FIG. 72 (d) shows the state of the fluctuation display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3, FIG. 72 (e) shows the swing display period in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 72 (f) shows the situation. Indicates the static display period.

By starting the game rotation as shown in FIG. 72 (a) at the timing of t1, all the symbols are arranged on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) to 72 (d). The scroll display of the symbol is started in Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols are displayed in high-speed fluctuations in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72B at the timing of t2, the scroll display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and at the timing of t3, each standby area SA1 to the upper symbol row Z1. The standby display of the symbol is started in SA3. In this case, the swing display is started for the symbols whose standby display is performed in the standby areas SA1 to SA3 of the above symbol row Z1. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of t3, the scroll display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and at the timing of t4, each standby area SA7 to the lower symbol row Z3. The standby display of the symbol is started at SA9. In this case, the swing display is started in the symbols in which the standby display is performed in the standby areas SA7 to SA9 of the lower symbol row Z3. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (c) at the timing of t4, the scroll display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and at the timing of t5, each standby area SA4 to the middle symbol row Z2. The standby display of the symbol is started at SA6. In this case, the swing display is started for the symbols for which the standby display is performed in the standby areas SA4 to SA6 of the middle symbol row Z2.

Here, at the timing of t5, the waiting display is performed in the waiting areas SA1 to SA3 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the waiting display is performed in the waiting areas SA7 to SA9 of the lower symbol row Z3. The swing display has already started in the design. That is, as shown in FIG. 72 (e), the timing of t5 corresponds to the standby timing at which the swing display of the symbols is started in the standby regions SA1 to SA9 of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, at the timing of t6, the final stop command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound light side MPU 82, and based on this, the sound light side MPU 82 transmits the corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, whereby FIG. 72 (f). ), The display mode of the symbol that was oscillatedly displayed in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 is switched to the static display. After that, when the final display period (for example, 0.5 sec) of the game round elapses at the timing of t7, the current game round production ends.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. The period adjustment process is executed in step S616 of the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14).

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable continuation period of the game times this time (step S4901: YES), the process for extending the variable continuation period of the game times shown in steps S4902 and subsequent steps is not executed. Similar to the first embodiment, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value and a game round that results in a big hit occurs, the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. In step S604 in 14), the longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, the process for extending the variable duration of the game times shown in step S4902 and subsequent steps is not executed, so that the long period of the variable duration of the game times is long. It is possible to prevent the conversion from being executed cumulatively for the fluctuation duration of one game.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S4901: NO), and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. (Step S4902: YES), the first extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S4903). Specifically, 1 second is added as the first extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). In the present embodiment, even if the first extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed, the command corresponding to the sound light side MPU 82 is not transmitted. The first reference value is "10" as in the first embodiment, and the second reference value is "30" as in the first embodiment.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S4901: NO), and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value. (Step S4904: YES), the second extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S4905). Specifically, 2 seconds is added as the second extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). In this embodiment, even if the second extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed, the command corresponding to it is not transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. Further, the third reference value is "60" as in the first embodiment.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S4901: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S4906: YES), the fluctuation The third extension process of the continuation period is executed (step S4907). Specifically, 3 seconds is added as the third extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). In the present embodiment, even if the third extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed, the command corresponding to the sound light side MPU 82 is not transmitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a process of determining an effect pattern in the present embodiment executed by the sound / light side MPU 82. The effect pattern determination process is executed in step S1403 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22).

First, the information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is grasped from the fluctuation command received this time (step S5001). In this case, the information on the fluctuation duration of the game times grasped is set in the period measurement counter provided in the sound / light side RAM 84. The value set in the period measurement counter is subtracted each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) in the sound light side MPU 82 is activated. This makes it possible for the sound light side MPU 82 to grasp the remaining period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. As in the first embodiment, the change command is set with information on the change duration of the game times acquired in step S614 in the change duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), and the period is adjusted. Even if any of the extension processes (step S4903, step S4905, step S4907) is executed in the process (FIG. 73), the information of the period extended by the extension process is not reflected.

After that, the lottery process for the advance notice effect is executed (step S5002). The content of the lottery process of the advance notice effect is the same as that of step S1702 of the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment. After that, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S5003). The content of the stop symbol determination process is the same as that of step S1703 of the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

After that, the information on the fluctuation duration of the game times set in the change command received this time, the contents of the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result in this game time, and the effect pattern corresponding to the presence / absence of the advance notice effect. Is selected, and the data table for the game round effect corresponding to the effect pattern is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S5004). The information of the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S5003) is not reflected in the effect pattern.

In step S1404 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22), as in the first embodiment, the pattern command corresponding to the data table for game rotation effect read into the sound light side RAM 84 in step S5004. And the stop result command corresponding to the information of the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S5003) is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving these commands, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to these commands from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display of the current game times corresponding to the stop symbol determined by the above-mentioned effect pattern and the stop symbol determination process is executed by the symbol display device 41. To.

Here, in the effect pattern determination process in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S1705 to S1707 executed in the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment are not executed. That is, even if the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main MPU 62, the extension command corresponding to the extension is not transmitted from the main MPU 62. The processes of steps S1705 to S1707 executed in the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 25) in the form are not executed. Instead, in the present embodiment, the game is played on the main MPU 62 by extending the execution period of the waiting display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 until the final stop command is transmitted from the main MPU 62. It is configured to deal with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the times. The configuration will be described below.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table for playing a game.

In the data table for game time production, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the target game time is set, and information on the content of the task is set corresponding to each pointer information. ing. The information on the content of the task is information set for performing the effect corresponding to the game times this time, and the display light emitting unit 53 so as to execute the effect according to the information on the content of the task in each frame. Light emission control and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed.

In the data table for game rotation effect shown in FIG. 75, the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "0", and the pointer information of "160" is the low speed in the fluctuation display of the symbol in the upper symbol sequence Z1. The data at the start of the variable display is set, the data at the stop of the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol column Z1 is set in the pointer information of "200", and the lower is set in the pointer information of "300". The data at the time of stopping the fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol column Z3 is set, the data at the start of the advance notice effect is set in the pointer information of "400", and the super reach starts in the pointer information of "700". The time data is set, and the pointer information of "1400" is set to the data at the start of all swings, which is the data of the timing at which the swing display is started as the standby display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In the pointer information of "1450", the data at the end of the fluctuation, which is the data of the timing at which the swing display ends in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, is set.

In such a data table for game rotation effect, the pointer information of "1400" to the pointer information of "1450" is a period during which the swing display is performed as a standby display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In this case, if any of the first to third extension processes (step S4903, step S4905, step S4907) of the variable continuation period is executed in the main MPU 62, the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). The timing at which the final stop command is transmitted is later than the timing at which the fluctuation continuation period of the game times acquired in step S614 has elapsed.

On the other hand, the sound and light side MPU 82 has the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped based on the change command, that is, the game times acquired by the main MPU 62 in step S614 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14). If the final stop command is not received from the main MPU 62 even though the fluctuation continuation period of is passed, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended by a predetermined extension period (specifically, 1 second), and at the same time, Until the predetermined extension period elapses, the data of the execution period of the swing display in the data table for the game rotation effect (data in the range of the pointer information of "1400" to the pointer information of "1450" in FIG. 75) is repeated. refer. Then, if the final stop command has not yet been received from the main MPU 62 even though the predetermined extension period has elapsed, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is changed again by the predetermined extension period (specifically, 1 second). In addition to the extension, the data of the execution period of the swing display in the data table for the game rotation effect until the predetermined extension period elapses (in the case of FIG. 75, the range of the pointer information of "1400" to the pointer information of "1450" Data) is referred to repeatedly. Then, the state in which the data of the execution period of the swing display is repeatedly referred to in this way ends when the final stop command is received from the main MPU 62. When the final stop command is received, the data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game round is read, and the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. The effect corresponding to the final stop period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. When the sound / light side MPU 82 receives the final stop command, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits the corresponding command to the display side MPU 92.

Here, as described above, after the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is executed in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22) of the sound / light side MPU 82, the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is performed. The pattern command corresponding to the read data table for the game rotation effect and the stop result command corresponding to the information of the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S5003) are transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

When the display side MPU 92 receives the pattern command and the stop result command, first, the display corresponding to the combination of the information corresponding to the data table for the game round effect set in the pattern command and the information corresponding to the stop result command. The data table is read from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94. The data structure of the display data table is basically the same as that of the game round production data table, and specifically, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the target game round is set. The information of the task contents is set corresponding to each pointer information. The information of the task contents in the display data table is the information set for displaying the moving image corresponding to the current game times, and the image display according to the task contents information is executed in each frame. This is information for controlling the display of the symbol display device 41.

In this case, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits an extension command to the display side MPU 92 every time the fluctuation duration of the game round is extended by a predetermined extension period (specifically, 1 second). When the display-side MPU 92 receives the extension command, it repeatedly refers to the data of the swing display execution period in the current display data table until the predetermined extension period elapses. Then, the state in which the data of the execution period of the swing display is repeatedly referred to in this way ends when the command corresponding to the final stop command is received from the sound light side MPU 82. When the command is received, the display data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game round is read out, and the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed according to the display data table, so that the entire symbol string Z1 The static display of the symbol in Z3 is executed by the symbol display device 41.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an extension setting process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 in order to extend the execution period of the standby display as described above. The extension setting process is executed in another process (step S1415) in the main command corresponding process (FIG. 22).

First, by determining whether or not the value of the period measurement counter of the sound light side RAM 84 is "0", it was set to the variable command transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of this game round. If the fluctuation continuation period of the game times or the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended by the predetermined extension period in the sound light side MPU 82 after that, it is determined whether or not the predetermined extension period has elapsed (step S5101). .. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the variable continuation period extension process is executed (step S5102). In the extension process, information corresponding to a predetermined extension period (specifically, 1 second) is set in the period continuation counter of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S5102). Further, the correction process of the data table is executed (step S5103). In the correction process, the data of the execution period of the swing display in the data table for the game rotation effect read out to the sound / light side RAM 84 (in the case of FIG. 75, the pointer information of “1400” to the pointer information of “1450”. The data in the range of) is referred to repeatedly. The state in which the data of the execution period of the swing display is repeatedly referred to ends when the command corresponding to the final stop command is received from the main MPU 62. When the final stop command is received, the data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game round is read, and the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. The effect corresponding to the final stop period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54.

After that, the extension command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 (step S5104). When the display-side MPU 92 receives the extension command, it repeatedly refers to the data of the swing display execution period in the current display data table until the predetermined extension period elapses. The state in which the data of the execution period of the swing display is repeatedly referred to ends when the command corresponding to the final stop command is received from the sound light side MPU 82. When the command is received, the display data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game round is read out, and the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed according to the display data table, whereby the entire symbol string Z1 is executed. Still display of the symbol in Z3 is executed by the symbol display device 41.

Next, a state in which the execution period of the waiting display of the symbol is extended when the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 77. 77 (a) shows the case where the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur, and FIG. 77 (b) shows the case where the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times occurs, FIGS. 77 (a1) and 77. (B1) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIGS. 77 (a2) and 77 (b2) show the period during which the scroll display of the symbols is executed in at least one symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 77 (a3). ) And FIG. 77 (b3) show the period during which the standby display is executed in all the symbols, and FIGS. 77 (a4) and 77 (b4) show the period during which the static display is executed in all the symbols. ..

First, a case where the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a).

At the timing of t1, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 77 (a1). At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 77 (a2), the scroll display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started. After that, the scroll display of the symbols is terminated and the standby display is started in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at the timing of t2, all the symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (a3). The standby display is being executed. After that, at the timing of t3, the variation continuation period of the game times set in the variation command transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the game times elapses, and the final stop command is transmitted from the main MPU 62. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 77 (a3) and 77 (a4), the standby display is executed for all the symbols, and the static display is executed for all the symbols. The period during which the static display is executed for all the symbols is constant at 0.5 seconds, which is the final stop period of the game, regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Then, when the final stop period of the game round elapses at the timing of t4, the static display in all the symbols is terminated as shown in FIG. 77 (a4), and the current game round is completed as shown in FIG. 77 (a1). do.

Next, a case where the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b).

At the timing of t1, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 77 (b1). At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 77 (b2), the scroll display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started. After that, the scroll display of the symbols is terminated and the standby display is started in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at the timing of t2, all the symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (b3). The standby display is being executed.

After that, at the timing of t3, the variation continuation period of the game times set in the variation command transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the game times elapses, but the variation continuation period of the game times in the main MPU 62 elapses. Since it is extended, the final stop command is not sent from the main MPU 62. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended by a predetermined extension period in the sound light side MPU 82. Further, the data of the execution period of the swing display in the data table for the game rotation effect read out to the sound / light side RAM 84 (in the case of FIG. 75, the range of the pointer information of "1400" to the pointer information of "1450". The data) is set to be repeatedly referred to, and the data of the swing display execution period in the display data table read out to the display side RAM 94 is repeatedly referred to. The settings are made.

After that, the final stop command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the timing of t13. Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIGS. 77 (b3) and 77 (b4), the standby display is executed for all the symbols, and the static display is executed for all the symbols. The period during which the static display is executed for all the symbols is constant at 0.5 seconds, which is the final stop period of the game, regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Then, when the final stop period of the game round elapses at the timing of t14, the static display in all the symbols is terminated as shown in FIG. 77 (b4), and the current game round is completed as shown in FIG. 77 (b1). do.

As described above, when the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended, the period during which the swing display is executed for all the symbols whose standby display is performed in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of the symbol display device 41 is It will be extended. As a result, it is not necessary to store in advance the data table for the game rotation effect and the data table for display corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the ROMs 83 and 93. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity required for the ROMs 83 and 93.

When the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is extended, the execution period of the waiting display, which is the stage before the static display is executed in all the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, is extended. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 for extending the execution period during the scroll display and the reach display of the symbol, as compared with the configuration for extending the execution period. ..

The standby display after the symbols are displayed on standby in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 in the game rotation effect of the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the swing display, for example, the symbols are vibrated and displayed. It may be configured such that the symbol is displayed in a blinking manner, or the symbol may be displayed in a scaled manner. Further, when the symbol is displayed in 3D or the like, the symbol may be displayed back and forth. Further, the standby display may be performed by operating only a part of the symbol. For example, when the symbol is composed of a character and a character, one of them is stationary and the other is operating. May be displayed as waiting. Further, the state in which the symbol is stationary but the color attached to the symbol is changing may be set as a standby display.

Further, although all the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are stationary, they are displayed blinking in the standby area set separately from the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 or the like. A state in which a variable display of a pattern or a pattern is being displayed may be set as a standby display. In this case, the static display means a state in which not only the symbol but also the other areas are still displayed.

Further, the parameter that triggers the fluctuation of the fluctuation duration of the game times is not limited to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, and may be the target ball ejection rate as in the second embodiment. The value may be the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 as in the third embodiment, or may be the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 as in the tenth embodiment.

<13th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a hold information acquisition process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. The process of acquiring the hold information is executed in step S401 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12).

When the game ball has entered the first operating port 33 (step S5201: YES), the number of reserved information on the first special drawing side stored in the first special drawing holding area 125 is the upper limit. On condition that the number (specifically, 4) has not been reached (step S5202: NO), the process of acquiring the reserved information on the first special drawing side is executed (step S5203). In the acquisition process, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are held on the first special figure side of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d in the first special figure hold area 125. The information is stored in the uppermost area where the information is not stored. After that, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S5204). The sound light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the first hold command to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of hold information on the first special figure side in the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information.

When a negative determination is made in step S5201, an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, or when the process of step S5204 is executed, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second operating port 34. Determination (step S5205). When a game ball has entered the second operating port 34 (step S5205: YES), the maximum number of reserved information on the second special drawing side stored in the second special drawing holding area 126 is the upper limit. On condition that the number (specifically, 4) has not been reached (step S5206: NO), the process of acquiring the reserved information on the second special drawing side is executed (step S5207). In the acquisition process, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are held on the second special figure side of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d in the second special figure hold area 126. The information is stored in the uppermost area where the information is not stored.

After that, the destination identification process is executed (step S5208). The details of the destination identification process will be described later. After that, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S5209). The sound light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the second hold command to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of hold information on the second special figure side in the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a destination identification process executed in step S5208 in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 78).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the jackpot specific flag provided in the main RAM 64 (step S5301). The jackpot identification flag specifies whether or not the reserved information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is already reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 by the main MPU 62. It is a flag to do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, the destination identification process is terminated as it is. Therefore, when the reserved information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is already reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, the destination identification shown in step S5302 and subsequent steps is used. Do not execute the processing of.

When a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode (step S5302). If the current support mode is the low frequency support mode (step S5302: NO), the destination identification process is terminated as it is. Therefore, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the process for specifying the destination shown in step S5303 and subsequent steps is not executed.

When the support mode is the high frequency support mode (step S5302: YES), the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S5303). In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 63 is referred to, and among the reserved information on the second special figure side acquired this time, the information for hit / fail judgment, that is, the winning random number counter. It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the hit / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 63 is referred to, and among the reserved information on the second special figure side acquired this time, the information for hit / fail determination, that is, the hit. It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result (step S5304: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S5305). In the distribution determination process, the distribution table for the second special drawing provided in the main ROM 63 (see FIG. 8B) is referred to, and the distribution of the reserved information on the second special drawing side acquired this time is distributed. It is grasped which kind of jackpot result corresponds to the information for determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it is possible to grasp which of the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result corresponds to.

When the result of the distribution determination process is a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result (step S5306: YES), that is, a jackpot result that triggers the execution of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode. In this case, "1" is set in the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5307). In addition, information corresponding to the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side stored in the second special drawing holding area 126 is set in the measurement counter for the second special drawing provided in the main RAM 64 (step). S5308). The measurement counter for the second special figure is the second special required until the hold information on the second special figure side, which triggered the setting of "1" in the jackpot identification flag of the main RAM 64, becomes the start target of the game round. It is a counter for specifying the number of times a game is executed by the main MPU 62 triggered by the hold information on the drawing side.

After that, on condition that the hold information on the first special figure side is held and stored in the first special figure hold area 125 (step S5309: YES), the first special figure side restriction flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set. “1” is set (step S5310). In addition, information corresponding to the number of reserved information on the first special drawing side stored in the first special drawing holding area 125 is set in the measurement counter for the first special drawing provided in the main RAM 64 (step). S5311). The first special figure side restriction flag is whether or not the hold information of the first special figure side is held and stored in the first special figure hold area 125 at the timing when "1" is set in the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM 64. This is a flag for specifying whether or not the main MPU 62 is used. In the measurement counter for the first special figure, all of the hold information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure hold area 125 at the timing when "1" is set in the jackpot identification flag of the main RAM 64. This is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the game has been started.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. The acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed in step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13).

When the game round to be started this time is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side (step S5401: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64 (step). S5402). If "1" is not set in the jackpot specific flag (step S5402: NO), other processing is executed (step S5414). In other processes, when the current game times correspond to the big hit result or the small hit result, after executing the process of step S603 of the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. When the process of step S614 is executed and the game times this time do not correspond to either the big hit result or the small hit result, step S605 of the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is described above. -The process of step S614 is executed. After that, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the variation duration of the game times selected in the other processing and the type command including the current pass / fail determination result and the distribution determination result to the sound / light side MPU82. (Step S5415), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

When "1" is set in the jackpot identification flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5402: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 is 2 or less (step). S5403). When the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 is not 2 or less (step S5403: NO), after subtracting 1 from the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 (step S5404), etc. (Step S5414). In other processes, when the current game times correspond to the big hit result or the small hit result, after executing the process of step S603 of the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. When the process of step S614 is executed and the game times this time do not correspond to either the big hit result or the small hit result, step S605 of the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is described above. -The process of step S614 is executed. After that, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the variation duration of the game times selected in the other processing and the type command including the current pass / fail determination result and the distribution determination result to the sound / light side MPU82. (Step S5415), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

When the value of the measurement counter for the second special figure of the main RAM 64 is 2 or less (step S5403: YES), the longest period among the fluctuation durations of the plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is set this time. It is selected as the variable continuation period of the game times of (step S5405). That is, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure Not only the game times triggered by the hold information on the side, but also the games in the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the digestion order immediately before the hold information on the second special figure side. The duration of the change is the longest.

This longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per hour period table. Specifically, it is 10 minutes. Therefore, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is held and stored in the second special figure hold area 126, the hold information on the second special figure side is stored. The duration of change in the game times in the game times triggered by the game times triggered by the game times and the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the previous digestion order with respect to the hold information on the second special figure side, is the longest. It will be a long period.

After that, the value of the measurement counter for the second special figure of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5406). Then, when the value of the measurement counter for the second special figure after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5407: YES), it is an opportunity to set "1" to the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64. Since it means that the reserved information on the second special figure side has become the start target of the game round, the jackpot identification flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5408). When a negative judgment is made in step S5407, or when the process of step S5408 is executed, the variable command including the information of the longest period and the type command including the current hit / miss judgment result and the distribution judgment result are sounded. After transmitting to the side MPU 82 (step S5415), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S5401, it means that the game round started this time is triggered by the hold information on the first special drawing side. In this case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first special figure side restriction flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5409). If a negative determination is made in step S5409, other processing is executed (step S5414). In other processes, when the current game times correspond to the big hit result or the small hit result, after executing the process of step S603 of the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. When the process of step S614 is executed and the game times this time do not correspond to either the big hit result or the small hit result, step S605 of the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is described above. -The process of step S614 is executed. After that, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the variation duration of the game times selected in the other processing and the type command including the current pass / fail determination result and the distribution determination result to the sound / light side MPU82. (Step S5415), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

When "1" is set in the first special figure side restriction flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5409: YES), the longest period of the fluctuation duration of the plurality of types of gaming times set in the pachinko machine 10. Is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game times (step S5410). That is, at the timing when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, it is held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125. With regard to the reserved information on the first special drawing side, the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period in all the game times triggered by the reserved information.

This longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per hour period table. Specifically, it is 10 minutes. Therefore, at the timing when the reserved information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, it is reserved and stored in the first special figure holding area 125. Regarding the reserved information on the first special drawing side, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is the longest period in all the game times triggered by the reserved information.

In the present embodiment, the hold information on the second special figure side is larger than the hold information on the first special figure side in the data setting process (step S502) of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13) as in the first embodiment. It is prioritized as a shift target to the execution area 127 for special figures. Therefore, when the holding information on the special drawing side is stored in both the first special drawing holding area 125 and the second special drawing holding area 126, the holding on the second special drawing side corresponding to the second operating port 34 is held. The information will be prioritized as the start target of the game round. In this case, as described above, the first special figure holding area is stored at the timing when the holding information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126. With regard to the hold information on the first special figure side held and stored in 125, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is the longest period in all the game times triggered by the hold information. The game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side are executed after the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. Further, it is started when the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side stored in the second special drawing holding area 126 becomes zero.

After that, the value of the measurement counter for the first special figure of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5411). Then, when the value of the measurement counter for the first special figure after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5412: YES), the result of the 10R low accuracy jackpot or the 10R high accuracy jackpot in the second special figure holding area 126 At the timing when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the result is put on hold and stored, all the hold information on the first special figure side held and stored in the first special figure hold area 125 becomes the start target of the game round. In order to mean that, the first special figure side restriction flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5413). When a negative determination is made in step S5412, or when the process of step S5413 is executed, the variable command including the information of the longest period and the type command including the current pass / fail determination result and the distribution determination result are sounded. After transmitting to the side MPU 82 (step S5415), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

With the above configuration, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 in the high frequency support mode, Not only the game times triggered by the hold information on the 2nd special figure side, but also the hold information on the 2nd special figure side, which is the previous digestion order with respect to the hold information on the 2nd special figure side, as a trigger. The maximum period of change in the game times is the maximum period. As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode is generated in the high frequency support mode, it is possible to prolong the period required for the opening / closing execution mode to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result was held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 at the timing when the holding information on the second special figure side was held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126. Regarding the reserved information on the first special figure side, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is the longest period in all the game times triggered by the reserved information. The game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side are executed after the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. Further, it is started when the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side stored in the second special drawing holding area 126 becomes zero. Therefore, in response to the acquisition of the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result in the high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation duration of the game times is set to the longest period. This makes it possible to generate the effect of reducing the digestion efficiency of the game times over a long period of time.

When the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure is concerned. Continuation of fluctuations in the game times in the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the previous digestion order with respect to the hold information on the side (hereinafter referred to as the hold information on the predetermined second special figure side). In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the period is the longest period, in the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the digestion order two times before the predetermined hold information on the second special figure side. The game may be configured so that the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period, and the game is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the digestion order three times before the predetermined hold information on the second special figure side. It may be configured such that the fluctuation duration of the game times in the times is the longest period. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the second execution is executed when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126. A configuration may be configured in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period in all the game times triggered by the hold information on the special figure side.

Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, the second special figure is held. The change duration of the game times in the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which has the digestion order first with respect to the hold information on the side (hereinafter referred to as the hold information on the predetermined second special figure side) Although it will be the longest period, in the game times triggered by the reserved information on the predetermined second special figure side, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is determined by lottery with reference to the first hit time period table. good.

Further, when the reserved information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored, the second special figure side has a second digestion order earlier than the reserved information on the second special figure side. The holding information on the second special drawing side corresponding to the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is held and stored without being limited to the configuration in which the fluctuation duration of the game times triggered by the holding information on the special drawing side is the longest period. The second special figure corresponding to the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result may be configured in which the above-mentioned long-term fluctuation duration of the game times occurs only in such a case. When the hold information on the side is held and stored, the above-mentioned long-term fluctuation duration of the game may be configured, and the second special feature corresponding to the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. When the reserved information on the drawing side is stored on hold, the holding information on the second special drawing side corresponding to one of the jackpot results may be configured so that the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended as described above. May be configured in which the above-mentioned long-term fluctuation duration of the game times occurs when the game is stored on hold.

Further, when the reserved information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored, the second special figure side has a second digestion order earlier than the reserved information on the second special figure side. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the fluctuation duration of the game times triggered by the hold information on the special figure side is the longest period, the hold on the first special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. When the information is stored on hold, the maximum period of change in the game times triggered by the hold information on the 1st special figure side, which has the digestion order earlier than the hold information on the 1st special figure side, is the longest period. Often, when the reserved information on the first special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is stored on hold, the digestion order is earlier than the reserved information on the first special figure side. The configuration may be such that the fluctuation continuation period of the game times triggered by the hold information on the 1 special figure side or the hold information on the 2nd special figure side is the longest period. In addition, the reserved information on the 1st special figure side, which triggers the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times as described above, is the 1st special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. It is not limited to the hold information, and may be the hold information on the first special figure side corresponding to the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, and may be the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. It may be the reserved information on the 1st special figure side corresponding to it, or it may be the reserved information on the 1st special drawing side corresponding to the 5R high accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, and it may be one of the jackpot results. It may be the pending information on the corresponding first special drawing side.

Further, the longest period may be configured to be the same as the fluctuation continuation period of the longest game times set in the first per hour period table. In this case, if the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure is held. In the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, where the digestion order is earlier than the hold information on the figure side, the longest change in the change duration of the game times that can be selected in other situations. The duration will be selected.

Further, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure is held. In the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, where the digestion order is earlier than the hold information on the side, the fluctuation continuation period of the predetermined game times set in the first per hour period table The variable duration of the game times to be executed may be selected by lottery from the group of the variable durations of a plurality of types of game times longer than the above. Even in this case, if the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 in the high frequency support mode, the relevant case is concerned. In the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the first to be digested with respect to the hold information on the second special figure side, the predetermined game set in the first hit time period table A period longer than the fluctuation continuation period of the times will be selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. It should be noted that the longest variable duration of the game may or may not be included in the group of the variable duration of the plurality of types of game times.

Further, in the high frequency support mode, the holding information on the second special drawing side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the second special drawing holding area 126 (hereinafter, the holding information on the predetermined second special drawing side). When multiple hold information is stored, the change in the number of games triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the previous digestion order for each predetermined hold information on the second special figure side. It may be configured so that the duration is the longest.

Further, in the game round having the longest period, the movie image G2 and the remaining time image G3 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed as in the first embodiment.

<14th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the selection mode of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the situation where "1" is set in the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64 or the first special figure side restriction flag is different from the thirteenth embodiment. There is. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. The acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed in step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13).

When the game round to be started this time is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side (step S5501: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64 (step). S5502). If "1" is not set in the jackpot specific flag (step S5502: NO), other processing is executed (step S5518). In other processes, when the current game times correspond to the big hit result or the small hit result, after executing the process of step S603 of the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. When the process of step S614 is executed and the game times this time do not correspond to either the big hit result or the small hit result, step S605 of the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is described above. -The process of step S614 is executed. After that, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the variation duration of the game times selected in the other processing and the type command including the current pass / fail determination result and the distribution determination result to the sound / light side MPU82. (Step S5519), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

When "1" is set in the jackpot identification flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5502: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 is 2 or less (step). S5503). When the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 is not 2 or less (step S5503: NO), after subtracting 1 from the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 (step S5504), etc. (Step S5518). In other processes, when the current game times correspond to the big hit result or the small hit result, after executing the process of step S603 of the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. When the process of step S614 is executed and the game times this time do not correspond to either the big hit result or the small hit result, step S605 of the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is described above. -The process of step S614 is executed. After that, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the variation duration of the game times selected in the other processing and the type command including the current pass / fail determination result and the distribution determination result to the sound / light side MPU82. (Step S5519), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

When the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 is 2 or less (step S5503: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value. (Step S5505). The content of the total number of rounds counter 64c is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, the third reference value is "60" as in the first embodiment.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S5505: NO), the second longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations of the plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10. The quasi-longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game times (step S5506). On the other hand, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S5505: YES), the longest period among the fluctuation durations of the plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is the current period. It is selected as the variable continuation period of the game times (step S5507). That is, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure Not only the game times triggered by the hold information on the side, but also the games in the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the digestion order immediately before the hold information on the second special figure side. The duration of the change is the quasi-longest period or the longest period.

The longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per hour period table, specifically 10 minutes. In addition, the quasi-longest period is a period longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per hour period table and shorter than the longest period. Is 9 minutes and 10 seconds.

When the process of step S5506 or the process of step S5507 is executed, the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5508). Then, when the value of the measurement counter for the second special figure after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5509: YES), it is an opportunity to set "1" to the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64. Since it means that the reserved information on the second special figure side has become the start target of the game round, the jackpot identification flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5510). When a negative judgment is made in step S5509, or when the process of step S5510 is executed, the variable command including the information of the longest period or the information of the quasi-longest period, and the result of the hit / fail judgment and the result of the distribution judgment are displayed. After transmitting the included type command to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S5519), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S5501, it means that the game round started this time is triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. In this case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first special figure side restriction flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5511). If a negative determination is made in step S5511, other processing is executed (step S5518). In other processes, when the current game times correspond to the big hit result or the small hit result, after executing the process of step S603 of the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. When the process of step S614 is executed and the game times this time do not correspond to either the big hit result or the small hit result, step S605 of the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is described above. -The process of step S614 is executed. After that, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the variation duration of the game times selected in the other processing and the type command including the current pass / fail determination result and the distribution determination result to the sound / light side MPU82. (Step S5519), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

When "1" is set in the first special figure side restriction flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5511: YES), whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value. Is determined (step S5512). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S5512: NO), the second longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations of the plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10. The quasi-longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game times (step S5513). On the other hand, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S5512: YES), the longest period among the fluctuation durations of the plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is the current period. It is selected as the variable continuation period of the game times (step S5514). That is, at the timing when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, it is held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125. With regard to the reserved information on the first special drawing side, the fluctuation duration of the game times is the quasi-longest period or the longest period in all the game times triggered by the reserved information.

The longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per hour period table, specifically 10 minutes. In addition, the quasi-longest period is a period longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per hour period table and shorter than the longest period. Is 9 minutes and 10 seconds.

When the process of step S5513 or the process of step S5514 is executed, the value of the first special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5515). Then, when the value of the measurement counter for the first special figure after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5516: YES), the result of the 10R low accuracy jackpot or the 10R high accuracy jackpot in the second special figure holding area 126. At the timing when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the result is put on hold and stored, all the hold information on the first special figure side held and stored in the first special figure hold area 125 becomes the start target of the game round. In order to mean that, the first special figure side restriction flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5517). When a negative judgment is made in step S5516, or when the process of step S5517 is executed, the variable command including the information of the longest period or the information of the quasi-longest period, and the result of the hit / fail judgment and the result of the distribution judgment are displayed. After transmitting the included type command to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S5519), the acquisition process of this fluctuation continuation period is terminated.

With the above configuration, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 in the high frequency support mode, A game triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, and a game triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the digestion order immediately before the hold information on the second special figure side. The fluctuation duration of the game times in the times is the quasi-longest period if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the third reference value, and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or more than the third reference value. If there is, it will be the longest period. As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode is generated in the high frequency support mode, the period required until the opening / closing execution mode is generated can be extended. While it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time, the stage according to the number of round games in the high-frequency winning mode that occurred in the high-frequency support mode for the long-term period. It becomes possible to make it a target.

The hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result was held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 at the timing when the holding information on the second special figure side was held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126. Regarding the hold information on the first special figure side, if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the third reference value, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times in all the game times triggered by the hold information The quasi-longest period is set, and if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the longest period is set. As a result, the fluctuation duration of the game times is set to the quasi-longest period or the longest with respect to the acquisition of the reserved information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result in the high-frequency support mode. By setting the period, it is possible to generate the effect of lowering the digestion efficiency of the game times over a long period of time, and the number of round games in the high frequency winning mode that occurred in the high frequency support mode for the long period of time. It is possible to make it stepwise according to.

When the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure is concerned. Continuation of fluctuations in the game times in the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the previous digestion order with respect to the hold information on the side (hereinafter referred to as the hold information on the predetermined second special figure side). In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the period is the longest period or the quasi-longest period, the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the digestion order two times before the predetermined hold information on the second special figure side, is used as an opportunity. The fluctuation duration of the game times in the game times may be the longest period or the quasi-longest period, and the second special figure side which is the digestion order three times before the reserved information on the predetermined second special figure side. The variable duration of the game times in the game times triggered by the hold information of the above may be the longest period or the quasi-longest period. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the second execution is executed when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126. In all of the game times triggered by the reserved information on the special figure side, the fluctuation duration of the game times may be the longest period or the quasi-longest period.

Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, the second special figure is held. The change duration of the game times in the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which has the digestion order first with respect to the hold information on the side (hereinafter referred to as the hold information on the predetermined second special figure side) Although it is the longest period or the quasi-longest period, in the game times triggered by the reserved information on the predetermined second special figure side, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is determined by lottery with reference to the hit time period table. May be.

Further, when the reserved information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored, the second special figure side has a second digestion order earlier than the reserved information on the second special figure side. The holding information on the second special drawing side corresponding to the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is not limited to the configuration in which the fluctuation duration of the game times triggered by the holding information on the special drawing side is the longest period or the quasi-longest period. May be configured in which the above-mentioned long-term fluctuation duration of the game times occurs only when is stored on hold, and corresponds to the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. When the hold information on the second special figure side is held and stored, the above-mentioned configuration in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended may occur, and the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is supported. When the reserved information on the second special figure side is stored on hold, the above-mentioned configuration may be such that the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, and the second special figure corresponding to one of the jackpot results is obtained. When the hold information on the side is held and stored, the above-mentioned configuration may be configured in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended.

Further, when the reserved information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored, the second special figure side has a second digestion order earlier than the reserved information on the second special figure side. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the fluctuation duration of the game times triggered by the hold information on the special figure side is the longest period or the quasi-longest period, the first special corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. When the hold information on the drawing side is stored on hold, the maximum period of change in the game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, which has a digestion order earlier than the hold information on the first special figure side, is the longest period. Alternatively, it may be configured to have a quasi-longest period, and when the reserved information on the first special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is stored on hold, from the reserved information on the first special figure side. However, the variable continuation period of the game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the first in the digestion order, may be the longest period or the quasi-longest period. In addition, the reserved information on the 1st special figure side, which triggers the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times as described above, is the 1st special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. It is not limited to the hold information, and may be the hold information on the first special figure side corresponding to the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, and may be the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. It may be the reserved information on the 1st special figure side corresponding to it, or it may be the reserved information on the 1st special drawing side corresponding to the 5R high accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, and it may be one of the jackpot results. It may be the pending information on the corresponding first special drawing side.

Further, in the high frequency support mode, the holding information on the second special drawing side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the second special drawing holding area 126 (hereinafter, the holding information on the predetermined second special drawing side). When multiple hold information is stored, the change in the number of games triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the previous digestion order for each predetermined hold information on the second special figure side. The duration may be the longest period or the quasi-longest period.

Further, in the game times having the longest period or the quasi-longest period, the movie image G2 and the remaining time image G3 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed as in the first embodiment.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S5601). If a negative determination is made in step S5601, the processing during determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S5601: YES), the condition that the hit / fail judgment result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S5602: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (step S5603).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, it is determined whether or not the value of the digestion count counter of the main RAM 64 is 1 or more (step S5604). The number of digestion counters is the maximum number of times in the high-frequency winning mode after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, that is, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is completed. It is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the number of game times executed without executing the opening / closing execution mode of the number of rounds is within the range of 30 times, which is the reference number of consecutive villas. That is, in step S5604, the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is reached from the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode until the 30 game times, which is the reference number of consecutive villas, are exhausted. It is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode has occurred again.

After the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the high-probability mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, but the high-frequency support mode continues until the next open / close execution mode occurs. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result, the low-probability mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, but in the high-frequency support mode, 80 game times, which is the end reference number, are executed. If this happens, it will be terminated and the low frequency support mode will be set. On the other hand, the standard number of consecutive villas is set to 30 as described above. Therefore, the high-frequency support mode does not end before the game rounds of the consecutive villa standard number of times are executed after the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode is completed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5604, "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag provided in the main RAM 64 (step S5605). The consecutive villa generation flag opens and closes the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode from the end of the execution mode to the end of the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas. The main MPU 62 specifies whether or not the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas, has not been digested even after the execution mode has occurred again and the opening / closing execution mode has ended. It is a flag to do. When a negative determination is made in step S5604 or when the process of step S5605 is executed, "30", which is a value corresponding to the reference number of consecutive villas, is set in the digestion count counter of the main RAM 64 (step S5605).

On the other hand, when the game round this time is a hit result different from the 10R low accuracy jackpot result and the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, that is, the game round corresponding to the small hit result, the 2R high accuracy jackpot result or the 5R high accuracy jackpot result (step). S5603: NO), the process proceeds to step S5607 without executing the processes of steps S5604 to S5606. In step S5607, the value of the digestion count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1. If the value of the digestion count counter is already "0", it is maintained at "0" without subtracting 1. After that, when "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5608: YES) and the value of the digestion count counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S5609: YES). The flag for generating consecutive villas in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5610). That is, in the state where "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs after the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode ends. It will be canceled when 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas, have been exhausted.

When the process of step S5606 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S5608, the negative determination is made in step S5609, or the process of step S5610 is executed, the opening period selection process is executed (step S5611). ). As the period to be the target of the opening period, two types of 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period) are set as in the first embodiment, and these are set in the opening period selection process. Of the two types of periods, select the side that will be the opening period of this open / close execution mode.

After that, the information of the opening period selected in step S5611 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S5612). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, an opening command including the information of the opening period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S5613). By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of the current light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S5614). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special electric start process.

On the other hand, when the winning / failing determination result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S5602: NO), the value of the digestion count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5615). .. If the value of the digestion count counter is already "0", it is maintained at "0" without subtracting 1.

After that, when "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5616: YES) and the value of the digestion count counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S5617: YES). The flag for generating consecutive villas in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5618). That is, in the state where "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs after the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode ends. It will be canceled when 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas, have been exhausted.

When a negative judgment is made in step S5616, a negative judgment is made in step S5617, or the process of step S5618 is executed, the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is "0" and the high frequency support flag is "0". By determining whether or not it is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the fact that the game round that ended this time resulted in a 10R low-probability jackpot result, and in the high-frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in a certain situation (step S5619).

In the case of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S5619: YES), the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5620). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S5621). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S5621: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5622). This results in a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S5619, a negative determination is made in step S5621, or the process of step S5622 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S5623). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 83A is a flowchart showing a cycle setting process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When "1" is not set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5701: NO), the first that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64. Information corresponding to the cycle is set (step S5702). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When "1" is set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5701: YES), the second that enables 90 game balls to be fired in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 per minute. Information corresponding to the cycle is set (step S5703). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfying signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotation operation amount is such that the game area PA is supplied with the game ball, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

As described above, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is set from the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas, are exhausted. After the occurrence again, in the situation where the 30 game times, which is the reference number of consecutive villas, has not been digested after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a short time, the firing cycle of the game balls becomes long, so that the number of game balls to the game area PA per unit time is small. As a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle, if the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from becoming excessive.

FIG. 83B is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

If "1" is not set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5711: NO), the period adjustment process is terminated as it is. When "1" is set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5711: YES), the variation continuation period extension process is executed (step S5712). In the extension process, as in step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the extension period with respect to the change continuation period acquired in step S614 in the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). Add 1 second as. Further, an extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the extension period is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S5713). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of this game round has been extended by the extension period, and corrects the contents of the data table for the game round production in response to the extension. do. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is performed by extending the period in which the standby display is performed in all the symbols as in the tenth embodiment. May be.

As described above, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is set from the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas, are exhausted. After the occurrence again, in the situation where the 30 game times, which is the reference number of consecutive villas, has not been digested after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times becomes long. As a result, when the open / close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a short time, the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, and the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases. The frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time is low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur even if the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times a game is played per unit time.

FIG. 84 (a) is a flowchart showing the selection process of the final stop period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When "1" is not set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5801: NO), the first final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S5802). The first final stop period is 0.5 seconds. When "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5801: YES), the second final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S5803). The second final suspension period is 3 seconds.

As described above, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is set from the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas, are exhausted. After the occurrence again, in the situation where the 30 game times, which is the reference number of consecutive villas, has not been digested after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the final stop period of the game times becomes long. As a result, when the open / close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a short time, the final stop period of the game times becomes longer, and the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, resulting in The frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The final stop period of the game round does not become long if the open / close execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times a game is played per unit time.

FIG. 84B is a flowchart showing a selection process of the opening period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When "1" is not set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5811: NO), the first opening period is selected as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S5812). The first opening period is 4 seconds. When "1" is set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5811: YES), the second opening period is selected as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S5813). The second opening period is 10 seconds.

As described above, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is set from the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas, are exhausted. The opening period of the open / close execution mode becomes long in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode has not been completed 30 times, which is the reference number of consecutive villas, after the occurrence again. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a short time, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode becomes long, and the occurrence frequency of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening period of the open / close execution mode does not become long even if the open / close execution mode of the maximum number of rounds occurs only once in the high frequency winning mode. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

FIG. 84 (c) is a flowchart showing the selection process of the interval period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When "1" is not set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5821: NO), the first interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S5822). The first interval period is 2 seconds. When "1" is set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5821: YES), the second interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S5823). The second interval period is 6 seconds.

As described above, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is set from the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas, are exhausted. After the occurrence again, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode becomes long in the situation where the 30 game times, which is the reference number of consecutive villas, has not been digested since the opening / closing execution mode is completed. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a short time, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode becomes long, and the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The interval period of the open / close execution mode does not become long even if the open / close execution mode of the maximum number of rounds occurs only once in the high frequency winning mode. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

FIG. 84 (d) is a flowchart showing the selection process of the ending period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When "1" is not set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5831: NO), the first ending period is selected as the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S5832). The first ending period is 6 seconds. When "1" is set in the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5831: YES), the second ending period is selected as the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S5833). The second ending period is 12 seconds.

As described above, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is set from the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive villas, are exhausted. The ending period of the open / close execution mode becomes long in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode has not been completed for 30 game times, which is the reference number of consecutive villas, even after the occurrence again. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a short time, the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode becomes long, and the occurrence frequency of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The ending period of the open / close execution mode does not become long even if the open / close execution mode of the maximum number of rounds occurs only once in the high frequency winning mode. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Next, a state in which the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time is restricted according to the occurrence frequency of the opening / closing execution mode having the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 85. .. FIG. 85 (a) shows the period of the game times corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, FIG. 85 (b) shows the period of the open / close execution mode, and FIG. 85 (c) shows the high. FIG. 85 (d) shows a period in which the frequency support mode is set, FIG. 85 (d) shows a continuous villa monitoring period in which the value of the digestion count counter of the main RAM 64 is 1 or more, and FIG. 85 (e) shows a continuous period of the main RAM 64. Indicates the period during which "1" is set in the villa generation flag.

In the situation where the low frequency support mode is shown in FIG. 85 (c) and the continuous villa monitoring period is not shown as shown in FIG. 85 (d), FIG. 85 (a) shows from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. As shown, the game times corresponding to the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result are executed. Then, from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode is executed. At the timing of t3 when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 85 (c), and the continuous villa monitoring period starts as shown in FIG. 85 (d).

After that, in the situation where the high frequency support mode is shown in FIG. 85 (c) and the consecutive villa monitoring period is shown in FIG. 85 (d), the timing of t4 to t5 is shown in FIG. 85 (a). The game times corresponding to the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result are generated again over the timing of. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 85B, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode is started. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode is started during the continuous villa monitoring period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85 (e), "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 at the timing of t5, which is the timing at which the opening / closing execution mode is started. As a result, the firing cycle is extended from the opening / closing execution mode started this time, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are extended. Further, after the timing of t6, which is the timing at which the opening / closing execution mode started this time ends, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times and the final stop period of the game times are extended. Furthermore, in the situation where "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag, either the small hit result, the 2R high accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is triggered. When the opening / closing execution mode is generated, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period are extended in the opening / closing execution mode.

After that, at the timing of t7, the game rounds of the standard number of consecutive villas are exhausted without the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds occurring in the high frequency winning mode, and as shown in FIG. 85 (d), the consecutive villa monitoring period. As shown in FIG. 85 (e), the flag for generating consecutive villas in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0". When the consecutive villa generation flag is cleared to "0", the firing cycle of the game ball returns to the first cycle, the fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended, and the final stop period of the game times is It returns to the first final suspension period, which is a relatively short period. Even if the consecutive villa generation flag is cleared to "0", the high frequency support mode is continued as shown in FIG. 85 (c).

After that, it is a high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 85 (c), not a continuous villa monitoring period as shown in FIG. 85 (d), and further, as shown in FIG. 85 (e), a continuous villa of the main RAM 64. In a situation where "1" is not set in the generation flag, the game times corresponding to the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result are executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 85 (a). Then, from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode is executed. In this case, since "1" is not set in the consecutive villa occurrence flag, the opening period is the first opening period, which is a relatively short period, and the interval period is the first interval period, which is a relatively short period. The ending period is the first ending period, which is a relatively short period.

Since the opening / closing execution mode this time is the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode, the continuous villa monitoring period is started at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 85 (d). After that, at the timing of t11, the game rounds of the standard number of consecutive villas are digested without the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds occurring in the high frequency winning mode, and as shown in FIG. 85 (d), the consecutive villa monitoring period. Is finished. In addition, since the previous opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t12, the game times of the end reference number of times are exhausted, so that the high frequency support mode ends and the low frequency support mode ends as shown in FIG. 85 (c). Will be.

According to the above configuration, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is executed from the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode until the game times of the standard number of consecutive villas are exhausted. In this case, "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64, so that various periods are extended. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode, which gives a large profit, repeatedly occurs in a short time, the number of game rounds generated per unit time is reduced and the unit time is reduced. The frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode at the hit is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Even if the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs only once, various periods are not prolonged, and the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a short time. In some cases, various periods are prolonged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the game times per unit time and the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Even if the high-frequency support mode is continued, the above-mentioned various periods will not be prolonged unless the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode occurs within the range of the consecutive villa monitoring period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the game times per unit time and the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

It should be noted that the state in which "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 is not limited to the configuration that is canceled when the consecutive villa monitoring period elapses, and is high after the consecutive villa monitoring period elapses. When the open / close execution mode of the maximum number of rounds occurs in the frequency winning mode, or when the high frequency support mode ends, the state in which "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 is canceled. It may be configured to be.

Further, when the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds occurs in the next high-frequency winning mode, the state in which "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 may be canceled. In this case, if the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the next high-frequency winning mode occurs within the range of the consecutive villa monitoring period, the consecutive villa monitoring period is newly set and the consecutive villa occurrence flag is set to "1". If the state in which "" is set continues and the open / close execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the next high-frequency winning mode occurs after the villa monitoring period has elapsed, the villa monitoring period is newly set. The state in which "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag is canceled.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 when the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds occurs by the high frequency winning mode during the consecutive villa monitoring period. When the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs during the villa monitoring period, "1" may be set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64, and the opening / closing triggered by the jackpot result during the consecutive villa monitoring period. When the execution mode occurs, "1" may be set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64, and when the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result or the small hit result occurs during the continuous villa monitoring period. It may be configured that "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64.

Further, when the event that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds occurs continuously by the high frequency winning mode during the continuous villa monitoring period, the various periods may be further extended.

<16th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time is different from the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the tenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a management process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the period measurement counter 202 of the main RAM 64 is added by 1 (step S5901). Then, when the value of the period measurement counter 202 after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the calculation trigger period (10 minutes) (step S5902: YES), the processes shown in steps S5903 to S5909 are executed.

Specifically, the information of the measurement round number counter 201 of the main RAM 64 is overwritten on the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the value of the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. (Step S5903). After that, the update process of the write pointer 204 is executed (step S5904). In the update process, the value of the write pointer 204 is added by 1, and when the value after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 204, the write pointer 204 is cleared to "0".

After that, the information of all the total number of rounds stored in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203 is added (step S5905), and the addition result is used as the information of the number of target rounds and the number of target rounds. The area 205 is overwritten (step S5906). Further, the target round number command in which the information on the target round number overwritten in the target round number area 205 is set is transmitted to the payout control device 77 (step S5907). After that, the value of the measurement round number counter 201 is cleared to "0" (step S5908), and the value of the period measurement counter 202 is cleared to "0" (step S5909).

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a command reception process executed by the MPU provided in the payout control device 77. The command reception process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds). In the MPU of the payout control device 77, a ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and various data and the like are temporarily stored when the control program stored in the ROM is executed. It has a built-in RAM, which is a memory for storing data, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and various counter circuits as data input / output circuits.

First, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S6001). Similar to the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 pays out a prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31. It is transmitted to the device 77, and when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, a prize ball command instructing the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 77, and the first When one game ball enters the operating port 33, a prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 77, and one to the second operating port 34. When the game ball is entered, a prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 77. The number of game balls to be paid out is stored in the main RAM 64 without being limited to this, and when the stored number reaches a predetermined number such as 15, the payout control is performed from the main MPU 62. A prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls may be transmitted to the device 77.

When a prize ball command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S6001: YES), it corresponds to the number of game balls to be paid out set in the prize ball number storage counter provided in the RAM of the payout control device 77. Information is added (step S6002). The prize ball number storage counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls to be paid out by the MPU of the payout control device 77.

When a negative determination is made in step S6001 or when the process of step S6002 is executed, it is determined whether or not a target round number command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S6003). As described above, the target round number command is set with information on the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 of the main RAM 64. When the target round number command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S6003: YES), the target round number command received this time is set in the payout side round number area provided in the RAM of the payout control device 77. Overwrite the information on the number of target rounds (step S6004). The payout side round number area is an area for specifying the information of the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 of the main RAM 64 by the MPU of the payout control device 77.

When a negative determination is made in step S6003, or when the process of step S6004 is executed, other processes are executed (step S6005). In other processes, when a command other than the prize ball command and the target round number command is received from the main MPU 62, the corresponding process is executed.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a payout control process executed by the MPU of the payout control device 77. The payout control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

When the value of the prize ball number storage counter in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is 1 or more (step S6101: YES), the value of the number of target rounds stored in the payout side round number area in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is the first. If it is less than one reference value (step S6102: YES), the payout speed of the game ball by the payout device 76 is set to the first speed (step S6103), and the value of the number of target rounds is equal to or more than the first reference value. If it is less than the second reference value (step S6104: YES), the payout speed of the game ball by the payout device 76 is set to the second speed (step S6105), and the value of the number of target rounds is equal to or higher than the second reference value. If (step S6104: NO), the payout speed of the game ball by the payout device 76 is set to the third speed (step S6106). Similar to the tenth embodiment, the first reference value is "10" and the second reference value is "30".

The first speed is the fastest speed among the payout speeds of the game balls set in the pachinko machine 10, and when the payout device 76 executes the payout of the game balls at the first speed, it is 1 in 60 milliseconds. The game balls are dispensed from the payout device 76 in each payout cycle and are supplied to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a. The second speed is the second fastest speed among the payout speeds of the game balls set in the pachinko machine 10, and 120 milliseconds when the payout device 76 executes the payout of the game balls at the second speed. The game ball is dispensed from the payout device 76 in one payout cycle and is supplied to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a. The third speed is the slowest speed among the payout speeds of the game balls set in the pachinko machine 10, and when the payout device 76 executes the payout of the game balls at the third speed, it is 1 in 180 milliseconds. The game balls are dispensed from the payout device 76 in each payout cycle and are supplied to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a.

Here, the launch cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds (600 milliseconds) in the situation where the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27 and the launch operation of the game ball is continued. It has become. Therefore, even when the payout speed of the game ball is the slowest third speed, the cycle in which the game ball is supplied to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a when the payout of the game ball is continued is the game ball. It will be shorter than the firing cycle of. As a result, even if the payout speed of the game ball is set to any of the first to third speeds, if the payout of the game ball is continued, can the payout of the game ball catch up with the launch of the game ball? It is possible to prevent the situation that there is no such thing from occurring.

When the process of step S6103, the process of step S6105, or the process of step S6106 is executed, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is paid out at the set payout speed (step S6107). After that, when the payout detection sensor that detects the game balls paid out from the payout device 76 detects the payout of one game ball (step S6108: YES), the number of prize balls stored in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is stored. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (step S6109). Further, the value of the prize-winning counter provided in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is added by 1 (step S6110). The prize ball completed counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls for which payout has been completed by the MPU of the payout control device 77. After that, the external output process is executed (step S6111). In the external output processing, the prize ball completion signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall every time the value of the prize ball counter reaches "10", which is the output reference number, through the external terminal board provided in the pachinko machine 10. .. That is, every time the payout of the output reference number of game balls is completed, the prize ball completion signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall. When the prize ball completion signal is externally output, the output reference number "10" is subtracted from the prize ball completed counter.

After that, when the value of the prize ball number storage counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S6112: YES), the payout stop process is executed (step S6113). As a result, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 76 is stopped.

According to the above configuration, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the slower the payout speed of the game ball by the payout device 76. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs during the measurement target period (1 hour), the payout speed of the game ball by the payout device 76 slows down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Even when the payout speed of the game ball is the slowest third speed, the game ball is fired during the cycle in which the game ball is supplied to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a when the payout of the game ball is continued. It will be shorter than the cycle. As a result, even if the payout speed of the game ball is set to any of the first to third speeds, if the payout of the game ball is continued, can the payout of the game ball catch up with the launch of the game ball? It is possible to prevent the situation that there is no such thing from occurring.

In addition, the configuration that slows down the payout speed of the game ball when the advantage of the player becomes high may be applied to the fifteenth embodiment. In this case, when "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64, the payout of the game ball is stopped until a predetermined stop period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the "1" is set. It may be configured as such. Further, when "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64, the payout of the game ball at a predetermined payout speed and the stop of the payout of the game ball for a predetermined stop period (for example, 10 seconds) are performed. It may be configured to be repeated alternately.

Further, the parameter that triggers the fluctuation of the payout speed of the game ball as in the above embodiment is not limited to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205, as in the first embodiment. It may be the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the target ball ejection rate as in the second embodiment, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 as in the third embodiment. You may.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The target ball ejection rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment), the opportunity to change the firing cycle of the game ball, and the fluctuation duration of the game time according to the player's advantage. The configuration is such that the trigger for changing the determination mode is the same, but at least a part of the trigger may be different. For example, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, one of the average periods of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times is longer, while the other is maintained, and the game is played. When the advantage of the person is equal to or higher than the second reference value, one of the average periods of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times may be maintained while the other is longer. .. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Further, for example, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first reference value, one of the average periods of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, while the other is maintained. , When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the average period of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times is longer, while the other is maintained, and the player is maintained. When the advantage of is equal to or higher than the third reference value, both the firing cycle of the skill ball and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times may be long. As a result, until the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time. When the advantage of the above is equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is possible to sharply increase the function of suppressing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

(2) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The final stop period of the game is the first final stop period and the second final stop period depending on whether or not the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the second reference value. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the final stop period of the game round is the first final stop period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. It may be configured to be switched between the second final stop period, and the final stop period of the game round is the first final stop period and the second final stop depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. It may be configured to be switched between the period and the period.

Further, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value, and the third reference value is set, the final stop of the game round depends on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the other reference value. The period may be switched between the first final suspension period and the second final suspension period. In this case, the final stop period of the game round is changed at a different timing from the trigger for changing the firing cycle of the game ball and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game round.

(3) In the first to sixth embodiments, the final stop period of the game is the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the second embodiment). For example, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment), the configuration is such that the first final stop period and the second final stop period can be switched. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the switching can be performed in three stages or four or more stages. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, the shortest final stop period is selected if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value and the second reference value. If it is less than, the second shortest final stop period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the longest final stop period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the final stop period of the game round is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and the function of suppressing the excessively large profit from being given to the player in a short time is stepwise. It will be possible to increase.

(4) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). Depending on whether or not the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode is the first opening period and the second opening period. Although it is configured to be switched between, the opening period is not limited to this, and the opening period is between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. The opening period may be switched between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value.

Further, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the opening period is the first depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the other reference value. The configuration may be such that the opening period and the second opening period can be switched. In this case, the opening period is changed at a different time from the time when the average period of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed.

(5) In the first to sixth embodiments, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode may be the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, or the second embodiment. For example, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is configured to be switched between the first opening period and the second opening period. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be switched in three stages or four or more stages. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest opening period is selected, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest opening period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the longest opening period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the opening period is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and it is possible to gradually increase the suppression function of giving an excessively large profit to the player in a short time. Will be.

(6) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The interval period of the open / close execution mode is the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether or not the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the second reference value. Although it is configured to be switched between, the interval period is not limited to this, and the interval period is between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. The interval period may be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value.

Further, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the interval period is the first depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the other reference value. The configuration may be such that the interval period and the second interval period can be switched. In this case, the interval period is changed at a different time from the time when the average period of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed.

(7) In the first to sixth embodiments, the interval period of the open / close execution mode is the advantage of the player (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the second embodiment). For example, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is configured to be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be switched in three stages or four or more stages. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, the shortest interval period is selected if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest interval period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the longest interval period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the interval period is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time. Will be.

(8) In the first to sixth, tenth, and fifteenth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c in the second embodiment). Target ball output rate According to the target ball output rate in the area 173, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the target round area 205 in the tenth embodiment). When the interval period of the open / close execution mode is changed, all the interval periods included in one open / close execution mode are changed, but some interval periods included in one open / close execution mode are changed. The configuration may be such that only is changed and the rest are unchanged.

(9) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The ending period of the open / close execution mode is the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether or not the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the second reference value. Although it is configured to be switched between, the ending period is not limited to this, and the ending period is between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. The ending period may be switched between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value.

Further, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the ending period is the first depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the other reference value. The configuration may be such that the ending period and the second ending period can be switched. In this case, the ending period is changed at a time different from the time when the average period of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed.

(10) In the first to sixth embodiments, the ending period of the open / close execution mode may be the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c, or the second embodiment. For example, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is configured to be switched between the first ending period and the second ending period. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be switched in three stages or four or more stages. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest ending period is selected, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest ending period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the longest ending period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the ending period is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time. Will be.

(11) In the first to sixth, tenth, and fifteenth embodiments, all of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are the player's advantages (total round in the case of the first embodiment). The value of the number counter 64c, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target in the tenth embodiment. The number of rounds is changed according to the number of target rounds stored in the area 205), but the configuration is not limited to this, and a part of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the open / close execution mode is The configuration may be changed according to the player's advantage, while the rest may not be changed according to the player's advantage.

(12) In the first to sixth, tenth, and fifteenth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target in the second embodiment). Depending on the target payout rate in the payout rate area 173, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the target round area 205 in the tenth embodiment). , The trigger to change the final stop period of the game round, the trigger to change the opening period of the open / close execution mode, the trigger to change the interval period of the open / close execution mode, and the trigger to change the ending period of the open / close execution mode. The configurations are all the same, but at least a part of these triggers may be different. For example, if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value, the final stop period of the game is changed to be longer, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value. Both the opening period and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode is changed to be longer. It may be configured. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Further, for example, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, the final stop period of the game is changed to be longer, and the player's advantage is changed to be equal to or higher than the second reference value. Is changed so that both the opening period and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode become longer, and when the player's advantage exceeds the third reference value, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode becomes longer. If the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the fourth reference value, the final stop period of the game, and the opening period, ending period, and interval period of the open / close execution mode are all changed to be longer. It may be configured. As a result, until the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the fourth reference value, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time. When the advantage of the above is equal to or higher than the fourth reference value, it is possible to sharply increase the function of suppressing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

(13) In the first to fourth embodiments, the longest period may be the same as the fluctuation continuation period of the longest game times set in the first per hour period table. In this case, it is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, and the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c in the second embodiment). Target ball output rate If the target ball output rate in the area 173, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the game times that can be selected in other situations as well. The longest variable duration will be selected.

Further, it is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, and the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target in the second embodiment). When the target payout rate in the payout rate area 173, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is set in the first per hour period table. The variable duration of the game to be executed may be selected by lottery from the group of the variable duration of a plurality of types of games longer than the variable duration of the predetermined game. Even in this case, if either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is set in the first hit time period table. A period longer than the fluctuation continuation period of the predetermined game times is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. It should be noted that the longest variable duration of the game may or may not be included in the group of the variable duration of the plurality of types of game times.

(14) In the first to fourth embodiments, the player's advantage is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (in the first embodiment, the total number of rounds counter 64c). Value, target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment, value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period, and the player's advantage is the third criterion, which is one of the jackpot results that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. If the value is equal to or higher than the value, the longest period may be selected as the fluctuation duration of the game times, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the game times may be any jackpot result. The longest period may be selected as the fluctuation continuation period of. Further, the advantage of the player who triggers the selection of the longest period as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is not limited to the configuration in which the third reference value or more is used, and may be the second reference value or more. , It may be equal to or more than the first reference value, and may be equal to or more than another reference value.

(15) In the first to fourth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball ejection rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The longest period in a game that is either a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result in a situation where the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value. The configuration is not limited to displaying the dedicated movie image G2, and the longest period is selected only in the game times that result in a 10R high accuracy jackpot in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. In addition, the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed. In this case, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the open / close execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs, and then the high-probability mode is set, the game times. Since the fluctuation duration of is the longest, it will take a long time before the most favorable situation occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time. In addition, by displaying the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period, it is possible to make the player recognize that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, is generated and the high probability mode is performed thereafter. It becomes.

(16) In the first to fourth embodiments, a quasi-longest period is set separately from the longest period, and the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the first In the case of the second embodiment, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173, and in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181) is equal to or higher than the third reference value. When the game times occur, the quasi-longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration of the game times, and the movie image dedicated to the quasi-longest period is displayed, and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. When a game round that results in a 10R high-accuracy jackpot occurs, the longest period may be selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the game round, and the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed. In this case, the quasi-longest period is 9 minutes and 30 seconds, which is longer than the variable duration of the game times selected in other situations except for the longest period, so that the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is reached. It is possible to take a long time for the opening / closing execution mode to occur, and different effects are executed depending on whether the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result is generated or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is generated. It becomes possible to do so.

(17) In the first to fourth and twelfth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target payout rate in the second embodiment). The target ball output rate in the area 173, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is not limited to a configuration in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is lengthened, and the fluctuation duration of the game times is not limited. The average period of the above may be long. For example, various period tables for determining the variable duration of the game times by lottery may be changed according to the player's advantage. In this case, a first table group of various period tables and a second table group of various period tables are provided, and the average of the fluctuation duration of the game times when the second table group is referred to rather than the first table group. Make the period longer. Then, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value, the table group referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed from the first table group to the second table group. As a result, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times becomes long.

Further, as the above table group, a third table group is provided in which the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times when referred to is longer than that of the second table group, and the advantage of the player becomes the first reference value or more. In that case, the table group referred to when determining the variation duration of the game times is changed from the first table group to the second table group, and when the player's advantage becomes the second reference value or more, the game is played. The table group referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of the times may be changed from the second table group to the third table group. As a result, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times can be gradually lengthened according to the player's advantage.

(18) In the first to seventh and twelfth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target payout rate in the second embodiment). Depending on the target ball output rate in the area 173, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment), the fluctuation continuation period of the game times or the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. If the average period of is long, the probability of occurrence of the game times that are out of reach display may be increased accordingly. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the increase in the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times or the fluctuation duration of the game times.

(19) In the first to seventh and fifteenth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball ejection rate in the second embodiment). Target ball output rate in area 173, value of consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment When the firing cycle of the game ball is changed to a cycle longer than the first cycle according to (value), the changed long firing cycle is applied only in the opening / closing execution mode of the advantageous period, and the opening / closing in the advantageous period is applied. In a period other than the execution mode, the firing cycle of the game ball may be changed to the first cycle. On the contrary, the changed long firing cycle may be applied only in the advantageous period other than the opening / closing execution mode, and may not be applied in the opening / closing execution mode in the advantageous period.

(20) In the first to fourth embodiments, the timing at which the display of the remaining time image G3 is started is arbitrary as long as it is after the timing at which the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started. For example, the display of the remaining time image G3 may be started after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period.

(21) As a configuration for changing the gaming situation according to the player's advantage, the following configuration may be applied in addition to or in place of the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(21-1) Advantage of the player (value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173 in the second embodiment, third In the embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181, in the tenth embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the target round area 205, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64. In the configuration in which the firing cycle of the game ball is changed at least in the open / close execution mode according to the value), one round game in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode elapses the open continuation period of T seconds and the special electric power. It is configured to end when any of the conditions that Q game balls enter the winning device 32 is satisfied, and the firing cycle of the game balls is such that the player's advantage is less than a predetermined reference value. If there is, it will be t1 seconds, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value, it will be t2 seconds (t2> t1).
t1 × Q <T ≦ t2 × Q
It may be configured as follows. As a result, before the firing cycle of the game ball is changed to a long cycle according to the player's advantage, Q or more special electric trains, which is the upper limit number in each round game in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. While it is possible to enter the game ball into the winning device 32, if the firing cycle of the game ball is changed to a longer cycle according to the player's advantage, opening and closing by the high frequency winning mode In each round game in the execution mode, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 32 which is the upper limit number of Q or more. By changing the firing cycle of the game ball according to the player's advantage in this way, it is possible to change the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. Will be.

In addition, either the condition that one round game in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode elapses the opening duration of T seconds and that Q game balls enter the special electric winning device 32 are satisfied. The firing cycle of the game ball is t1 second if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, and the second is that the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value. If it is less than the reference value, it will be t2 seconds (t2> t1), and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value, it will be t3 seconds (t3> t2).
t1 × Q <t2 × Q ≦ T <t3 × Q,
Or t1 × Q <t2 × Q <T ≦ t3 × Q,
Or t1 × Q <t2 × Q <T <t3 × Q,
It may be configured as. With this configuration, up to the stage where the firing cycle of the game ball is extended by one step according to the player's advantage, Q or more, which is the upper limit in each round game in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. While it is possible to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 32, the firing cycle of the game ball is extended by two steps according to the advantage of the player, so that the high frequency winning mode is used. In each round game in the open / close execution mode, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 32 which is the upper limit number of Q or more. By changing the firing cycle of the game ball stepwise according to the player's advantage in this way, the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode is stepwise. It is possible to change to.

(21-2) In a configuration in which one round game in the open / close execution mode ends when the upper limit number of game balls enters the special electric winning device 32, the upper limit number is the player's advantage (first implementation). In the case of the embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, in the second embodiment, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173, in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181, the tenth. In the case of the embodiment, the number of target rounds may be changed according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round area 205, and in the case of the fifteenth embodiment, the value of the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64). For example, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the upper limit is 10, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the upper limit is 10. If the number is 8 and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the upper limit may be five. By varying the above upper limit number of the special electric winning device 32 in the round game according to the player's advantage in this way, the expected entry of the game ball into the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. It is possible to change the number.

(21-3) In a configuration in which one round game in the open / close execution mode ends when the upper limit period of the round game elapses, the upper limit period is the player's advantage (total round in the first embodiment). The value of the number counter 64c, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target in the tenth embodiment. The number of rounds may vary depending on the number of target rounds stored in the area 205, or the value of the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment). For example, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the upper limit period is 11 seconds, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the upper limit period is 11 seconds. Is 6 seconds, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the upper limit period may be 4 seconds. By changing the upper limit period of the round game according to the player's advantage in this way, it is possible to change the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. It will be possible.

(21-4) Two gates through which a game ball can pass are provided in the game area PA, and the game ball passes through one of the two gates after the game round resulting in a big hit is completed. Then, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the five round games, and when the game ball passes through the other gate, either the opening / closing execution mode of the two round games or the opening / closing execution mode of the ten round games is executed. It may be configured to be determined by lottery and to shift to the determined opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the two gates are arranged side by side, and the game ball that has reached the area where the two gates are provided is guided to one of the gates with a predetermined probability by a distribution member or the like, and the other. It is configured to be guided to the gate of. When the opening / closing execution mode of 10 round games occurs in the configuration, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening / closing execution mode. When at least one period of the above is longer than before and other open / close execution modes occur, the configuration may be such that the extension does not occur. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode of 5 round games or the opening / closing execution mode of 10 round games occurs, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening / closing execution mode If at least one of the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the above is longer than before, and other opening / closing execution modes occur, the extension may not occur.

(21-5) Advantage of the player (value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173 in the second embodiment, third In the embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181, in the tenth embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the target round area 205, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64. When the value) becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value, the progress of the game is stopped, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 62 is stopped, and the game ball to the predetermined entry portion (for example, the general winning opening 31) in the open / close execution mode. Decrease in the number of game balls paid out for the entry of the ball, stop the progress of the game after the end of the open / close execution mode, shift to the normal game state after the end of the open / close execution mode, and determine the degree of advantage of the player. When a plurality of stages of setting values exist, the configuration may be such that the transition to the setting value having the lowest advantage, the waiting for the start of the open / close execution mode, the initialization of the main RAM 64, and the like occur. For example, when the total number of game balls paid out to the player reaches 12,000 during the advantageous period, the progress of the game may be forcibly stopped at that point.

(21-6) Advantage of the player (value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, target payout rate in the target payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, third In the embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181, in the tenth embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the target round area 205, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64. If the value) is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the jackpot result may not be selected in the hit / fail determination process. In this case, during the period when the jackpot result is not selected in the hit / fail determination process, the high-frequency support mode is set and the frequency of entering the second operating port 34 increases, so that the number of game balls owned by the player does not have to be reduced so much. It may be possible to generate a small hit result with a high probability based on the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 34, and one or two game balls in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result. May be configured so that the player can enter the special electric winning device 32 so that the number of game balls owned by the player can be slightly increased.

(21-7) The interval period in the open / close execution mode may be set to a relatively long period such as 5 seconds. In this case, by setting the support mode to the high frequency support mode instead of the low frequency support mode in the interval period, the second operation is performed in the interval period even if the interval period is set to a relatively long period. It is possible that the game balls enter the mouth 34 frequently, and the number of game balls owned by the player does not need to be reduced so much.

(21-8) As the high-probability mode of the winning / losing lottery mode, the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode are set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result is relatively high or low, and it opens and closes during the advantageous period. The first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode may be alternately switched each time the execution mode is generated. In addition, in the winning / failing lottery mode, there is only one type of high-probability mode, and as a gaming state that is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, a continuous state is set in which the gaming state continues until the next opening / closing execution mode occurs. In the above configuration, the high probability mode and the continuous state may be alternately switched each time the opening / closing execution mode occurs in the advantageous period.

(21-9) The winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target payout rate in the second embodiment). The target ball output rate in the area 173, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the number of target rounds in the tenth embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the area 205, in the fifteenth embodiment. If there is, the configuration may be such that the value of the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64) decreases as the value increases. Further, in the configuration in which the number of times the game is executed in which the high probability mode continues is limited, the limited number of times is the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the second. In the case of the embodiment, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173, in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 and in the tenth embodiment, the target stored in the target round number area 205. The number of rounds, in the case of the fifteenth embodiment, may be configured to decrease as the value of the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 increases. Further, in the configuration in which the number of times the game is executed in which the high frequency support mode continues is limited, the limited number of times is the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the second. In the case of the embodiment, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173, in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is stored, and in the tenth embodiment, the target round number area 205 is stored. The number of target rounds, in the case of the fifteenth embodiment, may be configured to decrease as the value of the continuous villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 increases.

(21-10) Whether the period in which the special electric winning device 32 is open in the open / close execution mode is the advantage of the player (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, or the second embodiment). For example, the target payout rate in the target payout rate area 173, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the number of target rounds in the tenth embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the area 205, the th. In the case of the fifteenth embodiment, the configuration may be such that the value becomes shorter as the value of the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64 increases.

(21-11) The number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game in the opening / closing execution mode may be changed according to the player's advantage. For example, when the total number of game balls acquired by the player during the advantageous period reaches 2000, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in one round game is 2000, and the number is 2000 or more. May be configured such that the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is two times, and when the number of opening and closing is 3000 or more, the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is three times. ..

(21-12) As the number of occurrences of the jackpot result increases in the advantageous period, the frequency with which the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time in the high frequency support mode may gradually decrease. For example, as the number of occurrences of the jackpot result increases in the advantageous period, the period in which the pattern is variablely displayed on the normal map display unit 38a may become longer. Further, for example, as the number of occurrences of the jackpot result increases in the advantageous period, the period in which the second operating port 34 is opened in the high frequency support mode may be shortened.

(21-13) Instead of changing the game situation according to the player's advantage, by slowing down the payout ability of the game ball by the payout device 76, the game is played with respect to the total number of game balls consumed per hour. The ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out may be less than 2.2 times.

(22) The type of advantage of the player that triggers the change of the game situation is not limited to that of each of the above embodiments, and the following may be applied.

(22-1) A predetermined advantageous period, which is one of a high-probability mode, a gaming state, a high-frequency support mode, and a high-probability mode, which is a high-frequency support mode, is started. The game situation may be changed according to the number of game times digested from the game to the occurrence of a predetermined jackpot result. For example, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 30 games after the above-mentioned predetermined advantageous period is started, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening / closing execution mode The target period, which is at least one of the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the above, may be longer than before. As a result, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs early after the predetermined advantageous period is started, the target period can be lengthened.

Further, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 50 games after the predetermined advantageous period is started, the target period becomes the first target period longer than before, and the predetermined advantageous period is started. If a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 25 games, the target period may be a second target period longer than the first target period. As a result, the smaller the number of game times digested from the start of the predetermined advantageous period to the occurrence of the predetermined jackpot result, the longer the target period can be.

The predetermined jackpot result may be all jackpot results, or may be a jackpot result that triggers an opening / closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, and is opened / closed by the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode. It may be a jackpot result that triggers the execution mode, or it may be a jackpot result in which the winning / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is high frequency. It may be a jackpot result that is a support mode, or may be a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

(22-2) Regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode, the period in which the high frequency support mode is the advantageous period is not limited to the configuration, and the period in which the high probability mode is the high frequency support mode is the advantageous period. It may be configured. In this case, in the first embodiment, the number of round games generated in the advantageous period is measured by using the total number of rounds counter 64c, and in the third embodiment, the frequency of round games generated in the advantageous period is high. The number of times of opening / closing execution mode in which the winning mode is set is measured by using the consecutive villa counter 181.

(22-3) The opening period and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode may be changed according to the total number of game balls to be paid out. For example, when the total number of game balls to be paid out reaches 5,000, the opening period and the ending period will be extended in the first stage, and when the total number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10,000, the opening period will be extended. In addition, the ending period may be extended in the second stage. In this case, the opening period and the ending period are longer when the second stage is extended than when the first stage is extended. In addition, the extension of the first stage is performed by adding an additional period to each of the initial period of the opening period and the initial period of the ending period, and the extension of the second stage is the initial period of the opening period. And, the configuration may be performed by adding twice the additional period to each of the initial period of the ending period.

(22-4) The opening period and ending period of the open / close execution mode may change according to the total number of game balls acquired (total number of game balls paid out-total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA). good. For example, when the total number of game balls acquired reaches 2000, the opening period and the ending period will be extended in the first stage, and when the total number of game balls acquired reaches 3000, the opening period will be extended. The configuration may be such that the second stage of the ending period is extended. In this case, the opening period and the ending period are longer when the second stage is extended than when the first stage is extended. In addition, the extension of the first stage is performed by adding an additional period to each of the initial period of the opening period and the initial period of the ending period, and the extension of the second stage is the initial period of the opening period. And, the configuration may be performed by adding twice the additional period to each of the initial period of the ending period.

(23) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the changed state of various periods is canceled when the high frequency support mode ends, and the configuration in which the changed state of various periods is canceled under the following conditions is also possible. good.

(23-1) When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the various periods are changed becomes the end reference number, the changed state of the various periods may be released.

(23-2) In the second embodiment, when the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 reaches the end reference value, the state in which various periods are changed is released. May be good. In this case, by setting the end reference value to a value smaller than the first reference value, it is possible to prevent the change and cancellation of various periods from being repeated in a short time.

(23-3) A configuration in which the changed state of various periods is canceled when the number of game times executed without the predetermined opening / closing execution mode occurring after the various periods are changed reaches the end reference number. May be. In this case, the predetermined opening / closing execution mode may be all opening / closing execution modes, may be an opening / closing execution mode by a high frequency winning mode, or may be a high frequency winning mode and an opening / closing execution mode by the maximum number of rounds.

(23-4) The state in which the various periods have been changed may be canceled when the end reference period elapses after the various periods are changed.

(23-5) The state in which the various periods have been changed may be canceled when the game times can be executed in the low probability mode.

(24) When the player's advantage is reduced in addition to or in place of the configuration for changing the game situation so that the player's advantage can be lowered when the player's advantage is increased. It may be configured to change to a gaming situation that makes it possible to increase the advantage of the player. For example, when the player's advantage falls below a predetermined reference value, the firing cycle of the game ball, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the special electric power. At least one of the closing period, the interval period, and the ending period of the winning device 32 may be shorter than before, and the shortening period may be made stepwise according to the player's advantage. May be good.

(25) Advantage of the player (value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173 in the second embodiment, third embodiment) If it is, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181, if it is the tenth embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the target round area 205, if it is the fifteenth embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64). At least one of the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the open / close execution mode, the interval period of the open / close execution mode, and the ending period of the open / close execution mode is changed according to the game times. It may be configured not to change according to the above-mentioned advantage.

(26) The program of the main ROM 63 is divided into an in-area program group and an out-of-area program group, and the storage area of the main RAM 64 is divided into an in-area storage area group and an out-of-area storage area group. May be good. In this case, a program for executing a process for advancing the game is set in the program group in the area, and when the process for advancing the game is further executed, the storage area group in the area of the main RAM 64 is used. And. Further, in the first embodiment, the process for updating the total number of rounds counter 64c, and in the second embodiment, the number of balls entered area 150, the management area 160, the calculation area 171 and the write pointer 172. And the process for updating the target payout rate area 173, the process for updating the consecutive villa counter 181 of the main RAM 64 in the third embodiment, and the measurement round in the tenth embodiment. A process for updating the number counter 201, the period measurement counter 202, the management area 203, the write pointer 204, and the target round number area 205, and in the fifteenth embodiment, to update the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64. The program corresponding to the above-mentioned processing is set in the out-of-area program group, and when these processings are further executed, the out-of-area storage area group of the main RAM 64 is used. As a result, the process for updating can be clearly distinguished from the process for advancing the game. Even in a situation where processing using a program included in the in-region program group is being executed, it is possible to refer to the storage area of the out-of-area storage area group, but rewriting is not possible, and the out-of-area program group. Even in a situation where processing using the program included in is being executed, it is possible to refer to the storage area of the storage area group in the area, but it is preferable that rewriting is not possible.

(27) The hold information acquired due to the winning of the first operating port 33 and the holding information acquired due to the winning of the second operating port 34 may not be stored separately. .. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the reserved information on the second operating port 34 side is preferentially digested, and conversely, the reserved information on the first operating port 33 side is preferentially digested. It may be applied, or a configuration that is digested in the order of acquisition may be applied regardless of whether it is the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34.

(28) The hold information acquired due to the winning of the first operating port 33 is subject to the winning / failing judgment, and the holding information acquired due to the winning of the second operating port 34. May be configured in which the distribution mode of the jackpot result is the same as in the case where is the target of the hit / fail judgment.

(29) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the voice emission control device 80 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 90 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 80. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 80 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 80 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(30) The device on which the game rotation operation is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured such that the game rotation operation is executed by operating a movable decorative member. Often, the game rotation operation may be executed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit, or the game rotation operation may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above embodiments.

(31) In the above embodiment, the stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, but instead of this, the special figure display units 37a and 37b may not be provided. Often, the stop result common to the special figure display units 37a and 37b may be displayed regardless of the game result, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b. As a result, it may not be possible to identify which game result is from the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. Further, in each of the above embodiments, in the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the display of a predetermined pattern is repeated regardless of the result of the hit / miss determination and the distribution determination, so that the reach display and the reach effect are not executed and finally. Although the result of the hit / miss judgment and the distribution judgment is notified by the stop result, the special figure display units 37a and 37b may also be configured to perform the reach display and the reach effect, and the game times in which the reach effect occurs. Then, the stop result different from the game times in which the reach effect does not occur may be displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

(32) The present invention can be applied to other types of pachinko machines and the like that are different from the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, and the game ball is dropped from the upper part of the game area instead of being supplied to the game area by launching the game ball. A pachinko machine that supplies a game ball to the game area by letting it play, a pachinko machine that becomes a big hit when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine , The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as sparrow balls.

Further, the present invention is also applied to a ball circulation type pachinko machine to be supplied to the game area again by circulating the game balls discharged from the game area in the pachinko machine without being discharged from the pachinko machine. can. In the ball circulation type pachinko machine, it is prohibited for the player to touch the game ball circulated in the pachinko machine, and it is used based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry part. When the number of possible game balls is given to the player and one game ball is launched into the game area, the number of game balls that can be used by the game ball is reduced by one.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines. Further, the present invention can be applied to a medalless slot machine in which information on the number of virtual medals that can be used by a player is used as a game value instead of using a medal as a game value.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine, which is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

(33) The characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment. The configuration may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the seventh embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the ninth embodiment, and the above-mentioned ninth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the fifteenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the third embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the fifth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the 14th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 10th embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the 4th embodiment may be combined. , The characteristic configuration of the 16th embodiment may be combined with the above. Further, the configuration of the other embodiment may be applied in any combination to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Profit is given to the player (ball entry section 31) based on the occurrence of a profit-giving event (the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sections 31 to 34, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result) due to the game being performed. If the entry of the game ball into any of 34 is a profit-giving event, the game ball is given, and if the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is the profit-giving event, the opening / closing execution mode is generated). If the entry of the game ball into any of the ball portions 31 to 34 is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S209 and S217 in the main MPU 62, the payout control device 77, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. If is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S409 to S412 in the main MPU 62) and
Player's advantage (value of total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth, twelfth embodiments, target ball output rate in the second embodiment, consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) The value of, the presence / absence of an advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the presence / absence of an advantageous period in the eighth embodiment, the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode in the ninth embodiment, and the target in the tenth, eleventh, and sixteenth embodiments. Number of rounds, in the 13th and 14th embodiments, the hold information on the 2nd special figure side corresponding to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is reserved and stored, and in the 15th embodiment, consecutive villas occur. Situation determining means for determining the subsequent game status according to the flag) (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62, A function to execute a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute a final stop period selection process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute an opening period selection process in the main MPU 62, and an interval period selection process in the main MPU 62. , A function to execute an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute a cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the processes of steps S2201 to S2204 in the main MPU 62. Function to execute, a function to execute a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute a cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62, a main A function to execute the period adjustment process in the side MPU 62, a function to execute the period adjustment process in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment, and a function to execute the processes of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main side MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62, and in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S3103 to S3109 and steps S3207 to S3212 in the main MPU 62. In the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3406, step S3407 and step S3413 in the main MPU 62, and in the ninth embodiment, step S3506, step S3507 and step S in the main MPU 62. A function of executing the process of the S3603, in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing a final stop period selection process, an opening start process, a closing period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62, eleventh. In the embodiment, the function of executing the opening period selection process and the ending period selection process in the main MPU 62, in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the main side. The function of executing the processes of steps S5403 to S5407 and S5408 to S5412 in the MPU 62, the function of executing the processes of steps S5503 to S5509 and steps S5510 to S5516 in the main MPU 62 in the 14th embodiment, the fifteenth. In the 16th embodiment, the function of executing the cycle setting process, the period adjustment process, the final stop period selection process, the opening period selection process, the interval period selection process, and the ending period selection process in the main MPU 62. Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S6101 to S6106 by the MPU of the payout control device 77) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, since the profit is given to the player based on the occurrence of the profit-giving event due to the game being performed, the player performs the game while expecting the profit-giving event to occur. Become. In this case, since the subsequent game situation is determined according to the player's advantage, it is possible to appropriately grant the profit to the player.

Feature A2. Target period (in the first to third and fifteenth embodiments, the firing cycle, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode. The ending period, the fluctuation duration of the game times in the fourth embodiment, the average of the fluctuation durations of the game times in the fifth to sixth embodiments, and the firing cycle and the fluctuation duration of the game times in the seventh embodiment. Average, firing cycle in the 8th to 9th embodiments, final stop period of the game round in the 10th embodiment, opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, opening period of the special electric winning device 32, closing period of the opening / closing execution mode, opening / closing. The interval period of the execution mode, the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening period and the ending period in the eleventh embodiment, the variable continuation period of the game times in the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, and the game ball in the sixteenth embodiment. By changing the payout rate), the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can change.
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the situation-determining means varies the target period according to the player's advantage.

According to the feature A2, in a configuration in which the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit-giving event may change due to the change in the target period, the subsequent target period is changed according to the player's advantage. To. Then, by changing the target period, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event fluctuates, and as a result, the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted fluctuates. Become. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A3. The situation determining means means that when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value) or the player's advantage is the predetermined advantage (first reference). The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein when the value, the second reference value, or the third reference value is equal to or higher than that, the target period is set to be longer than before.

According to the feature A3, when the advantage of the player becomes more than the predetermined advantage or when the advantage of the player becomes more than the predetermined advantage, the target period becomes longer than before, and the target period becomes until then. The longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event, and the longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A4. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) in which the player's advantage is higher than the first predetermined advantage are set. Has been
The situation-determining means is
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, the means for making the target period longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1504, step S1603 and step S1604 in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104, step S2303 and step S2304 in the main MPU 62. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S2504, step S2703 and step S2704 in the main MPU 62, and in the tenth embodiment, step S3904, step S3905, step S4004, step S4005, step S4412 in the main MPU 62. A function to execute the processing of step S4413, step S4506, step S4511, step S4512, step S4604 and step S4605, and in the eleventh embodiment, the processing of step S4704, step S4705, step S4804 and step S4805 in the main MPU 62 is executed. The function, in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4903 in the main MPU 62, and in the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S6105 in the MPU of the payout control device 77).
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, the means for making the target period longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1506, S1606 and S1607 in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2106, S2306 and S2307 in the main MPU 62. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2706 and step S2707 in the main MPU 62, and in the tenth embodiment, step S3907, step S3908, step S4007, step S4008, step S4414 in the main MPU 62. A function to execute the processing of step S4415, step S4507, step S4513 to step S4515, step S4607 and step S4608, and in the eleventh embodiment, the processing of step S4707, step S4708, step S4807 and step S4808 in the main MPU 62 is executed. A function, in the twelfth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4905 in the main MPU 62, and in the sixteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6106 in the MPU of the payout control device 77).
The gaming machine according to the feature A3, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature A4, the target period is gradually lengthened according to the player's advantage. Therefore, as the player's advantage becomes higher, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer in a stepwise manner, and the profit is given from the predetermined timing by gradually lengthening the period. The time required for this is gradually increased. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Feature A5. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied is provided.
The profit-giving event occurs based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the game area. It is a configuration to do
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the target period is the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature A5, the predetermined period in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the advantage of the player. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the period required from one game ball entering the ball entry means to the next game ball enters fluctuates, and the profit is obtained by fluctuating the period. The period required to be granted will vary. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A6. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The game control means is an operation period determining means (mainly in the first and fourth embodiments) for determining an operation execution period (a variable continuation period of the game times or an execution period of the game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. The function of executing the processes of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, the function of executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the functions of steps S2601 to S in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S2614, the function of executing the process of steps S2901 to S2910 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and the process of steps S3001 to S3013 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. A function to execute the processing of steps S3301 to S3303 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment) is provided.
The profit-giving event is a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the target period is the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period.

According to the feature A6, the motion execution period or the average period of the motion execution period varies depending on the player's advantage. Then, the period required until the game rounding operation corresponding to the grant of profit is completed due to the fluctuation of the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period, and the profit is granted by the fluctuation of the period. The time required to complete the process will vary. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the situation-determining means changes the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period-determining means according to the player's advantage.

According to the feature A7, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the advantage of the player, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is changed. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature A8. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (in the fifth embodiment, the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188, in the sixth embodiment, the normal period table 191 and the shortened period table 192, In the seventh embodiment, an information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of the first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197) is provided.
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type according to the game situation.
The plurality of types of the period information groups are set so that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determination means is different.
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the situation determining means makes the type of the period information group referred to by the operating period determining means different according to the player's advantage.

According to the feature A8, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is different depending on the advantage of the player, so that the type of the period information group to be referred to is different. With this simple configuration, it is possible to change the average period of the operation execution period.

Feature A9. In the information storage means, as the period information group, the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment) and the first period information group. At least the second period information group (shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored.
The operation period determining means is
In the first game situation (when the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than two in the high frequency support mode), the operation execution period is referred to with reference to the first period information group. (A function to execute the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
In the second game situation (when the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is two or more in the high frequency support mode), the operation execution period is referred to with reference to the second period information group. (A function to execute the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
Equipped with
When the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the situation determining means makes the first period information group referred to in the operation period determining means even in the second gaming situation (first). 6. The gaming machine according to feature A8, characterized in that (a function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of 6).

According to the feature A9, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the second period information group, which has a shorter average period of the operation execution period than the first period information group in the operation execution determining means, should be the original. Where it is referred to, the first period information group will be referred to. As a result, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the average period of the operation execution period can be lengthened, and the game circulation operation corresponding to the granting of profit ends accordingly. The period required for making a profit becomes longer, and the period required for profit to be granted becomes longer due to the fluctuation of the period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Further, the first period information group to be referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second gaming situation when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage is the operation period determining means in the first gaming situation. It is a period information group referred to by. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated period information group in response to the case where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. It becomes possible to play an effect.

Feature A10. The situation determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to fourth embodiments). ) The gaming machine according to the feature A6.

According to the feature A10, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the player's advantage, the operation period determination mode is not changed by the operation period determination means, but the operation period is determined. The operation execution period determined by the means is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period according to the player's advantage while maintaining the operation execution period determination mode in the operation period determination means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature A11. When the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the situation determining means corresponds to the length of the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. The gaming machine according to the feature A10, which is characterized by being varied by (a function of executing a period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature A11, when the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the variation is made in an manner according to the length of the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. Is done. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period so that the appropriateness of giving profits to the player is effective.

Feature A12. The situation-determining means is
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, the means for extending the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means by an additional period (step S2802 to the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S2804) and
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, which is higher than the first predetermined advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is set to two or more natural numbers of the additional period. Means for lengthening several times (a function of executing the processes of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A10 or A11.

According to the feature A12, when the advantage of the player becomes high, the operation execution period becomes longer than before, and the operation execution period becomes longer than before, so that the game can be used to give profits. The period required for the operation to be completed will be longer than before, and the period required for the profit to be granted due to the fluctuation of the period will be longer than before. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

In addition, the operation execution period is gradually lengthened according to the player's advantage. Therefore, as the player's advantage becomes higher, the operation execution period becomes longer in stages, and the operation execution period becomes longer in stages, so that the period required until the game rounding operation corresponding to the granting of profit is completed is completed. The period becomes longer step by step, and the period required for the profit to be granted becomes longer step by step as the period becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Further, when the operation period determining means is gradually lengthened, the natural number is increased when the natural number multiple of the additional period is added to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity as compared with a configuration in which a plurality of types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Feature A13. When the operation period determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is the first operation execution period and the operation execution period. A feature characterized by varying the same period from the operation execution period in any of the second operation execution periods (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of A10 to A12.

According to the feature A13, when the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is the first operation execution period and the second operation execution period. Since the configuration is such that the same period is changed from the operation execution period regardless of the operation execution period, it is possible to simplify the configuration for changing the operation execution period.

Feature A14. The game control means executes the game rotation operation by controlling the game execution means according to an operation mode information group (data table for game rotation production) stored in advance in the specific storage means (sound light side ROM 83). To be done,
The situation determining means changes the operation execution period according to the player's advantage by processing the operation mode information group corresponding to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means (first). The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A13, characterized in that (a function of executing the processing of step S1706 and step S1707 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the embodiment).

According to the feature A14, the operation execution period is predetermined by processing the operation mode information group corresponding to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means so as to change the operation execution period according to the player's advantage. It is possible to change the operation execution period according to the player's advantage while not increasing the number of operation mode information groups stored in advance in the storage means.

Feature A15. It is a configuration in which a variable display of a pattern is performed in the game rotation operation.
As the display mode of the pattern in the variation display of the pattern, a high discrimination display mode (low-speed fluctuation display) and a low discrimination display mode (high-speed fluctuation display) in which the distinctiveness of the pattern by appearance is relatively high or low are set. ,
As an aspect of the variable display of the pattern, the state in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode continues for a predetermined period, and then the predetermined pattern is switched to the state in which the predetermined pattern is displayed in the high identification display mode. It has a mode and
The situation determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage by varying the period in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode (the operation period determining means). The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A14, characterized in that (a function of executing the processes of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment).

According to the feature A15, by varying the period displayed in the low identification display mode, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage. There is no need to store information for determining the mode of variable display of the pattern corresponding to each of the patterns whose execution period may vary. Further, when the operation execution period is changed, the period in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode is changed. Therefore, the change display mode of the patterns is processed according to the change in the operation execution period. Even if it does, it will be difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort.

Feature A16. Special transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result) (function to execute the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) Equipped with
The game control means is a means (main side) that causes an operation result corresponding to the case where the transition to the special gaming state occurs after the end of the game rotation operation and the operation result corresponding to the end of the game rotation operation. It is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S506 and step S703 in the MPU 62, and a function of executing the processing of step S1703 in the sound light side MPU 82).
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage (third reference value), the situation-determining means sets the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which is to shift to the special gaming state, to a predetermined length. Long-term selection means for making the period longer than the above period (the function of executing the process of step S604 of the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, the process of step S2204 of the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A6 to A15, which comprises a function of executing the above-mentioned function, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2604 of the main MPU 62).

According to the feature A16, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which is to shift to the special gaming state, is longer than the period of the predetermined length. Become. As a result, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required for the special gaming state to occur can be prevented from becoming less than the predetermined length period, which is short. It is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in time.

Feature A17. The long-term selection means is characterized in that when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period that shifts to the special gaming state is set to the longest period in the operation execution period. The gaming machine according to the feature A16.

According to the feature A17, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which shifts to the special gaming state when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, is the longest period in the operation execution period. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required for the special gaming state to occur can be surely lengthened, and an excessively large profit can be given to the player in a short time. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is given.

Feature A18. The longest period is a period longer than the longest period in the operation execution period that can be determined by the operation period determining means when the advantage of the player is less than the predetermined advantage A17. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A18, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game turning operation that shifts to the special gaming state is set, and the player's advantage is the predetermined advantage. If it is less than, the operation execution period is longer than the longest operation execution period that can be selected. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required for the special gaming state to occur can be surely lengthened, and the player's advantage becomes the predetermined advantage. It is possible to have a different operation execution period than when it is less than.

Feature A19. When the game rounding operation is performed for the longest period, the notification (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the game rounding operation is completed is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A17 or A18, which comprises means (sound light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92).

According to the feature A19, when the game rotation operation is performed for the longest period, the notification is executed so that the player can recognize the remaining period until the game rotation operation is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the fact that the game rotation operation is not completed when the game rotation operation having the longest operation execution period is performed. Become.

Feature A20. A predetermined gaming state (5R high-accuracy jackpot result, 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or small hit result) that is an advantageous gaming state for the player and has a lower advantage than the special gaming state. ) Is equipped with a predetermined transfer means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) to transfer the game state.
The situation-determining means sets the operation execution period of the game-turning operation, which is to shift to the predetermined gaming state, even if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, characterized in that it can be a period of length.

According to the feature A20, when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation that shifts to the special gaming state is set to be longer than the period of the predetermined length. On the other hand, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation that shifts to the predetermined game state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player and has a lower advantage than the special game state, is of a predetermined length. It can be a period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time while suppressing the excessive extension of the operation execution period.

Feature A21. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The profit-giving event is a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
It is a configuration in which the variation display of the pattern is performed in the game round operation, and the stop display period (final stop period of the game round) is displayed in a state where the predetermined stop pattern is displayed after the variation display of the pattern is performed. It is a configuration in which the stop display is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A20, wherein the target period is the stop display period.

According to the feature A21, the stop display period varies according to the player's advantage. Then, the period required for the game circulation operation corresponding to the grant of profit to be completed fluctuates due to the fluctuation of the stop display period, and the period required for the profit to be granted fluctuates due to the fluctuation of the period. do. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A22. It is equipped with a special transition means (a function to execute the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) that shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player.
The special gaming state includes a first period in which the predetermined profit-giving event can occur (a period in which the special electric winning device 32 is open) and a second period in which the predetermined profit-giving event does not occur (opening period, interval). Period, ending period), including,
The target period is the second period (a function of executing the selection process of the final stop period of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments, a function of executing the selection process of the opening period, and the selection process of the interval period. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A21, which is characterized in that the function of executing the above-mentioned function and the function of executing the selection process of the ending period).

According to the feature A22, the second period in the special gaming state varies depending on the player's advantage. Then, as the second period fluctuates, the period required until the first period in which a predetermined profit-giving event can occur changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player. Further, since the first period itself does not change, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while keeping the expected number of occurrences of a predetermined profit-giving event in the special gaming state unchanged.

Feature A23. In the special gaming state, the second period is configured to occur more than once.
The gaming machine according to feature A22, wherein the situation-determining means varies from each of the plurality of second periods according to the player's advantage.

According to the feature A23, since each of the plurality of second periods in the special gaming state changes according to the player's advantage, it is possible to increase the number of periods to be changed, and one second period. It is possible to increase the total fluctuation amount of the second period in the special gaming state without excessively increasing the fluctuation amount of.

Feature A24. The situation-determining means makes the target period longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state (steps S3105 to S3105 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment). The function of executing the processes of steps S3106 and S3108 to S3109, the function of executing the process of step S3407 of the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, and the process of step S3507 of the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment are executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A23.

According to the feature A24, the target period is longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period in which the advantage of the player is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Then, since the target period is longer than the normal gaming state, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer than the normal gaming state, and the longer period causes the profit from the predetermined timing. The period required until is granted is longer than in the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A25. There are at least the first transition opportunity (5R high accuracy jackpot result) and the second transition opportunity (10R high accuracy jackpot result) as the transition opportunity of the advantageous period.
It is more advantageous for the player to have the second transition opportunity than to have the first transition opportunity.
The situation-determining means is
Means for making the target period longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (processing of steps S3105 to S3106 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment). Function to execute) and
Means for making the target period longer in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (main in the seventh embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S3108 to step S3109 of the side MPU 62) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A24, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A25, in the configuration in which the target period is longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal gaming state, the advantageous period generated by the transition opportunity with higher advantage is longer. Become. Therefore, the more advantageous period is generated by the transition opportunity with higher advantage, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is given. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A26. There are at least the first transition trigger (5R high probability jackpot result) and the second transition trigger (10R high probability jackpot result) as the transition trigger of the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal gaming state.
It is more advantageous for the player to have the second transition opportunity than to have the first transition opportunity.
The situation-determining means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (first). 7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A25, characterized in that (a function of executing the processes of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109) of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of 7.

According to the feature A26, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to generate the second transition opportunity than to generate the first transition opportunity, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal gaming state. Is longer in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity than in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. Then, the longer the target period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event, and the longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted. .. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A27. The first transition opportunity is to shift to the first special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature A25 or A26, wherein the second transition opportunity is to shift to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.

According to the feature A27, the higher the advantage of the special gaming state that triggers the transition of the advantageous period, the longer the target period in the advantageous period can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A28. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A27, wherein the situation determining means cancels the situation in which the target period is extended when the advantageous period ends.

According to the feature A28, it is possible to limit the situation where the target period is extended within the range of one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target period from being excessively extended.

Feature A29. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A28, wherein the situation-determining means does not change the target period set when the advantageous period starts until the advantageous period ends.

According to the feature A29, since the target period does not change in the middle of the advantageous period, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature A30. A lottery means (a function to execute the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) based on the occurrence of the lottery opportunity, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the transition result corresponding to the shift of the gaming state to the special gaming state, the special transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (start of special electric power in the main MPU 62). Function to execute processing) and
In the special gaming state, the lottery by the lottery means is not performed.
As the gaming state in which the lottery opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The advantageous period is described in any one of the features A24 to A29, which is a period in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without sandwiching the normal gaming state. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature A30, when the situation favorable to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the target period is extended.

Feature A31. The situation-determining means is
Based on the predetermined game history due to the game being played, the predetermined history information (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth, twelfth, and 14th embodiments, and in the second embodiment). Grasp the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the number of target rounds in the tenth, eleventh, and sixteenth embodiments, and the value of the consecutive villa generation flag in the fifteenth embodiment). Information grasping means (total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth, twelfth, and fourteenth embodiments, target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and consecutive villa counter in the third embodiment. In the 181st, 10th, 11th, and 16th embodiments, the target round number area 205, and in the 15th embodiment, the consecutive villa generation flag).
Based on the predetermined history information, the information correspondence determining means for determining the subsequent game situation (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62, executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62). Function to execute the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the final stop period selection process in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the opening period selection process in the main MPU 62, the interval period in the main MPU 62. Function to execute the selection process of, the function to execute the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, the function of step S2201 to step S2204 in the main MPU 62. The function of executing the process, the function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, and the process of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62 are executed. A function, a function of executing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, a function of executing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment, and a process of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment. A function to execute, a function to execute the processes of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment, a final stop period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment, a process at the start of opening, and a closure in the tenth embodiment. A function to execute a period selection process and an ending period selection process, a function to execute an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment, and a main side MPU 62 in the twelfth embodiment. The function of executing the period adjustment process in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S5403 to S5407 and steps S5408 to S5412 in the main MPU 62 in the thirteenth embodiment, and steps S5503 to the main MPU 62 in the fourteenth embodiment. A function for executing the processes of step S5509 and steps S5510 to S5516, in the fifteenth embodiment, the cycle setting process, the period adjustment process, the final stop period selection process, the opening period selection process, and the interval period selection in the main MPU 62. Function to execute processing and selection processing of ending period, In the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S6101 to S6106 by the MPU of the payout control device 77) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A30.

According to the feature A31, the predetermined history information is grasped based on the predetermined game history due to the game being played, and the subsequent game situation is determined based on the grasped predetermined history information. As a result, since the subsequent game situation changes according to the predetermined game history, it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A32. The gaming machine according to feature A31, wherein the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the profit given to the player.

According to the feature A32, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the profit given to the player, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, since the subsequent gaming situation changes according to the profit given to the player, it is possible to appropriately give the profit to the player.

Feature A33. The profit-giving means grants a game value that makes it possible to play a game as the profit.
The gaming machine according to feature A31 or A32, wherein the predetermined history information varies according to the gaming value given to the player.

According to the feature A33, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to the game value given to the player, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the game value given to the player, so that it becomes possible to appropriately give the profit to the player.

Feature A34. The predetermined history information is information corresponding to the ratio of the number of the game values given to the player to the number of the game values used by the player (the target payout rate in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to the feature A33.

According to the feature A34, the subsequent game situation is determined according to the ratio of the number of game values given to the player to the number of game values used by the player. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the increase in the game value owned by the player, so that it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A35. The expected value of giving the profit is higher than the first predetermined period (other than the round game in the first, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, and sixteenth embodiments, and other than the opening / closing execution mode in the third embodiment). 2 Period generation means (main side in the first embodiment) for generating a predetermined period (round game in the first, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, and sixteenth embodiments, opening / closing execution mode in the third embodiment). The function of executing the processing of steps S912 and S1107 in the MPU 62, the function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, and the processing of steps S4402 to S4416 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The gaming machine according to feature A31, wherein the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period.

According to the feature A35, in the configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the expected value of giving profit is higher than the first predetermined period, the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. It is determined. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation changes according to the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period, so that it is possible to appropriately grant profits to the player.

Feature A36. The gaming machine according to feature A35, wherein the information grasping means updates the predetermined history information before the end of the second predetermined period when it is determined that the second predetermined period occurs. ..

According to the feature A36, when it is determined that the second predetermined period occurs, the predetermined history information is updated before the end of the second predetermined period, so that the player's profit can be swiftly changed. It is possible to change the game situation after that.

Feature A37. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA), and
Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided so that it can be switched between the open state and the closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S912, S1003, and step S1107 in the main MPU 62) for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state. ,
A special transition means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A35 or A36, wherein the second predetermined period is a predetermined period during which the variable ball-entry means is in the open state in the special gaming state.

According to the feature A37, in the configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to the predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is opened in the special gaming state, the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the number of occurrences of the variable ball entry means in the open state in the special game state, so that the profit can be appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to do.

Feature A38. As the special gaming state, the number of times during which the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result) and the period in which the variable ball-entry means is in the open state occurs is the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature A37, characterized in that at least a second special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result) exists.

According to the feature A38, in the configuration in which the number of times the period during which the variable ball entry means is open differs between the first special game state and the second special game state, the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state. The predetermined history information changes according to the predetermined period. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player, as compared with the configuration in which the predetermined history information is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state.

Feature A39. As the predetermined period, a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls to enter the variable ball-entry means is relatively large and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls is relatively small are relatively small. And at least exist,
The gaming machine according to feature A37 or A38, wherein the second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period, but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to the feature A39, the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls to enter the variable ball entry means is relatively large, while the game to the variable ball entry means. The predetermined history information does not change depending on the number of occurrences of the predetermined second period in which the expected number of balls to enter is relatively small. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player.

Feature A40. Predetermined determination means (steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode) based on the occurrence of the determination opportunity. Function to execute the processing of) and
A special transition that shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means being a predetermined transition result (5R high accuracy jackpot result, 10R low accuracy jackpot result or 10R high accuracy jackpot result). Means (a function to execute the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) and
A number storage means (ream villa counter 181) that stores information corresponding to a specific number of occurrences, and
The number of times so that the specific number of occurrences increases when the special gaming state occurs or occurs based on the fact that the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result in an advantageous period advantageous to the player. An update means for updating the information of the storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2407 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) and
Equipped with
The game according to any one of features A1 to A39, wherein the situation determining means determines a subsequent gaming situation based on the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number stored in the number storage means. Machine.

According to the feature A40, the specific number of occurrences, which is the number of times the special gaming state has occurred based on the predetermined transition result in the advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the specific number of occurrences. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation will change according to the number of times the special gaming state has occurred based on the predetermined transition result in the advantageous period, so that the profit will be appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to do.

Feature A41. The special transition means shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the fact that the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes a specific transition result (2R high accuracy big hit result or small hit result).
The renewal means is a number storage means that increases the specific number of occurrences even if the special gaming state occurs based on the fact that the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the specific transition result in the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to feature A40, which is characterized in that information is not updated.

According to the feature A41, the occurrence of the special gaming state may or may not be reflected in the specific number of occurrences, depending on the type of the transition result in the predetermined determination means that triggered the transition of the special gaming state. .. As a result, it is possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determination means that affect the game situation to the predetermined transition results, and it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A42. The special gaming state that shifts based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the specific transition result is the special gaming state that shifts based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to feature A41, which is characterized in that the advantage of the player is lower than that of the player.

According to the feature A42, even if a special gaming state having a low advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special gaming state is not reflected in the specific number of occurrences. This makes it possible to determine the subsequent gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state having a high advantage in the advantageous period.

Feature A43. In the special gaming state, the determination by the predetermined determination means is not performed.
As the gaming state in which the determination trigger can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The advantageous period is a period in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without sandwiching the normal gaming state.
The renewal means executes the process of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment of the means for renewing the number of times storage means so that the specific number of occurrences becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A40 to A42, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature A43, the specific number of occurrences is measured within the range of one advantageous period. This makes it possible to set the gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state within the range of one advantageous period.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features A1 to A43, the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, and the features H1 to H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied.
A profit (entry) to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the game area. If the entry of the game ball into any of the ball portions 31 to 34 is a profit-giving event, the game ball is given, and if the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are the profit-giving events, the opening / closing execution mode is generated). Means (If the entry of the game ball into any of the entry units 31 to 34 is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S209 and S217 in the main MPU 62, the payout control device 77, and the jackpot result are supported. If the game times to be played is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S409 to S412 in the main MPU 62) and
Cycle changing means for changing the predetermined cycle (a function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments, and in the seventh embodiment, steps S3105, S3108, and S3211 in the main MPU 62. A function to execute the process, a function to execute the process of step S3407 and step S3413 in the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S3507 and step S3603 in the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment, In the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, since the profit is given to the player based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the game area enters the predetermined ball entry means, the player enters the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. You will play the game while expecting. In this case, the predetermined cycle in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is appropriately changed, and by changing the predetermined cycle, the frequency of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time is also changed. This makes it possible to appropriately impart the game value to the player.

Feature B2. The cycle changing means is the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, the target payout rate in the second embodiment, and the continuous in the third embodiment. The predetermined cycle is changed according to the value of the villa counter 181, the presence / absence of an advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the presence / absence of an advantageous period in the eighth embodiment, and the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode in the ninth embodiment). The gaming machine according to the feature B1.

According to the feature B2, the predetermined period in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the advantage of the player. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the frequency of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time also changes, and the period required for the profit to be granted due to the fluctuation of the ball entry frequency also changes. Will be done. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature B3. In the cycle changing means, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value), or when the player's advantage becomes a predetermined advantage (first reference). The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein when the value is equal to or higher than the value, the second reference value, or the third reference value), the predetermined period is set to be longer than before.

According to the feature B3, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage or the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the predetermined cycle becomes longer than before, and the predetermined cycle is up to that point. The longer the ball, the lower the frequency of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time, and the lower the frequency of the ball, the longer the period required for the profit to be granted. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B4. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) in which the player's advantage is higher than the first predetermined advantage are set. Has been
The cycle changing means is
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, the means for making the predetermined cycle longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1504, step S1603 and step S1604 in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104, step S2303 and step S2304 in the main MPU 62. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S2504, step S2703 and step S2704 in the main MPU 62) and
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, the means for making the predetermined cycle longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1506, step S1606 and step S1607 in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2106, step S2306 and step S2307 in the main MPU 62. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2706 and step S2707 in the main MPU 62) and
The gaming machine according to the feature B3, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature B4, the predetermined cycle is gradually lengthened according to the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the advantage of the player, the lower the frequency of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time, and the profit is given by the stepwise decrease of the frequency of the ball. The time required for this is gradually increased. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Feature B5. The cycle changing means causes the predetermined cycle to be longer than the normal gaming state in an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state (step S3105 and step S3105 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment). It is characterized by a function of executing the process of step S3108, a function of executing the process of step S3407 of the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3507 of the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4.

According to the feature B5, the predetermined cycle becomes longer than that of the normal gaming state in the advantageous period in which the advantage of the player is higher than that of the normal gaming state. Then, since the predetermined cycle becomes longer than the normal game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means per unit time becomes lower than that of the normal game state, and it is profitable that the frequency of entering the ball becomes lower. The period required until is granted is longer than in the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B6. There are at least the first transition opportunity (5R high accuracy jackpot result) and the second transition opportunity (10R high accuracy jackpot result) as the transition opportunity of the advantageous period.
It is more advantageous for the player to have the second transition opportunity than to have the first transition opportunity.
The cycle changing means is
Means for making the predetermined cycle longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (process of step S3105 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment) is executed. Function) and
Means for making the predetermined cycle longer in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (main in the seventh embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S3108 of the side MPU 62) and
The gaming machine according to the feature B5, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which the predetermined cycle is longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state, the predetermined cycle becomes longer as the advantageous period generated by the transition trigger with the higher advantage becomes longer. Become. Therefore, the more advantageous the period generated by the transition opportunity with higher advantage, the longer the period required for the profit to be granted. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B7. There are at least the first transition trigger (5R high probability jackpot result) and the second transition trigger (10R high probability jackpot result) as the transition trigger of the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal gaming state.
It is more advantageous for the player to have the second transition opportunity than to have the first transition opportunity.
The cycle changing means makes the predetermined cycle in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the predetermined cycle in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (first). 7. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that (a function of executing the processes of steps S3105 and S3108 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment).

According to the feature B7, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to generate the second transition opportunity than to generate the first transition opportunity, a predetermined cycle in an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal gaming state. Is longer in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity than in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. Then, as the predetermined cycle becomes longer, the frequency of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entering means per unit time also decreases, and as the frequency of entering the ball decreases, the period required for the profit to be granted becomes longer. It will be. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B8. The first transition opportunity is to shift to the first special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, wherein the second transition opportunity is to shift to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.

According to the feature B8, the higher the advantage of the special gaming state that triggers the transition of the advantageous period, the longer the predetermined cycle in the advantageous period can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, wherein the cycle changing means cancels the situation in which the predetermined cycle is extended when the advantageous period ends.

According to the feature B9, it is possible to limit the situation where the predetermined cycle is extended within the range of one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive extension of a predetermined cycle from occurring.

Feature B10. A lottery means (a function to execute the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) based on the occurrence of the lottery opportunity, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the transition result corresponding to the shift of the gaming state to the special gaming state, the special transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (start of special electric power in the main MPU 62). Function to execute processing) and
In the special gaming state, the lottery by the lottery means is not performed.
As the gaming state in which the lottery opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The advantageous period is described in any one of features B5 to B9, characterized in that at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without sandwiching the normal gaming state. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature B10, when the situation favorable to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the predetermined cycle is extended.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features B1 to B10, the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, and the features H1 to H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA), and
Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided so that it can be switched between the open state and the closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S912, S1003, and step S1107 in the main MPU 62) for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state. ,
A special transition means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed, and
Equipped with
In the special gaming state, there is a first predetermined period (other than the round game in the open / close execution mode) in which the variable ball entry means is maintained in the closed state, and a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. The second predetermined period (round game in the open / close execution mode), which is the period during which the variable ball entry means is terminated in the closed state based on the condition that the end condition is satisfied in the situation where the variable ball entry means is in the open state, It is a configuration that occurs,
This gaming machine is
The information grasping means for grasping the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of the predetermined second predetermined period (total round number counter 64c, tenth, eleventh, and sixteenth in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments). Target round number area 205) in the embodiment and
Based on the predetermined number of occurrences, a means for determining the number of times of subsequent game situations (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62, executing a cycle setting process in the main MPU 62). Function to execute, a function to execute a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute a final stop period selection process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute an opening period selection process in the main MPU 62, an interval period in the main MPU 62. Function to execute the selection process of, the function to execute the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment, and the function to execute the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment. The function of executing the process of steps S2901 to S2907, the function of executing the process of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment, and the selection process of the final stop period in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment. , A function to execute a process at the start of opening, a closing period selection process, and an ending period selection process, a function to execute an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment, In the 16th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6101 to S6106 by the MPU of the payout control device 77) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is opened in the special gaming state. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is opened in the special game state, so that the profit can be appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to.

Feature C2. As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result) and the second special gaming state in which the number of times the second predetermined period occurs is different from the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that at least a state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result) exists.

According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which the number of times the second predetermined period occurs differs between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is opened in the special gaming state. The subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player, as compared with the configuration in which the subsequent gaming situation is determined according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state.

Feature C3. As the second predetermined period, a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls to enter the variable ball-entry means is relatively large and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls is relatively small are relatively small. ) And at least exist,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the predetermined second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period, but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to the feature C3, the predetermined number of occurrences varies depending on the number of occurrences in the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls to enter the variable entry means is relatively large, while the game to the variable entry means. The predetermined number of occurrences does not change depending on the number of occurrences in the predetermined second period in which the expected number of balls to enter is relatively small. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player.

Feature C4. Target period (in the first embodiment, the firing cycle, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, the fourth In the embodiment, the fluctuation duration of the game times, and in the fifth to sixth embodiments, the average of the fluctuation durations of the game times) fluctuates, so that the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event is It is a variable configuration,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the number-of-times correspondence determining means changes the target period according to the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to the feature C4, in the configuration in which the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can be changed due to the change of the target period, the subsequent target period is set according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Will be fluctuated. Then, as the target period changes, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature C5. The means for determining the number of occurrences is a case where the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value) or the predetermined number of occurrences is a predetermined reference value (first reference value). , 2nd reference value or 3rd reference value) or more, the gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that the target period is made longer than before.

According to the feature C5, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period exceeds the predetermined reference value or the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period exceeds the predetermined reference value, the target period becomes longer than before, and the target Since the period is longer than before, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature C6. As the predetermined reference value, at least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) which is a value larger than the first reference value are set.
The means for determining the number of times is
When the predetermined number of occurrences becomes the first reference value or more, or when the predetermined number of occurrences becomes the first reference value or more, the means for making the target period longer than before (first implementation). The function of executing the processes of step S1504, step S1603, and step S1604 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment) and
When the predetermined number of occurrences becomes the second reference value or more, or when the predetermined number of occurrences becomes the second reference value or more, the means for making the target period longer than before (first implementation). The function of executing the processes of step S1506, step S1606 and step S1607 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to the feature C5, which is characterized in that it is provided with.

According to the feature C6, the target period is gradually lengthened according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Therefore, as the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period increases, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer in stages. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Feature C7. The supply means supplies the game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C6, wherein the target period is the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature C7, the predetermined period in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature C8. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The game control means is an operation period determining means (mainly in the first and fourth embodiments) for determining an operation execution period (a variable continuation period of the game times or an execution period of the game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. The function of executing the processes of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, the function of executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the functions of steps S2601 to S in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S2614, the function of executing the process of steps S2901 to S2910 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and the process of steps S3001 to S3013 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. A function to execute the processing of steps S3301 to S3303 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment) is provided.
The profit-giving event is a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C7, wherein the target period is the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period.

According to the feature C8, the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period varies depending on the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Then, the period required until the game rounding operation corresponding to the grant of profit is completed due to the fluctuation of the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period, and the profit is granted by the fluctuation of the period. The time required to complete the process will vary. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature C9. The number-of-times correspondence determining means changes the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period-determining means according to the predetermined number of occurrences (in the fifth embodiment, the processes of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main MPU 62 are executed. The gaming machine according to the feature C8, which comprises a function of performing the processing, and in the sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62).

According to the feature C9, when the operation execution period of the game rounding operation is changed according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is changed. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature C10. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (in the fifth embodiment, the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188, in the sixth embodiment, the normal period table 191 and the shortened period table 192, In the seventh embodiment, an information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of the first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197) is provided.
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type according to the game situation.
The plurality of types of the period information groups are set so that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determination means is different.
The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the number-of-times correspondence determining means makes the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means different according to the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to the feature C10, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is configured to be different according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, so that the type of the period information group to be referred to can be selected. It is possible to change the average period of the operation execution period by a simple configuration of making them different.

Feature C11. In the information storage means, as the period information group, the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment) and the first period information group. At least the second period information group (shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored.
The operation period determining means is
In the first game situation (when the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than two in the high frequency support mode), the operation execution period is referred to with reference to the first period information group. (A function to execute the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
In the second game situation (when the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is two or more in the high frequency support mode), the operation execution period is referred to with reference to the second period information group. (A function to execute the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
Equipped with
When the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the number-of-times correspondence determining means causes the operation period determining means to refer to the first period information group even in the second gaming situation (first). The gaming machine according to feature C10, characterized in that (a function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of 6).

According to the feature C11, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or more than the predetermined reference value, the second period information group having an average period of the operation execution period shorter than that of the first period information group in the operation execution determining means is used. The first period information group will be referred to where it would normally be referred to. As a result, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the average period of the operation execution period can be lengthened, and the game rounding operation corresponding to the granting of profits is accompanied by this. The period required for the end of the period becomes longer, and the period required for the profit to be granted becomes longer due to the fluctuation of the period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Further, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the first period information group to be referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second game situation is the operation period in the first game situation. It is a period information group referred to by a determination means. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated period information group in response to the case where the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or more than the predetermined reference value. It is possible to achieve an excellent effect.

Feature C12. The number-of-times correspondence determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the predetermined number of occurrences (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first and fourth embodiments). ) The gaming machine according to the feature C8.

According to the feature C12, when the operation execution period of the game rounding operation is changed according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the operation execution period determination mode by the operation period determining means is not changed, but the operation. The operation execution period determined by the period determining means is changed. This makes it possible to change the operation execution period according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period while maintaining the mode of determining the operation execution period in the operation period determining means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C12, the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, and the features H1 to H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. A function to execute the processing of steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62 for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode). )When,
The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. Function to execute the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above, display side MPU92), and
When the determination result by the predetermined determination means is a predetermined transition result (10R low accuracy jackpot result or 10R high accuracy jackpot result) and the gaming rotation operation is completed, the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state. Special migration means to migrate (function to execute special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The game control means is an operation period determining means for determining an operation execution period (variation continuation period of the game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed (in the first embodiment, steps S601 to S614 in the main MPU 62). A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2614 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment. In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, a function of executing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the main MPU 62) is provided.
When the operation period determination means is in a specific situation, the operation execution period of the gaming rotation operation corresponding to the determination result by the predetermined determination means is the predetermined transition result is longer than the period of the predetermined length. Long-term selection means to be a period (a function of executing the process of step S604 of the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2204 of the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, first In the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2604 of the main MPU 62, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S5403 to S5407 and steps S5408 to S5412 in the main MPU 62, the fourteenth embodiment. The gaming machine is characterized in that it includes a function of executing the processes of steps S5503 to S5509 and steps S5510 to S5516 in the main MPU 62).

According to the feature D1, in the case of a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game rounding operation is a period of a predetermined length, in which the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result and the transition to the special gaming state is performed. It will be a longer period than. As a result, in a specific situation, it is possible to prevent the period required for the special gaming state to occur triggered by the predetermined transition result from becoming less than the predetermined length period, and in a short time. It is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific situation is a case where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (third reference value).

According to the feature D2, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result, so that the game is shifted to the special gaming state. The operation execution period is longer than the predetermined length period. As a result, if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required for the special gaming state to occur triggered by the predetermined transition result will be less than or equal to the predetermined length period. It is possible to prevent the player from having it, and it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature D3. In the case of the specific situation, the long-term selection means sets the operation execution period of the gaming rotation operation corresponding to the determination result by the predetermined determination means as the predetermined transition result to the longest period in the operation execution period. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, in the case of a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game rounding operation, which shifts to the special gaming state by the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the predetermined transition result, is the operation execution period. It will be the longest. As a result, it is possible to surely lengthen the period required for a special gaming state to occur triggered by a predetermined transition result in a specific situation, and an excessively large profit is given to the player in a short time. It is possible to suppress the loss.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the longest period is a period longer than the longest period in the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means when the specific situation is not the case.

According to the feature D4, the game rotation operation that shifts to the special gaming state when the determination result by the predetermined determination means that shifts to the special gaming state in a specific situation becomes the predetermined transition result. The operation execution period is longer than the longest operation execution period selected when the situation is not specific. As a result, it is possible to surely lengthen the period required for a special gaming state to occur triggered by a predetermined transition result in a specific situation, and an operation execution period different from that in a non-specific situation. It becomes possible to.

Feature D5. When the game rounding operation is performed for the longest period, the notification (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the game rounding operation is completed is executed. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, which comprises means (sound / light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92).

According to the feature D5, when the game rotation operation is performed for the longest period, the notification is executed so that the player can recognize the remaining period until the game rotation operation is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the fact that the game rotation operation is not completed when the game rotation operation having the longest operation execution period is performed. Become.

Feature D6. A predetermined gaming state (5R high-accuracy jackpot result, 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or small hit result) that is an advantageous gaming state for the player and has a lower advantage than the special gaming state. ) Is equipped with a predetermined transfer means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) to transfer the game state.
The operation period determining means is characterized in that the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which is to shift to the predetermined gaming state, can be a period of the predetermined length even in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5.

According to the feature D6, in the case of a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game rounding operation, which shifts to the special gaming state when the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result, is longer than the period of the predetermined length. Although it is considered to be a long period of time, the operation execution of the game rotation operation that shifts to a predetermined game state which is a game state which is advantageous for the player and has a lower advantage than the special game state. The period can be a period of a predetermined length. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time while suppressing the excessive extension of the operation execution period.

For the configurations of features D1 to D6, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, and features H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. Predetermined determination means (steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode by high frequency winning mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of the determination opportunity. Function to execute the processing of) and
A special transition that shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means being a predetermined transition result (5R high accuracy jackpot result, 10R low accuracy jackpot result or 10R high accuracy jackpot result). Means (a function to execute the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) and
A number storage means (ream villa counter 181) that stores information corresponding to a specific number of occurrences, and
The number of times so that the specific number of occurrences increases when the special gaming state occurs or occurs based on the fact that the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result in an advantageous period advantageous to the player. An update means for updating the information of the storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2407 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) and
A specific correspondence determining means for determining a subsequent game situation based on the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number stored in the number storage means (a function of executing a cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). The function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, the specific number of occurrences, which is the number of times the special gaming state has occurred based on the predetermined transition result in the advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the specific number of occurrences. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation will change according to the number of times the special gaming state has occurred based on the predetermined transition result in the advantageous period, so that the profit will be appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to do.

Feature E2. The special transition means shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the fact that the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes a specific transition result (2R high accuracy big hit result or small hit result).
The renewal means is a number storage means that increases the specific number of occurrences even if the special gaming state occurs based on the fact that the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the specific transition result in the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized in that information is not updated.

According to the feature E2, the occurrence of the special gaming state may or may not be reflected in the specific number of occurrences, depending on the type of the transition result in the predetermined determination means that triggered the transition of the special gaming state. .. As a result, it is possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determination means that affect the game situation to the predetermined transition results, and it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature E3. The special gaming state that shifts based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the specific transition result is the special gaming state that shifts based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to feature E2, which is characterized in that the advantage of the player is lower than that of the gaming machine.

According to the feature E3, even if a special gaming state having a low advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special gaming state is not reflected in the specific number of occurrences. This makes it possible to determine the subsequent gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state having a high advantage in the advantageous period.

Feature E4. In the special gaming state, the determination by the predetermined determination means is not performed.
As the gaming state in which the determination trigger can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The advantageous period is a period in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without sandwiching the normal gaming state.
The renewal means executes the process of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment of the means for renewing the number of times storage means so that the specific number of occurrences becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature E4, the specific number of occurrences is measured within the range of one advantageous period. This makes it possible to set the gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state within the range of one advantageous period.

Feature E5. The target period (the firing cycle in the third embodiment, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode) changes. As a result, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can change.
The game according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the specific correspondence determining means changes the target period according to the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number of times stored in the number of times storage means. Machine.

According to the feature E5, in a configuration in which the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit-giving event may change due to the change in the target period, the target thereafter is according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period. The period is variable. Then, as the target period changes, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature E6. The specific response determining means is used when the specific number of occurrences is equal to or higher than a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value) or when the specific number of occurrences is a predetermined reference value (first reference value). , 2nd reference value or 3rd reference value) or more, the gaming machine according to feature E5, characterized in that the target period is made longer than before.

According to the feature E6, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period exceeds the predetermined reference value or when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period exceeds the predetermined reference value, the target period is longer than before. As the target period becomes longer and the target period becomes longer than before, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature E7. As the predetermined reference value, at least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) which is a value larger than the first reference value are set.
The specific response determination means is
When the specific number of occurrences becomes the first reference value or more, or when the specific occurrence number becomes the first reference value or more, the means for making the target period longer than before (third implementation). The function of executing the processes of step S2504, step S2703 and step S2704 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment) and
When the specific number of occurrences becomes the second reference value or more, or when the specific occurrence number becomes the second reference value or more, the means for making the target period longer than before (third implementation). The function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2706 and step S2707 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature E7, the target period is gradually lengthened according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period. Therefore, as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period increases, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer in stages. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Feature E8. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied is provided.
The profit-giving event occurs based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the game area. It is a configuration to do
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, wherein the target period is the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature E8, the predetermined cycle in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special game state in the advantageous period. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature E9. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The game control means is an operation period determining means (in the third embodiment, in the main MPU 62) that determines an operation execution period (a variable continuation period of the game times or an execution period of the game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. A function to execute the processes of steps S2601 to S2614) is provided.
The profit-giving event is a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E8, wherein the target period is the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period.

According to the feature E9, the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period varies depending on the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period. Then, the period required until the game rounding operation corresponding to the grant of profit is completed due to the fluctuation of the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period, and the profit is granted by the fluctuation of the period. The time required to complete the process will vary. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature E10. The specific correspondence determining means changes the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means according to the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number stored in the number storage means (in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized in that the main MPU 62 has a function of executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2907, and in the sixth embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing the processes of steps S3005 to S3009. ..

According to the feature E10, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is changed. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature E11. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (in the fifth embodiment, the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188, in the sixth embodiment, the normal period table 191 and the shortened period table 192, In the seventh embodiment, an information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of the first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197) is provided.
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type according to the game situation.
The plurality of types of the period information groups are set so that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determination means is different.
The specific correspondence determining means is characterized in that the type of the period information group referred to by the operating period determining means is made different based on the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number stored in the number storage means. The gaming machine described in E10.

According to the feature E11, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is configured to be different according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period, so that the period information group to be referred to It is possible to change the average period of the operation execution period by a simple configuration of different types.

Feature E12. In the information storage means, as the period information group, the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment) and the first period information group. At least the second period information group (shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored.
The operation period determining means is
In the first game situation (when the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than two in the high frequency support mode), the operation execution period is referred to with reference to the first period information group. (A function to execute the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
In the second game situation (when the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is two or more in the high frequency support mode), the operation execution period is referred to with reference to the second period information group. (A function to execute the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
Equipped with
When the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the specific response determining means makes the operation period determining means refer to the first period information group even in the second gaming situation (first). The gaming machine according to feature E11, characterized in that (a function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of 6).

According to the feature E12, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or more than the predetermined reference value, the second period information in which the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group in the operation execution determining means. Where the group would normally be referenced, the first period information group will be referenced. As a result, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value, the average period of the operation execution period can be lengthened, and the gaming times corresponding to the provision of profits accordingly. The period required for the operation to be completed becomes long, and the period required for the profit to be granted due to the fluctuation of the period becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Further, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value, the first period information group to be referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second gaming situation is in the first gaming situation. It is a period information group referred to by the operation period determination means. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated period information group in response to the case where the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value. It is possible to achieve such an excellent effect.

Feature E13. The specific correspondence determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number stored in the number storage means (first and fourth implementations). The gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized in that (a function of executing a period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment).

According to the feature E13, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is not changed. , The operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period while maintaining the operation execution period determination mode in the operation period determination means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features E1 to E13, the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, and the features H1 to H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Profit is given to the player (ball entry section 31) based on the occurrence of a profit-giving event (the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sections 31 to 34, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result) due to the game being performed. If the entry of the game ball into any of 34 is a profit-giving event, the game ball is given, and if the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is the profit-giving event, the opening / closing execution mode is generated). If the entry of the game ball into any of the ball portions 31 to 34 is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S209 and S217 in the main MPU 62, the payout control device 77, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. If is a profit-giving event, the main MPU 62 is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S409 to S412).
By fluctuating the target period (the average of the firing cycle and the fluctuation duration of the game times in the seventh embodiment), the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can be changed. ,
There are at least the first transition trigger (5R high probability jackpot result) and the second transition trigger (10R high probability jackpot result) as the transition trigger of the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal gaming state.
In this gaming machine, the target period is determined so that the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity and the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity are different. A gaming machine comprising means (in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S3103 to S3109 and steps S3207 to S3212 in the main MPU 62).

According to the feature F1, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than that in the normal gaming state is the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity and the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity. It will be a different period. Then, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event fluctuates due to the difference in the target period, and the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted fluctuates due to the fluctuation of the period. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature F2. It is more advantageous for the player to have the second transition opportunity than to have the first transition opportunity.
The target period determining means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment is executed).

According to the feature F2, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to have the second transition opportunity than to have the first transition opportunity, the target period in the advantageous period in which the advantage of the player is higher than that of the normal gaming state. Is longer in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity than in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. Then, the longer the target period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event, and the longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted. .. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature F3. The first transition opportunity is to shift to the first special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the second transition opportunity is to shift to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.

According to the feature F3, the higher the advantage of the special gaming state that triggers the transition of the advantageous period, the longer the target period in the advantageous period can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Features F4. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the target period determining means sets the target period to a period corresponding to the normal gaming state when the advantageous period ends.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to limit the situation in which the target period is changed within the range of one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target period from being excessively extended.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the target period determining means does not change the target period set when the advantageous period starts until the advantageous period ends. ..

According to the feature F5, since the target period does not change in the middle of the advantageous period, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F6. A lottery means (a function to execute the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) based on the occurrence of the lottery opportunity, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the transition result corresponding to the shift of the gaming state to the special gaming state, the special transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (start of special electric power in the main MPU 62). Function to execute processing) and
In the special gaming state, the lottery by the lottery means is not performed.
As the gaming state in which the lottery opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The advantageous period is described in any one of the features F1 to F5, which is a period in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without sandwiching the normal gaming state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature F6, if the situation favorable to the player continues, the situation in which the target period is changed can be continued.

Feature F7. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied is provided.
The profit-giving event occurs based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the game area. It is a configuration to do
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the target period is the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature F7, the predetermined cycle in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the type of the transition trigger to the advantageous period. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature F8. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The game control means is an operation period determining means (in the third embodiment, in the main MPU 62) that determines an operation execution period (a variable continuation period of the game times or an execution period of the game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. A function to execute the processes of steps S2601 to S2614) is provided.
The profit-giving event is a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the target period is the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period.

According to the feature F8, the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period varies depending on the type of the transition trigger to the advantageous period. Then, the period required until the game rounding operation corresponding to the grant of profit is completed due to the fluctuation of the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period, and the profit is granted by the fluctuation of the period. The time required to complete the process will vary. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Features F9. The target period determining means determines the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operating period determining means, that the target period and the second transition opportunity in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity have occurred. The gaming machine according to the feature F8, which is characterized by differentiating from the advantageous period based on the above.

According to the feature F9, when the operation execution period of the game rounding operation is changed according to the type of the transition trigger to the advantageous period, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is changed. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature F10. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (in the fifth embodiment, the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188, in the sixth embodiment, the normal period table 191 and the shortened period table 192, In the seventh embodiment, an information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of the first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197) is provided.
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type according to the game situation.
The plurality of types of the period information groups are set so that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determination means is different.
The target period determining means uses the type of the period information group referred to by the operating period determining means to generate the target period and the second transition trigger in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger. The gaming machine according to feature F9, which is characterized in that it differs from the advantageous period based on the above.

According to the feature F10, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is different depending on the type of the transition trigger to the advantageous period, so that the type of the period information group to be referred to is different. It is possible to change the average period of the operation execution period by a simple configuration of making them different.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, and the features H1 to H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A function to execute the processing of steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62 for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode). )When,
The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. Function to execute the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above, display side MPU92), and
When the determination result by the predetermined determination means is a predetermined transition result (10R low accuracy jackpot result or 10R high accuracy jackpot result) and the gaming rotation operation is completed, the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state. Special migration means to migrate (function to execute special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The game control means is an operation period determining means (mainly in the first and fourth embodiments) for determining an operation execution period (a variable continuation period of the game times or an execution period of the game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. The function of executing the processes of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, the function of executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the functions of steps S2601 to S in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment. It has a function to execute the process of step S2614).
In this gaming machine, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is set to the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth embodiments, and the target payout in the second embodiment. It is provided with a period variation means (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to fourth and twelfth embodiments) that varies according to the rate and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature G1, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation determined by the operation period determining means varies according to the advantage of the player. Then, the period required until the game rotation operation corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state is completed changes due to the fluctuation of the operation execution period, and until the special gaming state occurs due to the fluctuation of the period. The required period will fluctuate. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Further, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the player's advantage, the operation period determination means is determined instead of the operation execution period determination mode by the operation period determination means. The operation execution period is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period according to the player's advantage while maintaining the operation execution period determination mode in the operation period determination means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature G2. When the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the period changing means corresponds to the length of the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. The gaming machine according to feature G1, which is characterized in that it is varied by (a function of executing a period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature G2, when the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the variation is made in an manner according to the length of the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. Is done. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period so that the appropriateness of giving profits to the player is effective.

Feature G3. The period variation means is
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage (first reference value), the means for extending the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means by an additional period (main in the fourth embodiment). (Function to execute the processing of steps S2802 to S2804 of the side MPU 62) and
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage (second reference value), which is higher than the first predetermined advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is added. A means for extending the period by two or more natural numbers (a function of executing the processes of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or G2.

According to the feature G3, when the advantage of the player becomes high, the operation execution period becomes longer than before, and the operation execution period becomes longer than before, so that the game can be used to give profits. The period required for the operation to be completed will be longer than before, and the period required for the profit to be granted due to the fluctuation of the period will be longer than before. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

In addition, the operation execution period is gradually lengthened according to the player's advantage. Therefore, as the player's advantage becomes higher, the operation execution period becomes longer in stages, and the operation execution period becomes longer in stages, so that the period required until the game rounding operation corresponding to the granting of profit is completed is completed. The period becomes longer step by step, and the period required for the profit to be granted becomes longer step by step as the period becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Further, when the operation period determining means is gradually lengthened, the natural number is increased when the natural number multiple of the additional period is added to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity as compared with a configuration in which a plurality of types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Features G4. When the period changing means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is the first operation execution period and the operation execution period. A feature characterized by varying the same period from the operation execution period in any of the second operation execution periods (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G3.

According to the feature G4, when the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is the first operation execution period and the second operation execution period. Since the configuration is such that the same period is changed from the operation execution period regardless of the operation execution period, it is possible to simplify the configuration for changing the operation execution period.

Feature G5. The game control means executes the game rotation operation by controlling the game execution means according to an operation mode information group (data table for game rotation production) stored in advance in the specific storage means (sound light side ROM 83). To be done,
The period changing means changes the operation execution period according to the player's advantage by processing the operation mode information group corresponding to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means (first). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that (a function of executing the processing of step S1706 and step S1707 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the embodiment).

According to the feature G5, the operation execution period is predetermined by processing the operation mode information group corresponding to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means so as to change the operation execution period according to the player's advantage. It is possible to change the operation execution period according to the player's advantage while not increasing the number of operation mode information groups stored in advance in the storage means.

Feature G6. It is a configuration in which a variable display of a pattern is performed in the game rotation operation.
As the display mode of the pattern in the variation display of the pattern, a high discrimination display mode (low-speed fluctuation display) and a low discrimination display mode (high-speed fluctuation display) in which the distinctiveness of the pattern by appearance is relatively high or low are set. ,
As an aspect of the variable display of the pattern, the state in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode continues for a predetermined period, and then the predetermined pattern is switched to the state in which the predetermined pattern is displayed in the high identification display mode. It has a mode and
The period changing means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage by changing the period in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode (the operation period changing means). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that (a function of executing the processes of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment).

According to the feature G6, the operation is configured to change the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage by changing the period displayed in the low identification display mode. There is no need to store information for determining the mode of variable display of the pattern corresponding to each of the patterns whose execution period may vary. Further, when the operation execution period is changed, the period in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode is changed. Therefore, the change display mode of the patterns is processed according to the change in the operation execution period. Even if it does, it will be difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features G1 to G6, the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, and the features H1 to H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A first predetermined target that can affect the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time (in the first to fourth embodiments, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the game times) One of the final stop period, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period, any of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation continuation period of the game times in the seventh embodiment, and the final stop period of the game times in the tenth embodiment. , The opening period, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period and the ending period, any of the opening period and the ending period in the eleventh embodiment, and any of the opening period and the ending period in the fifteenth embodiment. The content of the launch cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period) is described in the player's advantage (first and fourth embodiments). Then, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the target payout rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the presence or absence of an advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the tenth and eleventh embodiments. The first variable means (in the first to fourth embodiments, the cycle setting process, the period adjustment process, and the final) are changed according to the number of target rounds in the embodiment and the consecutive villa generation flag in the fifteenth embodiment. A function of executing a stop period selection process, an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process, and in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S3105 to S3109 in the main MPU 62. In the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the final stop period selection process, the opening start process, the closing period selection process, and the ending period selection process in the main MPU 62, and in the eleventh embodiment, the opening in the main MPU 62. A function to execute a period selection process and an ending period selection process, in the fifteenth embodiment, a cycle setting process, a period adjustment process, a final stop period selection process, an opening period selection process, and an interval period selection in the main MPU 62. Function to execute processing and selection processing of ending period) and
A second predetermined target that can affect the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time (in the first to sixth embodiments, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the game times) One of the final stop period, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period, any of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation continuation period of the game times in the seventh embodiment, and the final stop period of the game times in the tenth embodiment. , The opening period, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period and the ending period, any of the opening period and the ending period in the eleventh embodiment, and any of the opening period and the ending period in the fifteenth embodiment. The second variation that changes the content of the launch cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period, the interval period, or the ending period) according to the player's advantage. Means (in the first to fourth embodiments, the cycle setting process, the period adjustment process, the final stop period selection process, the opening period selection process, the interval period selection process, and the ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 are executed. Function, in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S3105 to S3109 in the main MPU 62, in the tenth embodiment, the final stop period selection process, the opening start process, and the closing period of the main MPU 62. A function to execute a selection process and an ending period selection process, a function to execute an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment, and a cycle in the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment. A function that executes setting processing, period adjustment processing, final stop period selection processing, opening period selection processing, interval period selection processing, and ending period selection processing),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, the content of the first predetermined event that can affect the frequency of giving the profit to the player per unit time is changed according to the advantage of the player, and the content per unit time is changed. The content of the second predetermined event that can affect the frequency of giving profits to the player varies according to the player's advantage. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player. In particular, since the contents of a plurality of events, the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event, are changed according to the player's advantage, the frequency of giving the profit to the player per unit time is set to the player's advantage. When it is changed accordingly, it becomes easier to adjust the degree of fluctuation.

Feature H2. In the first variable means, the advantage of the player becomes the first target advantage (first reference value), or the advantage of the player becomes the first target advantage (first reference value). Based on this, the content of the first predetermined object is changed.
In the second variable means, the advantage of the player becomes the second target advantage (second reference value), or the advantage of the player becomes the second target advantage (second reference value). The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the content of the second predetermined object is changed based on the above.

According to the feature H2, the content of the first predetermined target is changed based on the fact that the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage or the first target advantage, and the player's advantage becomes the first. 2 The content of the second predetermined target is changed based on the fact that the target advantage is reached or the second target advantage is reached. As a result, it is possible to gradually change the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time according to the player's advantage, while suppressing the frequent fluctuation of the content of one predetermined event. Will be.

Feature H3. In the first variable means, the advantage of the player becomes the third target advantage (third reference value), or the advantage of the player becomes the third target advantage (third reference value). Based on this, the content of the first predetermined object is changed.
The second variable means is the second predetermined object based on the fact that the advantage of the player becomes the third target advantage or the advantage of the player becomes the third target advantage. The gaming machine according to feature H2, which is characterized in that the contents are varied.

According to the feature H3, the content of the first predetermined target is changed based on the fact that the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage or the first target advantage, and the player's advantage becomes the first. 2 In a configuration in which the content of the second predetermined target is changed based on the target advantage or the second target advantage, the player's advantage becomes the third target advantage or the second. 3 Both the content of the first predetermined target and the content of the second predetermined target are changed based on the target advantage. This makes it possible to abruptly change the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time as needed.

Features H4. The first predetermined target is the first target period, and the period required from the predetermined timing to the provision of the predetermined profit may change due to the fluctuation of the first target period.
The second predetermined object is a second target period, and is characterized in that the period required from the predetermined timing to the provision of the predetermined profit can be changed by changing the second target period. The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to H3.

According to the feature H4, the first target period that can affect the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time varies according to the player's advantage, and the player per unit time. The second target period, which can affect the frequency of granting profits to the player, varies according to the player's advantage. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player. In particular, since a plurality of periods, the first target period and the second target period, vary according to the player's advantage, the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time is determined according to the player's advantage. When it is changed, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of fluctuation.

Feature H5. In the first variable means, when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the first target advantage (first reference value), or the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the first target advantage (first reference value). If so, the first target period should be longer than before.
In the second variable means, when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the second target advantage (second reference value) which is more advantageous than the first target advantage, or the advantage of the player is the said. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the second target period is made longer than before when the second target advantage is higher than that.

According to the feature H5, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first target advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first target advantage, the first target period becomes longer than before, and the player's advantage The second target period becomes longer than before when is equal to or higher than the second target advantage or when is equal to or higher than the second target advantage. Then, as the target period becomes longer, the frequency of giving profits to the player becomes lower. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time. In addition, it is possible to gradually reduce the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time according to the player's advantage, while suppressing the frequent extension of one target period. Become.

Feature H6. The first variable means is when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first target advantage and the third target advantage (third reference value) which is more advantageous than the second target advantage, or the above. When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third target advantage, the first target period is set to be longer than before (processing of steps S4706 to S4708 of the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment). Function to execute),
In the second variable means, when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the third target advantage, or when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the third target advantage, the second target period is set. The gaming machine according to feature H5, characterized in that it is made longer than before (a function of executing the processes of steps S4806 to S4808 of the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment).

According to the feature H6, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first target advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first target advantage, the first target period becomes longer than before, and the player's advantage In a configuration in which the second target period is longer than before when the second target advantage or higher or the second target advantage or higher, the player's advantage becomes the third target advantage or higher. In the case of the third target advantage or higher, both the first target period and the second target period become longer than before. This makes it possible to sharply reduce the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time as needed.

Feature H7. The first variable means sets the first target period to a predetermined variable target period (the first in the tenth embodiment) when a predetermined variable trigger of the first target period occurs based on the advantage of the player. The common extension period or the second common extension period, the second common extension period in the eleventh embodiment) is varied.
The second variable means is to change the second target period by the predetermined variable target period when a predetermined change trigger of the second target period occurs based on the advantage of the player. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of H4 to H6.

According to the feature H7, the fluctuation for a predetermined fluctuation target period is performed regardless of whether the first target period is changed or the second target period is changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the required storage capacity as compared with the configuration in which the variable target period is prepared corresponding to each of the first target period and the second target period.

Feature H8. It is equipped with a special transition means (a function to execute the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) that shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player.
The special gaming state includes a first period (a period in which the special electric winning device 32 is open) in which a predetermined granting opportunity for the profit can occur, and a second period (opening period, closed) in which the predetermined granting opportunity does not occur. Period, interval period, ending period), including,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H4 to H7, wherein both the first target period and the second target period are the second period.

According to the feature H8, the second period in the special gaming state varies depending on the player's advantage. Then, as the second period fluctuates, the period required until the first period in which a predetermined profit-giving event can occur changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player. Further, since each of the plurality of second periods in the special gaming state fluctuates according to the player's advantage, it is possible to increase the number of periods to be fluctuated, and the amount of fluctuation in one second period can be increased. It is possible to increase the total fluctuation amount of the second period in the special gaming state without making it excessively large.

Feature H9. It is equipped with a special transition means (a function to execute the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) that shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player.
The special gaming state includes a first period (a period in which the special electric winning device 32 is open) in which a predetermined granting opportunity for the profit can occur, and a second period (opening period, closed) in which the predetermined granting opportunity does not occur. Period, interval period, ending period), including,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H4 to H7, wherein one of the first target period and the second target period is the first period, and the other is the second period.

According to the feature H9, both the first period and the second period in the special gaming state vary depending on the player's advantage. This makes it possible to adjust each of the first period and the second period to an appropriate period according to the player's advantage.

Features H10. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. Function to execute the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above, display side MPU92), and
Special transition means for transitioning the game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) after the game rotation operation is completed in the situation where the special transition condition is satisfied (function to execute the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62). When,
Equipped with
One of the features H4 to H7, wherein one of the first target period and the second target period is a period included in the gaming round, and the other is a period included in the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature H10, both the period of the game times and the period of the special game state vary depending on the advantage of the player. This makes it possible to adjust each of the period of the game times and the period of the special game state to an appropriate period according to the player's advantage.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features H1 to H10, the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, and the features H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. Special transition means (function to execute special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) that shifts the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The player's advantage (first, fourth to sixth) is set as the predetermined target period (opening period, period when the special electric winning device 32 is open, closing period, interval period, ending period) included in the special gaming state. In the embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, in the second embodiment, the target ball output rate, in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 and in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the number of target rounds, the fifteenth. In the first to sixth embodiments, the opening period selection process, the interval period selection process, and the ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 are performed. A function to execute, a function to execute a process at the start of opening in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment, a function to execute a closing period selection process and an ending period selection process in the tenth embodiment, and a function to execute an opening period selection in the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment. A function to execute a process and an ending period selection process, a function to execute an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, the player can play the game while expecting the game state to shift to the special game state because the game state can shift to the special game state which is advantageous to the player. .. In this case, since the predetermined target period included in the special gaming state varies according to the player's advantage, the period required to digest the special gaming state varies according to the player's advantage. Become. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature I2. The special gaming state includes a grant target period (a period in which the special electric winning device 32 is open) in which a predetermined grant trigger for profit can occur, and a non-grant target period (opening period, closed) in which the predetermined grant trigger does not occur. Period, interval period, ending period), including,
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the predetermined target period is the non-granting target period.

According to the feature I2, the non-granting period in the special gaming state varies depending on the player's advantage. Then, as the non-granting period changes, the period required until the granting period in which a predetermined granting opportunity of profit can occur changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature I3. As the non-granting period, any of the first non-granting period (opening period, closing period, interval period, ending period) and the second non-granting period (opening period, closing period, interval period, ending period). Including)
The predetermined period variation means is
A first predetermined period variable means for varying the first non-granting target period according to the player's advantage (in the first to fourth embodiments, an opening period selection process and an interval period selection process in the main MPU 62). And a function to execute the ending period selection process, in the tenth embodiment, the process at the start of opening in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the closing period selection process and the ending period selection process, and in the eleventh embodiment, the main A function to execute an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the side MPU 62, and a function to execute an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment. )When,
A second predetermined period variable means for varying the second non-granting target period according to the player's advantage (in the first to fourth embodiments, an opening period selection process and an interval period selection process in the main MPU 62). And a function to execute the ending period selection process, in the tenth embodiment, the process at the start of opening in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the closing period selection process and the ending period selection process, and in the eleventh embodiment, the main A function to execute an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the side MPU 62, and a function to execute an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment. )When,
The gaming machine according to the feature I2, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature I3, the first non-granting target period is changed according to the player's advantage, and the second non-granting target period is changed according to the player's advantage. Then, as the first non-granting target period and the second non-granting target period fluctuate, the period required until the granting target period in which a predetermined profit granting opportunity can occur changes. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player. In particular, since a plurality of non-granting target periods, that is, the first non-granting target period and the second non-granting target period, vary according to the player's advantage, the frequency of granting profits to the player per unit time is determined by the game. It becomes easier to adjust the degree of fluctuation when the fluctuation is made according to the advantage of the person.

Feature I4. In the first predetermined period variation means, the advantage of the player becomes the first target advantage (first reference value), or the advantage of the player becomes the first target advantage (first reference value). The first non-granting period is changed based on the above.
In the second predetermined period variation means, the advantage of the player is the second target advantage (second reference value), or the advantage of the player is the second target advantage (second reference value). The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the second non-granting target period is changed based on the above.

According to the feature I4, the first non-granting target period is changed based on the fact that the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage or the first target advantage, and the player's advantage becomes the first. 2 The second non-granting period is changed based on the fact that the target advantage is reached or the second target advantage is reached. As a result, while suppressing the frequent fluctuation of one non-granting period, the period required until the granting period in which a predetermined profit granting opportunity can occur is determined according to the player's advantage. It can be changed step by step.

Feature I5. In the first predetermined period variation means, the advantage of the player becomes the third target advantage (third reference value), or the advantage of the player becomes the third target advantage (third reference value). The first non-granting period is changed based on the above.
The second predetermined period variation means is based on the fact that the advantage of the player becomes the third target advantage or the advantage of the player becomes the third target advantage. The gaming machine according to feature I4, which is characterized in that the grant target period is varied.

According to the feature I5, the first non-granting target period is changed based on the fact that the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage or the first target advantage, and the player's advantage becomes the first. 2 In a configuration in which the second non-granting target period is changed based on the target advantage or the second target advantage, the player's advantage becomes the third target advantage or the second. 3 Both the first non-granting period and the second non-granting period are changed based on the target advantage. As a result, it is possible to abruptly change the period required until the period for which a predetermined profit is granted can occur, as necessary.

Feature I6. In the first predetermined period variation means, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage (first reference value), or the advantage of the player is the first target advantage (first reference value). ) Or more, make sure that the first non-granting period is longer than before.
The second predetermined period variation means is when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the second target advantage (second reference value) which is more advantageous than the first target advantage, or the advantage of the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein when is equal to or higher than the second target advantage, the second non-granting target period is made longer than before.

According to the feature I6, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage or becomes higher than the first target advantage, the first non-granting target period becomes longer than before, and the player's advantage becomes longer. When the advantage is equal to or higher than the second target advantage, or when the advantage is equal to or higher than the second target advantage, the second non-granting target period becomes longer than before. Then, as the non-granting period becomes longer, the period required until the granting period in which a predetermined profit granting opportunity can occur becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time. In addition, while suppressing the frequent extension of one non-granting period, the period required until the granting period in which a predetermined profit granting opportunity may occur depends on the player's advantage. It is possible to make it longer in stages.

Feature I7. The first predetermined period variation means is a case where the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the first target advantage and the third target advantage (third reference value) which is more advantageous than the second target advantage. Alternatively, when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the third target advantage, the first non-granting target period is set to be longer than before (steps S4706 to step of the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment). Function to execute the processing of S4708),
The second predetermined period variation means is the second non-when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the third target advantage or when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the third target advantage. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the grant target period is made longer than before (a function of executing the processes of steps S4806 to S4808 of the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment).

According to the feature I7, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage or becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage, the first non-granting target period becomes longer than before, and the player's advantage becomes longer. In a configuration in which the second non-granting target period is longer than before when the advantage becomes equal to or higher than the second target advantage, the player's advantage becomes the third target advantage. Both the first non-granting period and the second non-granting period become longer than before when the degree is higher or higher than the third target advantage. As a result, it is possible to sharply lengthen the period required until the period for which a predetermined profit is granted can occur.

Feature I8. The first predetermined period changing means changes the first non-granting target period to a predetermined changing target period (10th) when a predetermined fluctuation trigger of the first non-granting target period occurs based on the advantage of the player. The first common extension period or the second common extension period in the embodiment of the above, and the second common extension period in the eleventh embodiment) are varied.
The second predetermined period change means changes the second non-grant target period by the predetermined change target period when a predetermined change trigger of the second non-grant target period occurs based on the advantage of the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I7, which is characterized in that it is to be made to play.

According to the feature I8, the fluctuation for a predetermined fluctuation target period is performed regardless of whether the first non-grant target period is changed or the second non-grant target period is changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the required storage capacity as compared with the configuration in which the variable target period is prepared corresponding to each of the first non-granting target period and the second non-granting target period.

Feature I9. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA), and
Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided so that it can be switched between the open state and the closed state,
The processing of the variable entry control means (steps S912, S1003 and step S1107 in the main MPU 62) for executing the variable entry control for switching the variable entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state in the special gaming state. Function to execute) and
In the special game state, the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs, a predetermined upper limit period elapses, and the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit number. Round generation means for generating a round game that ends based on the satisfaction of any of the conditions for reaching (in the first to sixth embodiments, steps S903 to S907, step S1103 and step S1104 in the main MPU 62). (Function to execute the process of step S4402 to step S4416 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth and eleventh embodiments) and the function of executing the process of
Equipped with
The grant target period is a period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state.
The non-granting target period is a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state.
The predetermined target period is the non-grant target period that occurs in the round game.
The predetermined period changing means is described in any one of features I2 to I8, wherein the predetermined target period is changed according to the advantage of the player without changing the upper limit period in the round game. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature I9, the non-granting period, which is the period during which the variable ball entry means is closed in the round game, is changed according to the player's advantage without changing the upper limit period in the round game. As a result, the grant target period, which is the period during which the variable ball entry means is open in the round game, is changed. This makes it possible to make the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable entry means in the round game appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Feature I10. As the round game, a predetermined round game in which the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs a plurality of times (a round in an open / close execution mode triggered by a 5R high accuracy jackpot result in the tenth and eleventh embodiments). Game) exists,
The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the predetermined target period is the non-grant target period sandwiched between a plurality of grant target periods in the predetermined round game.

According to the feature I10, in the configuration in which the variable ball entry control occurs a plurality of times in the predetermined round game, the non-granting target period sandwiched between the plurality of granting target periods in the predetermined round game becomes the player's advantage. It varies according to. Then, such a change in the non-granting target period is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game does not change, and as a result, the granting target period that occurs after the non-granting target period changes. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable entry means in a predetermined round game appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Feature I11. The predetermined period variation means is characterized in that the predetermined target period is lengthened when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage or when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to the feature I10.

According to the feature I11, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the non-grant target period sandwiched between the plurality of grant target periods in the predetermined round game becomes longer. .. Then, the extension of the non-granting target period is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, and as a result, the granting target period that occurs after the non-granting target period is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature I12. The gaming machine according to feature I11, wherein the expected number of gaming balls entering the variable ball-entry means in the predetermined round game is reduced by lengthening the predetermined target period in the predetermined round game. ..

According to the feature I12, the extension of the non-granting period is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, and as a result, the granting period generated after the non-granting period is shortened. Based on this, the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable entry means in a predetermined round game is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature I13. The predetermined period changing means changes the number of times the non-granting target period is set in the round game according to the player's advantage without changing the upper limit period in the round game. The gaming machine according to any one of features I9 to I12, wherein the predetermined target period is varied according to the advantage of the player.

According to the feature I13, the upper limit period in the round game is not changed, and the number of times the grant target period is set across the non-grant target period in the round game is changed according to the player's advantage. The predetermined target period will change according to the advantage of the person. Further, in the configuration, the length of one grant target period that occurs in the round game may also change. Then, as the length of the period to be granted once changes, the ease of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means also changes. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable entry means in the round game appropriate according to the advantage of the player.

Feature I14. The predetermined period changing means changes the upper limit period in the round game when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage or when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to feature I13, wherein the predetermined target period is lengthened by increasing the number of times the non-grant target period is set across the non-grant target period in the round game.

According to the feature I14, when the player's advantage becomes the predetermined advantage or more, or when the player's advantage becomes the predetermined advantage or more, the number of times that the non-granted period is sandwiched between the non-granted period is increased in the round game. Then, by increasing the number of times such a grant target period is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, the predetermined target period in the round game becomes longer, and as a result, the grant target period in the round game is extended. Becomes shorter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature I15. The gaming machine according to feature I14, wherein in the round game, the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable ball entry means in the round game is reduced by lengthening the predetermined target period.

According to the feature I15, the extension of the non-granting period is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, and as a result, the granting period generated after the non-granting period is shortened. Based on this, the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable entry means in a predetermined round game is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

For the configurations of features I1 to I15, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, and features H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A display means (design display device 41) for displaying variable patterns and
The variation display of the pattern is started based on the occurrence of the start trigger, and the variation display of the pattern is terminated based on the occurrence of the end trigger. A game control means for controlling the display means so that a variable display of a pattern is performed (a function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 on the main MPU 62, and processing of steps S1401 to S1406 on the sound light side MPU 82). Function, display side MPU92),
Means for granting the predetermined profit to the player after the game round corresponding to the grant of the predetermined profit (opening / closing execution mode) (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The design is configured to stand by in a predetermined standby area (standby areas SA1 to SA9) by setting a standby timing in a situation where the variation display of the pattern is performed.
The game machine has a pre-end period (in the first to sixth, sixth, tenth, eleventh, and fifteenth embodiments) included in the period from the standby timing in the game round to the end of the game round. The final stop period of the game times, the period during which the waiting display is executed in the twelfth embodiment) is set to the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, the first. According to the target payout rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the number of target rounds in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, and the consecutive villa generation flag in the fifteenth embodiment). Pre-end variable means to be varied (the function of executing the selection process of the final stop period in the main MPU 62 in the first to sixth, tenth, eleventh, and fifteenth embodiments, and in the twelfth embodiment, in the main MPU 62. A gaming machine characterized by having a function (function to execute a period adjustment process).

According to the feature J1, the pre-end period included in the period from the standby timing in the game round to the end of the game round varies according to the player's advantage. Then, the period required until the game round is completed changes due to the change in the pre-end period, and the frequency of granting the predetermined profit per unit time also changes due to the change in the period. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player. Further, in the case of the configuration, since the period before the end, which is the period after the pattern is waited in the standby area, is changed, the content of the variation display of the pattern is not complicatedly changed as described above. It is possible to produce excellent effects.

Feature J2. In the game round, after the symbol is waited in the standby area, the symbol waiting in the standby area is displayed as the final stop, and the game round is terminated in the state where the final stop is displayed. ,
The feature J1 characterized in that the period before the end is the period during which the final stop display is performed (the final stop period of the game rounds in the first to sixth, sixth, tenth, eleventh, and fifteenth embodiments). The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J2, when the period of the game round is changed according to the advantage of the player, the period in which the final stop display of the pattern is performed may be changed, so that the period of the game round is set by the player. It is possible to reduce the processing load for changing according to the advantage of.

Feature J3. In the game round, the pattern is waited in the waiting area based on the standby timing, the waiting display is performed in the waiting pattern, and then the waiting area is waiting. The pattern is displayed as the final stop, and the game round is terminated in the state where the final stop is displayed.
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the period before the end is a waiting period in which the waiting display is performed (a period in which the waiting display in the twelfth embodiment is executed).

According to the feature J3, when the period of the game round is changed according to the advantage of the player, the period in which the waiting display is performed before the final stop display of the pattern in the game round is performed is changed. In this case, since the period after the pattern is kept waiting in the standby area is changed, the content of the variation display of the pattern is complicatedly changed when the period of the game times is changed according to the player's advantage. It is not necessary, and since the period before the final stop display is performed is configured to change, even if the period of the game round is long, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game round has not been completed yet. It will be possible.

Features J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the period during which the final stop display is performed does not change according to the player's advantage.

According to the feature J4, the period during which the final stop display of the pattern is performed is not changed according to the player's advantage, so that the pattern is configured to change the period of the game times according to the player's advantage. It is possible to keep the period during which the final stop display is performed.

Feature J5. A period determining means (a function of executing the processes of steps S601 to S614 in the main MPU 62) for determining the execution period of the game times, and a first control means (main MPU 62) having the pre-end variable means.
A second control means (sound / light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92) having the game control means and controlling the display means based on the information transmitted by the first control means.
Equipped with
The first control means is
Means for transmitting start information (variable command) including information on the execution period determined by the period determination means when the game round is started (a function of executing the process of step S615 in the main MPU 62) and
Means for transmitting final stop information (final stop command) instructing to start the final stop display in the game round (a function of executing the process of step S706 in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The game control means sets the display means so that the variation display of the pattern is started based on the reception of the start information, and the final stop display is started based on the reception of the final stop information. To control
The pre-end variable means is characterized in that the period from the elapse of the execution period determined by the period determining means until the final stop information is transmitted is varied according to the advantage of the player. Features The gaming machine according to J3 or J4.

According to the feature J5, the execution period of the game times is determined by the first control means, the period of the game times is changed according to the advantage of the player, and the display means is controlled by the second control means. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load to a plurality of control means. Further, when the game round is started, the start information including the information of the execution period is transmitted from the first control means, and the second control means starts the variable display of the pattern based on the reception of the start information. The second control means is configured to start the final stop display of the pattern based on the transmission of the final stop information from the first control means. As a result, the execution control of the variation display of the pattern is performed in the second control means so as to follow the information transmitted from the first control means. In this case, the period from the elapse of the execution period determined by the period determining means to the transmission of the final stop information varies according to the player's advantage. As a result, it is possible to change the period of the game times according to the player's advantage only by adjusting the timing of transmitting the final stop information.

Features J6. In the pre-end variable means, when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the target advantage (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value), or the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the target advantage. In this case, the final stop information is transmitted after the predetermined extension period has elapsed after the execution period determined by the period determination means has elapsed (the main MPU 62 in the twelfth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature J5, characterized in that (a function of executing the processes of steps S4903, S4905 and S4907).

According to the feature J6, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the target advantage or becomes equal to or higher than the target advantage, the waiting period becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature J7. The game control means is
Based on the reception of the start information, the display mode information group (data table for game rotation effect, data table for display) corresponding to the information of the execution period included in the start information is stored in the first storage means. A means for reading from (sound light side ROM 83, display side ROM 93) to a second storage means (sound light side RAM 84, display side RAM 94) (a function of executing the process of step S5004 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment). ,
A means (display side MPU 92) for controlling the display means according to the display mode information group read by the second storage means so that the variable display of the pattern is executed.
When the final stop information is not received in the situation where the control by the last control information is performed in the display mode information group read out by the second storage means, the standby display is displayed in the display mode information group. A means for making the standby display continue in the display means by performing control again by the control information for performing the control (a function of executing the extension setting process of the sound light side MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment). ,
The gaming machine according to the feature J6, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature J7, the waiting period is extended by processing the display mode information group corresponding to the information of the execution period included in the start information, so that the first storage means stores the information in advance. It is possible to extend the waiting period according to the player's advantage while not increasing the number of display mode information groups.

For the configurations of features J1 to J7, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, and features H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Special information (1st special drawing) based on the fact that the predetermined acquisition conditions are satisfied (the game ball enters the first operating port 33, the game ball enters the second operating port 34). Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5203 and S5207 of the main MPU 62 in the thirteenth embodiment) for acquiring the hold information on the side and the hold information on the second special figure side), and
Acquisition information storage means (first special figure holding area 125, second special figure holding area 126) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
A predetermined profit granting means (start of special electric power in the main MPU 62) that grants a predetermined profit (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination. Function to execute processing) and
The game rounding operation is started, and the game rounding operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, so that the game rounding operation is performed in each game round. A function to execute the processing of the game control means (steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62) for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41), and the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound light side MPU 82. Function to execute, display side MPU92),
In a situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the special information having a digestion order earlier than the predetermined special information is used as an opportunity. When the game round is executed, the specific period selection means (in the thirteenth embodiment, the process of step S5404 in the main MPU 62 is executed) so that the execution period of the game round is longer than the period of the predetermined length. A function to execute the processing of steps S5504 to S5506 in the main MPU 62 in the 14th embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, in the situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the game round triggered by the special information whose digestion order precedes the predetermined special information. When it is executed, the execution period of the game is longer than the period of the predetermined length. As a result, the period until the game round that is triggered by the predetermined special information is started becomes longer, and the period required for the predetermined profit to be given is increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined profit from being repeated in a short time.

Feature K2. The specific period selection means makes the execution period of the game round triggered by the special information, which is the digestion order one time before the predetermined special information, longer than the period of the predetermined length. The gaming machine according to the feature K1, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature K2, the game in which the execution period of the game is longer than the period of the predetermined length due to the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information being stored in the acquired information storage means. The round is a game round triggered by the special information that is the digestion order one time before the predetermined special information. This makes it possible to prevent the execution period of the game from being excessively extended.

Feature K3. The specific period selection means according to the feature K1 or K2, wherein the execution period of the game round triggered by the predetermined special information is set to be longer than the period of the predetermined length. Gaming machine.

According to the feature K3, not only the game times triggered by the special information whose digestion order precedes the predetermined special information corresponding to the given correspondence information, but also the game times triggered by the predetermined special information. The execution period of is longer than the period of the predetermined length. This makes it possible to extend the period required for the predetermined profit to be granted.

Features K4. The specific period selection means has a digestion order earlier than the predetermined special information in a situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K3, wherein when the gaming round is executed with the special information as a trigger, the execution period of the gaming round is set to the longest period in the execution period.

According to the feature K4, when the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the game is triggered by the special information whose digestion order precedes the predetermined special information. The execution period of is the longest period in the execution period. As a result, in the situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, by the time the game round triggered by the predetermined special information is completed and the predetermined profit is given. It is possible to surely lengthen the required period, and it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Feature K5. The game according to feature K4, wherein the longest period is a period longer than the longest execution period of the game times that occurs when the predetermined special information is not stored in the acquired information storage means. Machine.

According to the feature K5, when the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the game is triggered by the special information whose digestion order precedes the predetermined special information. The execution period is longer than the longest execution period selected when the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not stored in the acquired information storage means. As a result, in the situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, by the time the game round triggered by the predetermined special information is completed and the predetermined profit is given. It is possible to surely lengthen the required period, and it is possible to set the execution period different from the case where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not stored in the acquired information storage means.

Features K6. The specific period selection means has a digestion order earlier than the predetermined special information in a situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means. When the game round is executed with the special information as a trigger, the execution period of the game round is longer than the period of the predetermined length, and the player's advantage (value of the total number of rounds counter 64c) is set. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K5, which is characterized by having a corresponding period.

According to the feature K6, when the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the game is triggered by the special information whose digestion order precedes the predetermined special information. The execution period of is longer than the period of a predetermined length, and is a period corresponding to the player's advantage. As a result, in the situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, by the time the game round triggered by the predetermined special information is completed and the predetermined profit is given. It is possible not only to lengthen the required period but also to lengthen it in a manner according to the player's advantage.

Feature K7. The acquired information storage means uses the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as the first special information (first special information (first) based on the fact that the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the first operating port 33). 1 The special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the second operating port 34) is stored as the reserved information on the special drawing side). 2 It is configured to be stored as special information (held information on the 2nd special drawing side).
When the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the gaming machine has the first information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the stored second special information. Even if the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the priority means (process of step S502 in the main MPU 62 is executed so that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means for the second special information. Function to do)
The specific period selection means is more digested than the predetermined second special information in a situation where the predetermined second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means. When the game round is executed triggered by the second special information in which the order is first, the game is characterized in that the execution period of the game round is longer than the period of the predetermined length. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K6.

According to the feature K7, the execution period of the game round is extended as described above for the second special information to be the target of the priority digestion. This makes it possible to prevent the execution period of the game from being excessively extended.

Features K8. When the predetermined second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific period selection means executes the game round triggered by the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Means for making the period longer than the period of the predetermined length (the function of executing the process of step S5409 in the main MPU 62 in the thirteenth embodiment, step S5511 in the main MPU 62 in the fourteenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature K7, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the process of step S5513.

According to the feature K8, when the predetermined second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the execution period of the game round triggered by the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means is also a predetermined length. It will be a longer period than the period. As a result, when the game round triggered by the first special information is executed after the game round triggered by the predetermined second special information is completed and the predetermined profit is given, the execution period of the game round is The period is longer than the specified length. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the predetermined profit is given in quick succession after the predetermined profit is given.

For the configurations of features K1 to K8, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, and features H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. A predetermined profit (depending on the high frequency winning mode) is given to the player based on the occurrence of a predetermined grant event (the end of the game round of the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result in the fifteenth embodiment) due to the game being performed. A profit-giving means (a function of executing the processes of steps S903, S906 and S907 in the main MPU 62) for imparting the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds), and
It is either that the predetermined grant event has occurred or that the predetermined profit has been granted between the time when the predetermined profit is granted and the time when the specific opportunity (digestion of the game times of the standard number of consecutive villas) occurs. A situation setting means (15th embodiment) for setting a subsequent game situation to a specific game situation (a situation in which "1" is set in the consecutive villa generation flag of the main RAM 64) based on the occurrence of a profit-related event. (Functions for executing the processes of step S5605, step S5703, step S5712, step S5713, step S5803, step S5813, step S5823 and step S5833) of the main MPU 62 in
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to feature L1, a profit-related event that is either a predetermined grant event or a predetermined profit was granted occurred between the time when the predetermined profit was granted and the time when the specific opportunity occurred. Based on this, the subsequent gaming situation becomes the specific gaming situation. As a result, when the predetermined profit is repeatedly generated in a short time, the game situation can be changed to the corresponding situation. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature L2. By changing the target period (launching cycle of the game ball, fluctuation duration of the game times, final stop period of the game times, opening period, interval period, ending period), the predetermined profit is given and then the predetermined period. It is a configuration in which the period required for a grant event to occur can vary.
The situation setting means has a longer target period as the specific gaming situation based on the occurrence of the profit-related event from the time when the predetermined profit is given to the time when the specific opportunity occurs. The gaming machine according to feature L1, which is characterized by being set to a situation.

According to the feature L2, a profit-related event that is either that a predetermined grant event has occurred or that a predetermined profit has been granted has occurred between the time when the predetermined profit is granted and the time when the specific opportunity occurs. Based on this, the target period becomes longer than before due to the specific game situation. As a result, when the predetermined profit is repeatedly generated in a short period of time, the period required for the predetermined profit to be granted becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature L3. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The predetermined grant event is a configuration that occurs after the game rotation operation corresponding to the grant of the predetermined profit is completed.
The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the specific opportunity is that the gaming times of the target reference number of times (consecutive villa reference number of times) are executed after the predetermined profit is given.

According to the feature L3, a profit-related event that is either that a predetermined grant event has occurred or that a predetermined profit has been granted between the time when the predetermined profit is granted and the game round of the target reference number of times is executed. Based on the occurrence of, the subsequent gaming situation becomes the specific gaming situation. As a result, when the predetermined profit is given again in a situation where the number of game times digested after the predetermined profit is given is small, the game situation can be changed to the corresponding situation.

Feature L4. When the target reference number of times of the game is executed in the specific game situation, the situation setting means terminates the specific game situation (executes the process of step S5615 of the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment). Function) The gaming machine according to feature L3.

According to the feature L4, it is possible to set both the number of executions of the game times as the setting standard of the specific game situation and the number of executions of the game times as the release standard of the specific game situation as the target reference number of times. As a result, the storage capacity required to store the number of executions of the reference game times is compared with the configuration in which the number of executions of the game times as the setting reference and the number of executions of the game times as the cancellation standard are individually set. Can be suppressed.

Feature L5. The situation setting means is the specific game when an end trigger (digestion of the game times of the standard number of consecutive villas) occurs even if the advantageous period (high frequency support mode) that is advantageous to the player continues. The gaming machine according to feature L4, which is characterized by terminating the situation.

According to the feature L5, even if the advantageous period continues, the specific game situation is terminated when the termination opportunity occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the specific game situation from continuing excessively.

Feature L6. In the situation setting means, the profit-related event occurs after the specific opportunity occurs after the predetermined profit is given even in a situation where the advantageous period (high frequency support mode) favorable to the player continues. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, characterized in that the subsequent gaming situation is not set to the specific gaming situation.

According to feature L6, even if the advantageous period continues, if a profit-related event occurs after a specific opportunity has occurred after the predetermined profit has been granted, the subsequent game status is set to the specific game status. Not done. This makes it possible to prevent the setting of the specific game situation from occurring excessively.

Feature L7. The feature L1 to L6 is characterized in that the profit-giving means shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode) as the granting of the predetermined profit. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature L7, it is possible to make the gaming situation a situation corresponding to the repeated occurrence of the special gaming state in a short time.

For the configurations of features L1 to L7, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, and features H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA), and
Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided so that it can be switched between the open state and the closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S912, S1003, and step S1107 in the main MPU 62) for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state. ,
A special transition means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable entry control is performed by the variable entry control means, and
In the special game state, the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs, a predetermined upper limit period elapses, and the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit number. A round generation means (in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S4402 to S4416 in the main MPU 62) to generate a round game that ends based on the satisfaction of any of the conditions for reaching.
Without changing the upper limit period in the round game, the player's advantage (10th A predetermined period variable means (a function of executing a process at the start of opening and a process of selecting a closing period of the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment), which is varied according to the number of target rounds in the embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature M1, the player can play the game while expecting the game state to shift to the special game state because the game state can shift to the special game state which is advantageous to the player. .. In this case, the period during which the variable ball entry means is closed in the round game is changed according to the player's advantage without changing the upper limit period in the round game, resulting in the round. The period during which the variable ball entry means is open in the game is varied. This makes it possible to make the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable entry means in the round game appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Features M2. As the round game, a predetermined round game in which the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs a plurality of times (a round game in an open / close execution mode triggered by a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result in the tenth embodiment) Exists and
In the predetermined target period, the variable ball-entry means sandwiched between the open state of one of the variable ball-entry means in the predetermined round game and the next open state is the closed state. The gaming machine according to feature M1, which is characterized by a period of time.

According to the feature M2, in the configuration in which the variable ball entry control occurs a plurality of times in the predetermined round game, the period during which one variable ball entry means is opened in the predetermined round game and the next variable ball entry means are The period during which the variable ball entry means sandwiched between the open states is closed varies according to the player's advantage. Then, the variable ball entry means that occurs after the period in which the variable ball entry means is closed as a result of the change in the period during which the variable ball entry means is closed is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed. The period during which is open will fluctuate. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable entry means in a predetermined round game appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Features M3. The predetermined period variation means is characterized in that the predetermined target period is lengthened when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage or when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. Features The gaming machine described in M2.

According to the feature M3, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period during which one variable entry means is opened in the predetermined round game and the next variable The period during which the variable ball-entry means sandwiched between the periods during which the ball-entry means is in the open state becomes longer. Then, the period during which the variable ball-entry means is closed is extended in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, and as a result, the period during which the variable ball-entry means is closed. The period during which the variable ball entry means generated later is opened is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Features M4. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the expected number of gaming balls entering the variable ball-entry means in the predetermined round game is reduced by lengthening the predetermined target period in the predetermined round game. ..

According to the feature M4, the period during which the variable ball entry means is closed is extended in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, and as a result, the variable ball entry means is closed. The period during which the variable ball entry means generated after the above is in the open state is shortened, and based on this, the expected number of game balls to be entered into the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature M5. The predetermined period variable means is the number of times that the variable ball-entry means is in the open state with a period in which the variable ball-in means is in the closed state in the round game without changing the upper limit period in the round game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M4, characterized in that the predetermined target period is changed according to the advantage of the player by changing the above according to the advantage of the player.

According to the feature M5, the number of occurrences of the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state is the number of occurrences of the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state in the round game without changing the upper limit period in the round game. By changing according to the advantage of the player, the predetermined target period will change according to the advantage of the player. Further, in the configuration, the length of the period during which the one variable ball entry means generated in the round game is in the open state may also change. Then, as the length of the period during which the one variable ball entry means is in the open state changes, the ease of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means also changes. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable entry means in the round game appropriate according to the advantage of the player.

Features M6. In the predetermined period variation means, when the advantage of the player becomes the predetermined advantage (first reference value or the second reference value) or more, or the advantage of the player becomes the predetermined advantage (first reference value or the first reference value). When the value is equal to or higher than the second reference value), the variable ball-entry means is opened with a period during which the variable ball-entry means is closed in the round game without changing the upper limit period of the round game. The gaming machine according to feature M5, wherein the predetermined target period is lengthened by increasing the number of states.

According to the feature M6, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the variable entry means is provided with a period in which the variable entry means is closed in the round game. The number of occurrences during the open period is increased. Then, the number of occurrences of the period during which the variable ball entry means is open is increased in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, so that the predetermined target period in the round game becomes longer, and as a result, the predetermined target period is extended. The period during which the variable ball entry means in the round game is open is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature M7. The gaming machine according to feature M6, wherein in the round game, the expected number of balls to be entered into the variable ball entry means in the round game is reduced by lengthening the predetermined target period.

According to the feature M7, the period during which the variable ball entry means is closed is extended in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, and as a result, the variable ball entry means is closed. The period during which the variable ball entry means generated after the above is in the open state is shortened, and based on this, the expected number of game balls to be entered into the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

It should be noted that, for the configurations of the features M1 to M7, the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, and the features H1 to H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. A payout means (payout device 76) for paying out the game medium to the player,
A payout control means (payout control device 77) that drives and controls the payout means so that the game medium is paid out based on the occurrence of the granting opportunity.
Equipped with
The payout control means is a speed variable means (step of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the 16th embodiment) in which the payout speed of the gaming medium by the payout means is changed according to the player's advantage (number of target rounds). A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processes of S6102 to S6106).

According to the feature N1, the payout speed of the game medium varies according to the advantage of the player. This makes it possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature N2. In the speed fluctuation means, when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage (first reference value or the second reference value) of the player, or the advantage of the player is the predetermined advantage (first). The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized in that the payout speed becomes slower than before when the value is equal to or higher than one reference value or a second reference value).

According to the feature N2, when the advantage of the player becomes the predetermined advantage or more, or when the advantage of the player becomes the predetermined advantage or more, the payout speed of the game medium becomes slower than before. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature N3. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) in which the player's advantage is higher than the first predetermined advantage are set. Has been
The speed fluctuation means is
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, the means for making the payout speed slower than before ( The function of executing the process of step S6105 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the 16th embodiment) and
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, the means for making the payout speed slower than before ( The function of executing the process of step S6106 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the 16th embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to the feature N2, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature N3, the payout speed of the game medium is gradually reduced according to the advantage of the player. Therefore, as the player's advantage increases, the cycle in which the game medium is applied becomes longer in stages. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Feature N4. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied as the game medium. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the payout cycle of the gaming ball according to the payout speed as a result of being varied by the speed fluctuation means is shorter than the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature N4, even if the payout speed of the game ball is changed according to the advantage of the player, the payout cycle of the game ball according to the payout speed is larger than the predetermined cycle which is the supply cycle of the game ball. short. This makes it possible to change the payout speed of the game ball within a range that does not cause a problem in the supply of the game ball to the game area.

Feature N5. External output means for outputting the payout information to the outside of the game machine based on the fact that the game medium is paid out by the payout means (processing of step S6111 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the 16th embodiment is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature N5, the payout information is output externally based on the fact that the game medium is actually paid out by the payout means. As a result, even in a configuration in which the number of gaming media for which payout has been completed is managed by a management device outside the gaming machine, the payout speed of the gaming media is changed according to the player's advantage. It becomes possible to appropriately perform management in the management device.

Feature N6. The speed fluctuation means is
Information grasping means (target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment) for grasping predetermined history information (target round number in the tenth embodiment) based on a predetermined game history due to the game being played, and
A means for determining the subsequent payout speed based on the predetermined history information (a function of executing the processes of steps S6102 to S6106 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the 16th embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5.

According to the feature N6, the predetermined history information is grasped based on the predetermined game history due to the game being played, and the payout speed of the game medium is changed based on the grasped predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent payout speed of the game medium changes according to the predetermined game history, so that it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature N7. The gaming machine according to feature N6, wherein the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the profit given to the player.

According to the feature N7, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the profit given to the player, the subsequent payout speed of the game medium is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent payout speed of the game medium changes according to the profit given to the player, so that the profit can be appropriately given to the player.

Feature N8. A period generation means (step S4402 to step S4416 of the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment) for generating a second predetermined period (round game) in which the expected value of giving the profit is higher than the first predetermined period (other than the round game). It has a function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to feature N7, wherein the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period.

According to the feature N8, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the expected value of giving profit is higher than the first predetermined period, the subsequent gaming medium is based on the predetermined history information. The payout speed fluctuates. As a result, since the subsequent payout speed of the game medium changes according to the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period, it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

For the configurations of features N1 to N8, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, and features H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic O group>
Features O1. A unit storage area (a unit storage area that can store unit information (a unit payout rate in the second embodiment and a value of the measurement round number counter 201 in the tenth embodiment) that makes it possible to specify the advantage of the player. Information storage means having a plurality of first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 in the second embodiment and first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the tenth embodiment (management area in the second embodiment). 160, in the tenth embodiment, the management area 203),
Based on the occurrence of a memory trigger (in the second embodiment, the total number of discharged pieces is equal to or more than a predetermined unit number, and in the tenth embodiment, the calculation trigger period elapses), the player at that time A storage execution means for storing the unit information that makes it possible to specify the advantage in the unit storage area to be stored among the plurality of unit storage areas (in the second embodiment, the process of step S1906 in the main MPU 62 is executed. (Function to execute the process of step S3803 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment) and
Based on the unit information stored in the plurality of unit storage areas, the advantage of the player in the calculation target period (target ball output rate in the second embodiment, target number of rounds in the tenth embodiment) is determined. Calculation means for calculating (a function of executing the processes of steps S1908 to S1910 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of steps S3805 and S3806 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment). ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature O1, the unit information at that time is stored in the unit storage area to be stored based on the occurrence of the storage opportunity, and the calculation target period is based on the unit information stored in the plurality of unit storage areas. The player's advantage is calculated. As a result, it is not necessary to respecify the unit information every time the player's advantage in the calculation target period is calculated, and the player in the next calculation target period with respect to the player's advantage in one calculation target period. The advantage of can be set to the advantage in the range shifted by the period until one memory opportunity occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to manage the advantage of the player in detail, and it is possible to appropriately give the profit to the player accordingly.

Feature O2. The unit information is information corresponding to the game value given to the player by the time the memory opportunity occurs.
The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the advantage of the player is information corresponding to the gaming value given to the player during the calculation target period.

According to the feature O2, it is possible to finely manage the information corresponding to the game value given to the player during the calculation target period.

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the memory trigger occurs based on the number of gaming values used by the player reaching the unit reference number.

According to the feature O3, as for the advantage of the player in the next calculation target period with respect to the advantage of the player in one calculation target period, the number of game values used by the player reaches the unit reference number. It is possible to set the advantage in the range shifted by the period up to.

Feature O4. A period generation means (10th implementation) for generating a second predetermined period (round game in the 10th embodiment) in which the expected value of giving profit is higher than the 1st predetermined period (other than the round game in the 10th embodiment). It is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S4402 to S4416 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment).
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the unit information is the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period until the storage opportunity occurs.

According to the feature O4, it is possible to manage the information corresponding to the number of times of the second predetermined period generated in the calculation target period in detail.

Feature O5. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA), and
Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided so that it can be switched between the open state and the closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4109, S4204, and step S4306 in the main MPU 62) for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state. ,
A special transition means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature O4, wherein the second predetermined period is a predetermined period during which the variable ball-entry means is in the open state in the special gaming state.

According to the feature O5, it is possible to finely manage the information corresponding to the predetermined period generated in the calculation target period.

Feature O6. As the special gaming state, the number of times during which the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result) and the period in which the variable ball-entry means is in the open state occurs is the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature O5, characterized in that at least a second special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result) exists.

According to the feature O6, in the configuration in which the number of times during which the variable entry means is open is different between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, the variable entry means is in the open state in the special gaming state. Information corresponding to the number of occurrences in a predetermined period is stored as unit information. This makes it possible to store the information corresponding to the profit actually given to the player as the unit information, as compared with the configuration in which the information corresponding to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state is stored as the unit information.

Feature O7. As the predetermined period, a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls to enter the variable ball-entry means is relatively large and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls is relatively small are relatively small. And at least exist,
The gaming machine according to feature O5 or O6, wherein the second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period, but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to the feature O7, the information corresponding to the number of occurrences of the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls to enter the variable ball entry means is relatively large is stored as unit information, while the variable ball entry means is stored. The number of occurrences of the predetermined second period in which the expected number of game balls to be entered is relatively small is not stored as unit information. This makes it possible to store information corresponding to the profit actually given to the player as unit information.

Feature O8. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O7, wherein the memory trigger occurs based on the elapse of a unit reference period shorter than the calculation target period.

According to the feature O8, the advantage of the player in the next calculation target period can be set to the advantage in the range shifted by the unit reference period with respect to the advantage of the player in one calculation target period. ..

Features O9. In the calculation means, the unit information that enables the storage execution means to specify the advantage of the player at that time based on the occurrence of the storage opportunity is stored in the unit storage area to be stored. In this case, the game according to any one of the features O1 to O8, which is characterized in that the advantage of the player in the calculation target period is calculated based on the unit information stored in the plurality of unit storage areas. Machine.

According to the feature O9, every time a storage opportunity occurs and the unit information at that time is stored in the unit storage area to be stored, the calculation target period is based on the unit information stored in the plurality of unit storage areas. The player's advantage is calculated. As a result, the advantage of the player in the next calculation target period is set to the advantage in the range shifted by the period until one memory opportunity occurs with respect to the advantage of the player in one calculation target period. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to manage the advantage of the player in detail, and it is possible to appropriately give the profit to the player accordingly.

Feature O10. A means for determining a subsequent game situation according to the advantage of the player calculated by the calculation means (in the second embodiment, a function of executing a cycle setting process and a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, a tenth implementation. The form is characterized by having a function of executing a final stop period selection process, an opening period selection process, an opening start process, a closing period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62). The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O9.

According to the feature O10, since the subsequent game situation is determined according to the advantage of the player calculated by the calculation means, it is possible to appropriately give the profit to the player. In particular, since the player's advantage is finely managed, it is possible to appropriately adjust the game situation.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features O1 to O10, the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, and the features H1 to H1 to Even if one or more of H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 are applied. good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, According to the inventions relating to the features of the feature K group, the feature L group, the feature M group, the feature N group, and the feature O group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. When the winning result is obtained, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is preferable that an appropriate profit is given to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... pachinko machine, 27 ... game ball launch mechanism, 31 ... general winning opening, 32 ... special electric winning device, 33 ... first operating port, 34 ... second operating port, 37 ... special figure unit, 41 ... symbol display device, 62 ... Main MPU, 63 ... Main ROM, 64 ... Main RAM, 64c ... Total number of rounds counter, 76 ... Payout device, 77 ... Payout control device, 82 ... Sound light side MPU, 83 ... Sound light side ROM, 92 ... Display side MPU, 125 ... 1st special figure holding area, 126 ... 2nd special figure holding area, 160 ... Management area, 161-166 ... Storage area, 173 ... Target ball output rate area, 181 ... Renso counter , 185 ... 1st base sequence table, 186 ... 2nd base sequence table, 187 ... 3rd base sequence table, 188 ... 4th base sequence table, 191 ... normal period table, 192 ... shortening period table, 195 ... 1 base arrangement table, 196 ... 2nd base arrangement table, 197 ... 3rd base arrangement table, 201 ... measurement round number counter, 203 ... management area, 203a to 203f ... storage area, G3 ... remaining time image, SA1 to SA9 ... Standby area.

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. The grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination and
A predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to a player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination.
The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, so that the game round operation is performed in each game round. A game control means that controls the game execution means,
In a situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the special information having a digestion order earlier than the predetermined special information is used as an opportunity. When a game round is executed, a specific period selection means for making the execution period of the game round longer than a predetermined length period, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images